Elmark Electrical Equipment 2024-EN

The Brand of Electricity 

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 

CATALOGUE | 2024

AUTOMATION 

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) & Accessories | page 13 

C 40N MCB 4.5kA | 

page 13 

C60N MCB 6kA | 

page 15 

C100L MCB 10kA | 

page 17 

C100M MCB 10kA | 

page 21 

C60DC PV MCB 6kA | 

page 23 

Devices for MCB | 

page 27 

High power devices | page 29 

Base for High power 

devices | page 29 

Fuse links | page 30 

RT18 Switch 

disconnectors | 

page 34 

Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) | page 52 

Photovoltdic fuse 

holders | page 36 

Change over switch | 

page 41 

ISS2 Switch 

disconnectors | 

page 42 

DS1 MCCB 

Thermo-magnetic & electronic 

type | page 44 

Manual devices for 

MCCB | page 50 

Electronic devices for 

MCCB | page 51 

1500V DC1 MCCB 

Thermo-magnetic type | 

page 52 

DW1 MCCB | page 54 

Change-over switch 

EQ1 | page 55 

Residual current devices (RCD) | page 57 

RCD JEL1 AC type | 

page 57 

RCD JEL1A type A | 

page 58 

RCD JEL1B type B | 

page 60 

RCBO JEL5A type A | 

page 61 

RCBO JEL4A Electronic 

type A | page 63 

RCBO JEL8A with arc 

fault protective, type A | 

page 64 

Surge protection devices | page 66 

Combined surge 

arresters type 1+2 | 

page 66 

SPD AC | page 68 Combined SPD AC/DC | 

page 69 

DC SPD for PV systems | 

page 70 

Low voltage contactors | page 73 

LT1D/HK | page 73 LT1D | page 75 CJ19-43 | page 78 LT4D | page 79 Auxiliary 

contacts | page 80 

Module contactors | 

page 83

AUTOMATION 

Thermal protection devices | Starters | page 84 

Thermal relays LT2 | 

page 84 

Thermo-magnetic 

automatic breakers 

TM 2 | page 87 

Accessories for TM2 | 

page 88 

Frequency inverters | Soft starters | page 96 

Starters for direct start | 

page 91 

“Delta-Star” Starters | 

page 93 

Reverse starters | 

page 94 

Frequency 

inverters ELM2000 | 

page 96 

Frequency 

inverters ELM600 | 

page 97 

LCD remote keypad for 

cabinet IP66 | 

page 96 

Timers and relays | Digital counters | page 99 

Cable for remote 

keypad | page 96 

Parameter copy stick | 

page 96 

Soft starters | page 98 

Timer TM180 | 

page 99 

Multi-function relay 

ELR-4 | page 104 

2P & 4P Impulse relays | 

page 111 

Wi-Fi Smart relay 

ELR-1W | page 107 

Programmable timers 

TE15A | page 109 

Universal digital 

counter | page 114 

Transformers | Industrial relays | page 118 

MES type transformers | 

page 118 

Industrial relay ELM | 

page 120 

Bases for industrial relays 

| page 121 

Interface relays L-14F-LS | 

page 122 

Bases for interface relays 

| page 123 

Power relays EL-40FN | 

page 124 

Measurement devices | Limit switches | Sensors | page 129 

Digital measurement 

devices EL-ED16R | 

page 129 

Multi-functional 

programmable meter | 

page 134 

Analogue measurement 

devices SD72 | 

page 136 

Limit switches CSA | 

page 138 

Sensors EL-CM | 

page 144 

Rotary switches | Buttons & Indicators | Warning lights | page 153 

Power supplies DR-45 | 

page 150 

Rotary switches 

LW26-GS | page 153 

Buttons EL-2211T | page 

158 

LED Indicators 

AD56-22-W | page 160 

Buttons EL1-B213 | page 

164 

Telpher control MBP | 

page 165 

Warning lights LTE1101J | 

page 166

INSTALLATION 

Industrial plugs & sockets | Industrial boards | page 170 

Movable industrial 

plugs HT/HTN | page 

170 

Movable industrial 

sockets HT | page 171 

Fixed industrial plugs 

HT | page 172 

Fixed industrial sockets 

HT | page 173 

Empty industrial boards 

EC69025 | page 180 

Modular Distribution boards | Data communication racks | page 183 

Assembled industrial 

boards EC69025 | 

page 180 

Modular distribution 

enclosures MATRIX | 

page 183 

Accessories for modular 

distribution enclosures | 

page 196 

Dual thermostat for fans | 

page 197 

Heaters for distribution 

boxes | page 198 

Fans for distribution 

boxes | page 199 

Data communication 

cabinet racks | page 200 

Distribution boards | page 203 

Metal boards CPK , IP54 | 

page 205 

Stainless steel metal 

boars SXF series | 

page 206 

Plastic boards for flush 

mounting | page 208 

Plastic boards for 

surface mounting | 

page 210 

Cable installation systems & Cable trunking | page 214 

Plastic boards for 

surface mounting | 

page 211 

Halogen free plastic 

boards ABS, IP65 | 

page 213 

Non-isolated 

connection tubes GLT | 

page 214 

Isolated terminals SVS | 

page 217 

Plastic cable trunking | 

page 227 

Air conditioning trunking 

| page 229 

Underfloor trunking 

systems | page 231 

Sockets for 

underfloor trunking 

systems | page 234 

Cable support systems | page 235 

Insulating conduits | 

page 236 

Halogen free rigid 

insulating conduit | 

page 237 

Metal cable trays | 

page 244 

Accessories for metal 

cable trays | page 245 

Wire mesh cable trays | 

page 247 

Accessories wire mesh 

cable trays | page 248 

Lighting protection | page 249 

Air-termination rod | 

page 249 

Earthing rod with strip | 

page 249 

Hot-dip galvanized 

strip | page 251 

Aluminum round conductor 

| page 251 

Lighting protection 

accessories | page 252 

Lighting protection 

accessories | page 254

INSTALLATION 

Distribution boxes | page 255 

Junction boxes for brick 

and concrete | 

page 255 

Console boxes | 

page 256 

Console boxes for plasterboard 

| page 259 

Cable terminals & Cable consumables | page 265 

Distribution boxes for 

plasterboard | 

page 258 

Waterproof distribution 

boxes, IP44 | page 260 

Waterproof distribution 

boxes, IP65 | page 261 

DIN rails | page 266 Zero terminals | 

Fixed terminals | 

page 267 

page 268 

Terminal blocks | 

page 271 

PVC Insulating tapes | 

page 277 

Heat shrinkage tubes | 

page 279 

Cable reels | Multi-plugs | Accessories | page 283 

Cable reels | page 283 Desktop multi-plugs | Multi-plugs with cables | 

page 285 

page 286 

Adapters | page 289 Rubber plugs | 

page 291 

Plug adapters | 

page 292 

Cables & Conductors | page 295 

Outside power cables | 

page 295 

Inside power cables | 

page 297 

Installation conductors | 

page 297 

Cables with rubber 

insulation | page 303 

Communication cables | 

page 304 

Alarm cable | page 306 

Explosion proof installation systems | page 310 

Ex-proof starters | 

page 310 

Ex-proof indicators | 

page 311 

Ex-proof boxes | 

page 312 

Ex-proof ceiling lamp | 

page 314 

Ex-proof high bay | 

page 316 

Ex-proof emergency 

lamp | page 316

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS 

CITY Series, German & French type | page 320 

Switches CITY series | 

page 320 

Doorbell switch CITY 

Series | page 375 

Sockets CITY Series | 

page 381 

Dimmer switch CITY 

series | page 336 

Network sockets CITY 


Colored panels CITY 


LECCE Series, Italian & German type | page 349 

Switches LECCE series | 

page 349 

Curtain control 

switches LECCE Series | 

page 349 

Sockets LECCE series | 

page 351 

RHYME Series, German & French type | page 369 

Network sockets LECCE 


Installation frames LECCE 


Colored panels LECCE 


Switches RHYME series | 

page 369 

Push light button 

Switches RHYME series | 

page 375 

Sockets RHYME series | 

page 381 

Double Sockets RHYME 


Network sockets RHYME 


Colored panels RHYME 


LONDON Series, UK type | page 399 

Switches LONDON 




Sockets LONDON 








ANTIQUE Series, German type | page 408 

Switches ANTIQUE 




Sockets ANTIQUE 




Sockets ANTIQUE 


Boiler switches | 

page 416 

Waterproof switches & sockets, German type | page 408 

Waterproof switches 

IP44 | page 413 


IP65 | page 413 

Waterproof socket 

IP44 | page 414 

Waterproof sockets 

IP65 | page 414 

Waterproof sockets 

IP44 | page 415 


with sockets IP44 | 

page 415

QUALITY & INSURANCE CERTIFICATES 

Аll available certificates can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu 

7



8



9

AUTOMATION 

• Miniature circuit breakers & 

accessories 

• High power safety devices & 

isolating switches 

• Switch disconnectors 

• Isolating switches 

• Moulded case circuit 

breakers 

• Residual current devices 

• Surge arresters 

• Low voltage contactors 

• Thermal overload relays 

• Starters 

• Frequency inverters 

• Timers 

• Transformers 

• Industrial relays 

• Measurement devices 

• Limit switches 

• Sensors 

• Rotary switches 

• Buttons & Indicators 

• Warning lights & Towers

AUTOMATION | MINI CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 

* for industrial usage 

3 years warranty 

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C40N 

C4xN 

C x 

number of poles (1,2,3) 

breaking capacity in (kA) 

tripping curve C 

rated current in (A) 


Documents corresponding to 

the product: 

Standard EN60898-1 

EN60947-2 

FUNCTIONS 

• Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit 

• It can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits 

• In combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the 

protected circuit 

• For mounting in residential and industrial buildings 

• For mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m 

• Allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 4500 A 

TECHNICAL DATA 

• Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz 

• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500A 

• Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu 

• Isolating voltage:≥2000V 

• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 4000 

• Mechanical (number of cycles): 20000 

• Class of current limiting: 3 

• IP code: IP>20 

• Tripping: 

‣ C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power 

supply cables and conventional consumers 

• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane 

Q235– A 

• Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance 

• Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m 

• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C /3s 

• Maximum current release containing: 

‣ Copper coil »composition: pure copper T2 type 

»Resistance: from 0.6 to 180m 

»Welding effort:

AC current type 


1P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C40N 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

Recommended Packing/Box 

conductor (mm²) (pcs) 

41660C C41N / 2A 1 2 4.5 1.0 12/240 

41661C C41N / 4A 1 4 4.5 1.0 12/240 

41651C C41N / 6A 1 6 4.5 1.0 12/240 

41652C C41N / 10A 1 10 4.5 1.5 12/240 

41653C C41N / 16A 1 16 4.5 2.5 12/240 

41654C C41N / 20A 1 20 4.5 2.5 12/240 

41655C C41N / 25A 1 25 4.5 4.0 12/240 

41656C C41N / 32A 1 32 4.5 6.0 12/240 

41657C C41N / 40A 1 40 4.5 10.0 12/240 

41658C C41N / 50A 1 50 4.5 10.0 12/240 

41659C C41N / 63A 1 63 4.5 10.0 12/240 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 



41670C C42N / 6A 2 6 4.5 1.0 6/120 

41671C C42N / 10A 2 10 4.5 1.5 6/120 

41672C C42N / 16A 2 16 4.5 2.5 6/120 

41673C C42N / 20A 2 20 4.5 2.5 6/120 

41674C C42N / 25A 2 25 4.5 4.0 6/120 

41675C C42N / 32A 2 32 4.5 6.0 6/120 

41676C C42N / 40A 2 40 4.5 10.0 6/120 

41677C C42N / 50A 2 50 4.5 10.0 6/120 

41678C C42N / 63A 2 63 4.5 10.0 6/120 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 





Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 



41641C C43N / 6A 3 6 4.5 1.0 4/80 

41642C C43N / 10A 3 10 4.5 1.5 4/80 

41643C C43N / 16A 3 16 4.5 2.5 4/80 

41644C C43N / 20A 3 20 4.5 2.5 4/80 

41645C C43N / 25A 3 25 4.5 4.0 4/80 

41646C C43N / 32A 3 32 4.5 6.0 4/80 

41647C C43N / 40A 3 40 4.5 10.0 4/80 

41648C C43N / 50A 3 50 4.5 10.0 4/80 

41649C C43N / 63A 3 63 4.5 10.0 4/80 

Select language on 

page 168: 

BG 

BA 

CR DE EL FR HU IT RO RS 

Sl 

SK 

13


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C60N 

C6xN 

C x 

number of poles (1,2,3,4) 




tripping curve C,B 


the product: 


FUNCTIONS 





• For mounting in industrial buildings with high contamination level of the electric systems 

• For mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m 

• Allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A 





• Isolating voltage:≥2000V 

• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 8000 

• Mechanical (number of cycles): 50000 



• Tripping curve: 

‣ B – the maximum current release breaks between 3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits and 

generators 

‣ C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power 

supply cables and conventional consumers 

• Joining terminal: Combined screw clamp made of 1.5 cold extruded Q235-A material with 

additional coating 

• Plastic box – nylon glass filled FR material 

• Status indicator 


• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s 

• Heat resistance of internal non-electrical components: 850°C / 10 s 


‣ coil: solenoid 

»resistance: from 0.6 to 180m 

»welding effort:



Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity 

(kA) 



41100C 41501C C61N / 1A 1 1 6 1.0 12/240 

41102C 41502C C61N / 2A 1 2 6 1.0 12/240 

41104C 41504C C61N / 4A 1 4 6 1.0 12/240 

41106C 41506C C61N / 6A 1 6 6 1.0 12/240 

41110C 41510C C61N / 10A 1 10 6 1.5 12/240 

41116C 41516C C61N / 16A 1 16 6 2.5 12/240 

41120C 41520C C61N / 20A 1 20 6 2.5 12/240 

41125C 41525C C61N / 25A 1 25 6 4.0 12/240 

41132C 41532C C61N / 32A 1 32 6 6.0 12/240 

41140C 41540C C61N / 40A 1 40 6 10.0 12/240 

41150C 41550C C61N / 50A 1 50 6 10.0 12/240 

41163C 41563C C61N / 63A 1 63 6 10.0 12/240 




Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity 

(kA) 



41202C 41602C C62N / 2A 2 2 6 1.0 6/120 

41204C 41604C C62N / 4A 2 4 6 1.0 6/120 

41206C 41606C C62N / 6A 2 6 6 1.0 6/120 

41210C 41610C C62N / 10A 2 10 6 1.5 6/120 

41216C 41616C C62N / 16A 2 16 6 2.5 6/120 

41220C 41620C C62N / 20A 2 20 6 2.5 6/120 

41225C 41625C C62N / 25A 2 25 6 4.0 6/120 

41232C 41632C C62N / 32A 2 32 6 6.0 6/120 

41240C 41640C C62N / 40A 2 40 6 10.0 6/120 

41250C 41650C C62N / 50A 2 50 6 10.0 6/120 

41263C 41663C C62N / 63A 2 63 6 10.0 6/120 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

15


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 






Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Type 

Type 

Number of 

poles 


Number of 

poles 

Rated 

current 

In (A) 

Rated 

current In 

(A) 

Breaking Recommended 

capacity (kA) conductor 

(mm²) 

41302C 41702C C63N / 2A 3 2 6 1.0 4/80 

41304C 41704C C63N / 4A 3 4 6 1.0 4/80 

41306C 41706C C63N / 6A 3 6 6 1.0 4/80 

41310C 41710C C63N / 10A 3 10 6 1.5 4/80 

41316C 41716C C63N / 16A 3 16 6 2.5 4/80 

41320C 41720C C63N / 20A 3 20 6 2.5 4/80 

41325C 41725C C63N / 25A 3 25 6 4.0 4/80 

41332C 41732C C63N / 32A 3 32 6 6.0 4/80 

41340C 41740C C63N / 40A 3 40 6 10.0 4/80 

41350C 41750C C63N / 50A 3 50 6 10.0 4/80 

41363C 41763C C63N / 63A 3 63 6 10.0 4/80 



(mm²) 

41402C 41802C C64N / 2A 4 2 6 1.0 3/60 

41404C 41804C C64N / 4A 4 4 6 1.0 3/60 

41406C 41806C C64N / 6A 4 6 6 1.0 3/60 

41410C 41810C C64N / 10A 4 10 6 1.5 3/60 

Packing/ 

Box 

(pcs) 

41416C 41816C C64N / 16A 4 16 6 2.5 3/60 

41420C 41820C C64N / 20A 4 20 6 2.5 3/60 

41425C 41825C C64N / 25A 4 25 6 4.0 3/60 

41432C 41832C C64N / 32A 4 32 6 6.0 3/60 

41440C 41840C C64N / 40A 4 40 6 10.0 3/60 

41450C 41850C C64N / 50A 4 50 6 10.0 3/60 

41463C 41863C C64N / 63A 4 63 6 10.0 3/60 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

16 

ELMARK 

Download BUSINESS APP from www.elmarkholding.eu or for mobile from or

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C100L 

C10xL 

C x 

number of poles (1,2,3) 


tripping curve B, C 


tripping curve C, B 


the product: 



FUNCTIONS 









• Isolating voltage:≥2000V, 1 min at impulse wave 1.2/50μs 

• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000 

• Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000 

• Class of current limiting:3 


• Tripping curve: C 

MOUNTING 

• Vertical 

• DIN-rail 

• Possibility for labeling 

1P 2P 3P 



1P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C100L 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated 

current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity 

(kA) 



41101C 41101C/B C101L/6A 1 6 10 1.0 12/240 

41103C 41103C/B C101L/10A 1 10 10 1.5 12/240 

41105C 41105C/B C101L/16A 1 16 10 2.5 12/240 

41107C 41107C/B C101L/20A 1 20 10 2.5 12/240 

41108C 41108C/B C101L/25A 1 25 10 4.0 12/240 

41109C 41109C/B C101L/32A 1 32 10 6.0 12/240 

41111C 41111C/B C101L/40A 1 40 10 10.0 12/240 

41112C 41112C/B C101L/50A 1 50 10 10.0 12/240 

41113C 41113C/B C101L/63A 1 63 10 16.0 12/240 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

17


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 






Catalogue Catalogue Type Number of Rated Breaking Recommended Packing/ 

number 

Curve C 

number 

Curve B 

poles current 

In (A) 


(mm²) 

Box 

(pcs) 

41201C 41201C/B C102L/6A 2 6 10 1.0 6/120 

41203C 41203C/B C102L/10A 2 10 10 1.5 6/120 

41205C 41205C/B C102L/16A 2 16 10 2.5 6/120 

41207C 41207C/B C102L/20A 2 20 10 2.5 6/120 

41208C 41208C/B C102L/25A 2 25 10 4.0 6/120 

41209C 41209C/B C102L/32A 2 32 10 6.0 6/120 

41211C 41211C/B C102L/40A 2 40 10 10.0 6/120 

41212C 41212C/B C102L/50A 2 50 10 10.0 6/120 

41213C 41213C/B C102L/63A 2 63 10 16.0 6/120 


Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated 

current 

In (A) 



(mm²) 

Packing/ 

Box 

(pcs) 

41301C 41301C/B C103L/6A 3 6 10 1.0 4/80 

41303C 41303C/B C103L/10A 3 10 10 1.5 4/80 

41305C 41305C/B C103L/16A 3 16 10 2.5 4/80 

41307C 41307C/B C103L/20A 3 20 10 2.5 4/80 

41308C 41308C/B C103L/25A 3 25 10 4.0 4/80 

41309C 41309C/B C103L/32A 3 32 10 6.0 4/80 

41311C 41311C/B C103L/40A 3 40 10 10.0 4/80 

41312C 41312C/B C103L/50A 3 50 10 10.0 4/80 

41313C 41313C/B C103L/63A 3 63 10 16.0 4/80 



Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 


capacity (kA) conductor (mm²) 

41401C 41401C/B C104L/6A 4 6 10 1.0 3/60 

41403C 41403C/B C104L/10A 4 10 10 1.5 3/60 

41405C 41405C/B C104L/16A 4 16 10 2.5 3/60 

41407C 41407C/B C104L/20A 4 20 10 2.5 3/60 

41408C 41408C/B C104L/25A 4 25 10 4.0 3/60 

41409C 41409C/B C104L/32A 4 32 10 6.0 3/60 

41411C 41411C/B C104L/40A 4 40 10 10.0 3/60 

41412C 41412C/B C104L/50A 4 50 10 10.0 3/60 

41413C 41413C/B C104L/63A 4 63 10 16.0 3/60 

Packing/ 

Box 

(pcs) 

18 

ELMARK 


MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS DP1N (1P + E) 

FUNCTIONS 

• Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit 


• It breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead 

conductor 


• Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz 

• Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A 

• Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu 

• Insulating voltage: ≥2000V 

• Tripping curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power 

supply 

• Cables and conventional consumers 

CONNECTING 

• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal 

• Power supply (conducting): 

‣ power supply busbar DP1N 

‣ flexible or rigid conductor 

• Mounting: on DIN-rail 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

Recommended 

conductor (mm²) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41006C DP1N/6 1P+N 6 4.5 1.0 12/240 

41010C DP1N/10 1P+N 10 4.5 1.5 12/240 

41016C DP1N/16 1P+N 16 4.5 2.5 12/240 

41020C DP1N/20 1P+N 20 4.5 2.5 12/240 

41025C DP1N/25 1P+N 25 4.5 4.0 12/240 

41032C DP1N/32 1P+N 32 4.5 6.0 12/240 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 





page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

19


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SERIES C100M 

C100M 

D x 

constructive series 

number of poles (1;2;3;4) 

rated current 

tripping curve C, D, B 


the product: 


EN 60947-2 

FUNCTIONS 









• Isolating volatage:≥2000V 

• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000 

• Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000 

• Class of current limiting:3 


• Tripping curve: C,D 


Q235 – A 

• Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance 




‣ copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type 

»resistance: from 148 to 230m 

»welding effort:


1P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C100M 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve D 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve D 

Type 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

41180 41180B 41180D C100M 1 80 10 9/180 

41190 41190B 41190D C100M 1 100 10 9/180 

41195 41195B 41195D C100M 1 125 10 9/180 


Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41280 41282 41281 C100M 2 80 10 6/120 

41290 41292 41291 C100M 2 100 10 6/120 




Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve D 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

41380 41382 41381 C100M 3 80 10 4/60 

41390 41392 41391 C100M 3 100 10 4/60 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 





Catalogue 

number 

Curve C 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve B 

Catalogue 

number 

Curve D 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

41480 41482 41481 C100M 4 80 10 3/60 

41490 41492 41491 C100M 4 100 10 3/60 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 



page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

21

AUTOMATION | DC ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



DC MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) 

C6xDC 

C x 

number of poles (1,2) 






the product: 



MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C60DC 

FUNCTIONS 

• For lowering constant current voltaic arc and use of the breaker at constant current consumer 

protection 

• Protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit at alternating 

current and constant current power supply circuits 

• For commutation and control of electrical circuits 

• In combination with auxiliary alternating current devices for remote control, commutation or 

indication of the protected circuit 

• For mounting in industrial buildings 

• For protection of consumers generating short circuit currents to 6000 A at alternating current 

power supply 


• Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC 

• Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A 

• Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu 

• Insulating voltage: ≥2000V 

• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥4000 

• Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥20000 



• Tripping curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect 

power supply cables and conventional consumers 


Q235– A 

• Plastic box – nylon glass filled FR material 




‣ Coil: solenoid 

»resistance: from 0.6 to 180m 

»welding effort:

DC current DC type 

curent type 

1P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C60DC 

Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

2P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS C60DC 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

Recommended 

conductor 

(mm²) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41164C C61DC / 1A 1 1 6 1.0 12/240 

41165C C61DC / 2A 1 2 6 1.0 12/240 

41166C C61DC / 4A 1 4 6 1.0 12/240 

41167C C61DC / 6A 1 6 6 1.0 12/240 

41168C C61DC / 10A 1 10 6 1.5 12/240 

41169C C61DC / 16A 1 16 6 2.5 12/240 

41170C C61DC / 20A 1 20 6 2.5 12/240 

41171C C61DC / 25A 1 25 6 4.0 12/240 

41172C C61DC / 32A 1 32 6 6.0 12/240 

41173C C61DC / 40A 1 40 6 10.0 12/240 

41174C C61DC / 50A 1 50 6 10.0 12/240 

41175C C61DC / 63A 1 63 6 10.0 12/240 



41176C C62DC / 2A 2 2 6 1.0 6/120 

41177C C62DC / 4A 2 4 6 1.0 6/120 

41178C C62DC / 6A 2 6 6 1.0 6/120 

41179C C62DC / 10A 2 10 6 1.5 6/120 

41181C C62DC / 16A 2 16 6 2.5 6/120 

41182C C62DC / 20A 2 20 6 2.5 6/120 

41183C C62DC / 25A 2 25 6 4.0 6/120 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



DC current DC type 

curent type 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

23

MCB Characteristics 

Circuit Diagram 

ircuit Diagram 


the product: 

Standard IEC60947-2 

1 3 1 3 5 7 

1 3 1 3 5 7 

2 4 

2 4 

72 

EKM1-63DC 6KA/10KA DC MCB 

Mini Circuit Breaker 

YEARS TOTAL 

WARRANTY MCB Characteristics 

+ 

7 standard 

Characteristics Curves 

0 extended 

2 4 6 8 

1P 2P 4P 

1P 2P 4P 

Overall and Installation Dimension(mm) 

verall and Installation Dimension(mm) 

7 




18 

18 


18 

36 

54 

72 

Time limit for 

Expected 

Initial state tripping or 

Remarks 

Time limit for 

result 

not tripping Expected 

Initial state tripping or 

Remarks 

result 

not tripping 

a 1.05ln Cold state a t≤1h 

a 1.05ln Cold state a t≤1h 

b 1.30ln t

DC current type 

DC 

curent type 

DC current type 

DC 

curent type 

2P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60DC PV 500V DC 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

Recommended 


Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41264 C62DC PV/6A 2 6 6 4.0 1/6/90 

41265 C62DC PV/10A 2 10 6 4.0 1/6/90 

41266 C62DC PV/13A 2 13 6 4.0 1/6/90 

41267 C62DC PV/16A 2 16 6 4.0 1/6/90 

41268 C62DC PV/20A 2 20 6 6.0 1/6/90 

41269 C62DC PV/25A 2 25 6 6.0 1/6/90 

41270 C62DC PV/32A 2 32 6 10.0 1/6/90 

41271 C62DC PV/40A 2 40 6 10.0 1/6/90 

41272 C62DC PV/50A 2 50 6 16.0 1/6/90 

41273 C62DC PV/63A 2 63 6 25.0 1/6/90 

4P MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) C60DC PV 1000V DC 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Breaking 

capacity (kA) 

Recommended 


Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41564 C64DC PV/6A 4 6 6 4.0 1/3/45 

41565 C64DC PV/10A 4 10 6 4.0 1/3/45 

41566 C64DC PV/13A 4 13 6 4.0 1/3/45 

41567 C64DC PV/16A 4 16 6 4.0 1/3/45 

41568 C64DC PV/20A 4 20 6 6.0 1/3/45 

41569 C64DC PV/25A 4 25 6 6.0 1/3/45 

41570 C64DC PV/32A 4 32 6 10.0 1/3/45 

41571 C64DC PV/40A 4 40 6 10.0 1/3/45 

41572 C64DC PV/50A 4 50 6 16.0 1/3/45 

41573 C64DC PV/63A 4 63 6 25.0 1/3/45 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

25

AUTOMATION | DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

SINGLE-PHASE DIGITAL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT PROTECTOR 

FUNCTIONS 

• Under-voltage protection 

• Over-voltage protection 

• Over-current protection 

FACTORY SETTING 

• Over-voltage trip value: 270V 

• Under-voltage trip value: 170V 

• Over-current trip value: 63A 

• Voltage power off time: 2s 

• Starting delay time: 2s 

• Current power off time: 2s 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

voltage 

Over-voltage 

protection 

range 


• Operated voltage range: 80-400V AC; 

50/60Hz (Single-phase) 

• Rated current: 63A 

• Over-voltage protection value: 230-300V AC 

• Under-voltage protection value: 140-230VAC 

• Over-current protection value: 1-63A 

• Voltage power off time: 0-400s 

• Current power off time: 0-30s 

• Voltage range setting step: 1V 

• Time range setting step: 1s 

• Power consumption: ≤ 1.5W 

• Mechanical life: 100 000 

• Relative humidity: 45-90% Rh 

• Altitude: up to 2000m 

• Pollution level: 2 class 

• Dimensions: 36x80x66mm 

• Mounting: on DIN rail 

Under-voltage 

protection 

range 

Over-current 

protection 

range 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

41906 ELMARK MN4 220V AC 230-300V AC 140-230V AC 1-63A 1/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

THREE-PHASE DIGITAL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT PROTECTOR 

FUNCTIONS 

• Under-voltage protection 

• Over-voltage protection 

• Over-current protection 

FACTORY SETTING 

• Over-voltage trip value: 420V 

• Under-voltage trip value: 210V 

• Over-current trip value: 63A 

• Voltage power off time: 2s 

• Starting delay time: 2s 

• Current power off time: 2s 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

voltage 

Over-voltage 

protection 

range 


• Operated voltage range: 140-500V AC; 50/60Hz 

(Three-phase) 


• Over-voltage protection value: 390-500V AC 

• Under-voltage protection value: 140-370VAC 

• Over-current protection value: 1-63A 

• Voltage power off time: 0-400s 

• Current power off time: 0-30s 

• Voltage range setting step: 1V 

• Time range setting step: 1s 

• Power consumption: ≤ 1.5W 

• Mechanical life: 100 000 

• Relative humidity: 45-90% Rh 


• Pollution level: 2 class 

• Dimensions: 72x80x66mm 


Under-voltage 

protection 

range 

Over-current 

protection 

range 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

41907 ELMARK MN4 400V AC 390-500V AC 140-370V AC 1-63A 1/50 

26 

ELMARK 



the product: 

EN 60255-1; IEC60947-5-1 


the product: 

EN 60255-1; IEC60947-5-1 

SINGLE POLE MONITORING VOLTAGE RELAY MN1 

FUNCTIONS 

• Protect electrical equipment from over & under voltage 

• Voltage measurement accuracy

AUTOMATION | DEVICES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

SHUNT RELEASE MX 

FUNCTIONS 

• Remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed 

• Allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage recovery 

• Indication of the device’s location 


• Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz 

• Isolating voltage: ≥2000V 


CONNECTING 


• Conductors: flexible up to 1.5mm² 

• Tightening moment: 1.33Nm 

• The power supply of the release is accomplished at the outlet of the breaker 

MOUNTING 

• Vertical, clamps with two pins to the breaker’s rivets and the executive mechanism is joined up 

to the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Rated voltage Type breaker Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41902C ELMARK MX 60 230V C60 12/240 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



AUXILIARY CONTACT OF 

FUNCTIONS 

• At circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to the control or signalization system 

• Indication of the location of the auxiliary contact and the breaker 


• Rated voltage: 230V 



CONNECTING 


• Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 

MOUNTING 

• Vertical, clamps with two pins to breaker’s rivets, and the executive mechanism is joined up to 

the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Rated voltage Type breaker 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41901C ELMARK OF 60 230V C60 12/240 

28 

ELMARK 


HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES 

Documents corresponding to the 

product: 

Standard EN 60269-1 

BASES FOR HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES 

The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permittivity alloy with mounted 

contact jaws of electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy 

fuse links taking out. All current leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts; 

the terminals also end with bolts, to which the power supply conductors are connected. The bases 

are offered in five type sizes corresponding to the five types of fuse links. 

Remark : Fuse bases SIST are made of resin / Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain 

Base type A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C1 C2 Ød 

SIST00 25 100 120 - 30 25 60 7.5 

SIST 0 25 150 170 - 30 37 72 7.5 

SIST1 25 175 200 30 58 38 84 10.5 

SIST2 25 200 225 30 60 38 100 10.5 

SIST3 25 210 250 30 60 40 105 10.5 

Catalogue 

number 

Base type 

Overall dimensions (mm) 

Fuse link type Rated 

current (A) 

Rated voltage 

Un (V) 

Weight 

(gr) 

12001 SIST00 NT 00 up to 160 600 193 5/120 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

AUTOMATION | SAFETY DEVICES 

Catalogue 

number 

Base type 

Fuse link 

type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Rated voltage 

Un (V) 

Weight 

(gr) 

12010 SIST0 NT 0 up to 160 600 295 3/54 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Base type 

Fuse link 

type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Rated voltage 

Un (V) 

Weight 

(gr) 

12100 SIST1 NT 1 up to 250 600 550 3/36 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

Catalogue 

number 

Base type 

Fuse link 

type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Rated voltage 

Un (V) 

Weight 

(gr) 

12200 SIST2 NT 2 up to 400 600 770 1/20 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

Catalogue 

number 

Base type 

Fuse link 

type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Rated voltage 

Un (V) 

Weight 

(gr) 

12300 SIST3 NT 3 up to 630 600 965 1/20 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

29



product: 



FUSE LINKS FOR HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICE 

The series fuse links for high power safety devices is designed for short circuit protection. They are 

distinguished with high speed of operation and high reliability. The element is a ceramic 

(porcelain) body filled with fine quartz sand for voltaic arc lowering. In the ceramic body is 

mounted a fusible, specially profiled wafer connecting the current leading terminals. These 

terminals are manufactured of copper alloy with special nickel coating and have the form of 

knives to provide more contact surface. The fuse links correspond to “gL – gG” class which means 

that they are with common function and normal response time. NH Fuses. 



• Rated short circuit current: 120 kA 

• IP code: IP 00 

• Ambient temperature: -5 to +65°C 


• Operating class gL/gG – general purpose, line 

protection, slow acting. 

Base type A B C D H 

NT00 78 40 15 29 56.5 

NT 0 125 68 15 29 56.5 

NT1 135 68 21 48 62 

NT 2 150 68 27 58 72 

NT 3 150 68 33 67 84.5 

NT00C 78 40 15 21 56.5 

NT1C 135 68 21 29 62 

NT2C 150 68 33 48 84.5 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue number Type In (A) Un (V) Packing / Box (pcs) 

10001 NT00 16 500,600 3/90 

10002 NT00 25 500,600 3/90 

10003 NT00 32 500,600 3/90 

10004 NT00 40 500,600 3/90 

10005 NT00 50 500,600 3/90 

10006 NT00 63 500,600 3/90 

10008 NT00 80 500,600 3/90 

10009 NT00 100 500,600 3/90 

10012 NT00 125 500,600 3/90 

10016 NT00 160 500,600 3 / 90 

30 

ELMARK 



10015 NT0 16 500,600 3/90 

10025 NT0 25 500,600 3/90 

10032 NT0 32 500,600 3/90 

10040 NT0 40 500,600 3/90 

10050 NT0 50 500,600 3/90 

10063 NT0 63 500,600 3/90 

10080 NT0 80 500,600 3/90 

10090 NT0 100 500,600 3/90 

10092 NT0 125 500,600 3/90 

10096 NT0 160 500,600 3/90 


10108 NT1 80 500,600 3/36 

10110 NT1 100 500,600 3/36 

10112 NT1 125 500,600 3/36 

10116 NT1 160 500,600 3/36 

10120 NT1 200 500,600 3/36 

10122 NT1 225 500,600 3/36 

10125 NT1 250 500,600 3/36 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


10216 NT2 160 500,600 1/24 

10220 NT2 200 500,600 1/24 

10225 NT2 250 500,600 1/24 

10231 NT2 315 500,600 1/24 

10240 NT2 400 500,600 1/24 


10350 NT3 500 500,600 1/24 

10363 NT3 630 500,600 1/24 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

31



10001C NT00C 16 500,600 3/120 

10002C NT00C 25 500,600 3/120 

10003C NT00C 32 500,600 3/120 

10004C NT00C 40 500,600 3/120 

10005C NT00C 50 500,600 3/120 

10006C NT00C 63 500,600 3/120 

10008C NT00C 80 500,600 3/120 

10009C NT00C 100 500,600 3/120 


10108C NT1C 80 500,600 3/54 

10110C NT1C 100 500,600 3/54 

10112C NT1C 125 500,600 3/54 

10116C NT1C 160 500,600 3/54 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


10216C NT2C 160 500,600 1/30 

10220C NT2C 200 500,600 1/30 

10225C NT2C 250 500,600 1/30 

32 

ELMARK 



product: 

Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3 

ISOLATING SWITCHES 

Designed in two types – horizontal and vertical. They represent a combination of low voltage isolating 

switch and high power safety devices mounted in a common plastic corpus. They are used 

for low voltage distribution boards and complete transformer substations (CTS) where visible 

circuit distribution is necessary. They provide safety and convenience at fuse links change. The 

plastic corpus increases the IP code and the plastic lid provides simultaneous circuits switching 

on/off. The lid allows easy removing which is additional measure at repairs. The vertical isolating 

switches are mounted directly to the power supply rails which enables the exploitation and 

improves the safety of the staff. 



• Rated short circuit current: according to the 

mounted fuse links 

• Number of poles: 3 

• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV 

• Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles 


• Plastic: UV rays wear resistance 




Base type A B C D E 

THB -160 105 160 85 45 100 

THB - 250 185 220 111 66 180 

THB - 400 210 260 130 88 205 

THB - 630 256 270 140 94.5 245 

Catalogue 

number 

Type In (A) Un (V) Fuse link size Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

44801 THB 160 500, 660 NT00 1/18 

44802 THB 250 500, 660 NT1 1/6 

44803 THB 400 500, 660 NT2 1/4 

44804 THB 630 500, 660 NT3 1/4 

AUTOMATION | SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Base A B C D E F G H W1 W2 

type 

HG2B 50 99 185 290 2 57 58 746 146 195 

Catalogue 

number 


Type In (A) Un (V) Fuse link size Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

44805 HG2B 160 500, 660 NT00 1/4 

44806 HG2B 250 500, 660 NT1 1/4 

44807 HG2B 400 500, 660 NT2 1/4 

44808 HG2B 630 500, 660 NT3 1/4 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

33

AUTOMATION | ISOLATING SWITCHES 


product: 

Standard EN 60269-2; 

IEC269-2 

Overall dimensions 

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS RT18 

The series of switch disconnectors are developed for short-circuit protection. They have a high 

speed of start and high reliability. They have a plastic body of non-flammable plastics adapted for 

mounting on a DIN rail, where a porcelain round plug, which is filled with fine quartz sand for extinguishing 

the electric arc. LED indicator is mounted on the front panel to show fuse link condition. In 

this ceramic body is mounted melting, specifically profiled plate, which connects the input power 

terminals. These terminals are produced from copper alloy with especially laid nickel layer and 

contact with the projecting bolts from the plastic body. There are offered two types of insertions 

according to the degree of quick operation: normally quickly operating ones – class “gG”. Suitable for 

DC system. 




mounted fuse links 








YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Base type 

Number 

of poles 

Rated 

current 

( A ) 

Type of the 

fuse 

Base dimensions (mm) Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

A B W E 

10RT1831 1PRT18 - 32x 1P 32 xxG1038 37 82 18 78 12/240 

10RT18311 1NRT18 - 32x 1P+N 32 xxG1038 37 82 36 78 6/120 

10RT1832 2PRT18 - 32x 2P 32 xxG1038 37 82 36 78 6/120 

10RT1833 3PRT18 - 32x 3P 32 xxG1038 37 82 54 78 4/80 

10RT18331 3NRT18 - 32x 3P+N 32 xxG1038 37 82 72 78 3/60 

10RT1861 1PRT18 - 63x 1P 63 xxG1451 37 105 27 110 6/108 

10RT18611 1NRT18 - 63x 1P+N 63 xxG1451 37 105 54 110 6/108 

10RT1862 2PRT18 - 63x 2P 63 xxG1451 37 105 54 110 6/108 

10RT1863 3PRT18 - 63x 3P 63 xxG1451 37 105 81 110 6/108 

10RT18631 3NRT18 - 63x 3P+N 63 xxG1451 37 105 108 110 6/108 

34 

ELMARK 


FUSE FOR SWITCH DISCONNECTORS RT18 

Catalogue 

number 

Type of the 

fuse class gG 

Voltage 

(V) 

Rated 

current (A) 

Size of the fuse 

A x ØB x C 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

10G10381 01G1038 500 1 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G10382 02G1038 500 2 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G10384 04G1038 500 4 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G10386 06G1038 500 6 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G103810 10G1038 500 10 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G103816 16G1038 500 16 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G103820 20G1038 500 20 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G103825 25G1038 500 25 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G103832 32G1038 500 32 38xØ10.3x10mm 10/2000 

10G145140 40G1451 500 40 51xØ14.3x12mm 10/500 

10G145150 50G1451 500 50 51xØ14.3x12mm 10/500 

10G145163 63G1451 500 63 51xØ14.3x12mm 10/500 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

35


PHOTOVOLTAGE FUSE HOLDERS 

DC 

curent type 

PHOTOVOLTAGE FUSE HOLDERS 1500V DC, 15PV14L SERIES 

Photovoltaic fuse holders provide protection against short-circuits and overloads. They work with 

fuse till 50A and rated voltage 1500V DC. 

FUNCTIONS AND ADVANTAGES: 

• Protection against short-circuits and overloads. 

• Easy installation and fuse removal with no 

additional tools required. 

• Tin-plated bimetallic copper fuse clips deliver 

superior fatigue resistance compared to traditional 

spring brass. 

• High temperature performance thanks to 

venting grooves and cooling chambers that 

improve heat dissipation also for multiple 

configurations. 

• Finger safety feature which ensures personnel 

protection during maintenance (no possibility 

of getting in touch with live parts during fuse 

replacement). 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

poles 

Rated current 

(A) 


• Rated Voltage: 1500V DC 

• Rated Current: 50A 

• Size of Fuse Link: suitable for fuse with sizes 

10x85 and 14x85mm 

• Class of Operation: gPV 

• Mechanical Life: 500 times 

• Tightening Torque: 2.5Nm 

• Cable section of terminal: 10mm² 


Base dimensions (mm) 

Packing /Box 

(pcs) 

W H D 

15PV14L PV DC 1P 50 22.4 134 92 1/5/120 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

36 

ELMARK 


FUSE LINKS 1500V DC FOR PHOTOVOLTAGE FUSE HOLDERS 

15PV14L SERIES 

A fuse is a replaceable circuit protection device that provides protection to both the equipment 

and the equipment operator in the event of a circuit overload. It is commonly connected with a 

circuit in series, and when fault current increases to a certain value, the fuse blows out to cut off 

the circuit so as to fulfill an aim of protecting other equipment in the circuit. The fuse is the most 

commonly used component in an over current protection circuit. The traditional fuse mainly 

consists of two parts of a tube body, of which both ends have metal connecting terminals, and 

metal melts in the tube body. Solar fuses vary in a number of different ways including fuse speed, 

voltage and amperage rating, braking capacity and their physical size and shape. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Protect solar power equipment against over 

current. 

• Protect against reverse current and short 

circuits. 

Catalogue 

number 


• Rated voltage: 1500V DC 

• Rated current: 6-50A 

• Class of operation: gPV 

• Breaking capacity: 20kA 

• Sizes: 10x85mm and 14x85mm 

Voltage (V) Rated current (A) Size of the fuse 

(mm) 

15PV06A 1500V DC 6 10x85 1000 

15PV10A 1500V DC 10 10x85 1000 

15PV12A 1500V DC 12 10x85 1000 

15PV16A 1500V DC 16 10x85 1000 

15PV20A 1500V DC 20 10x85 1000 

15PV25A 1500V DC 25 10x85 1000 

15PV32A 1500V DC 32 10x85 1000 

Packing/ Box (pcs) 


DC 

curent type 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Voltage (V) Rated current (A) Size of the fuse 

(mm) 

15PV40A 1500V DC 40 14x85 400 

15PV45A 1500V DC 45 14x85 400 

15PV50A 1500V DC 50 14x85 400 


DC 

curent type 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

37


SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS FROM 20A TO 125A 

Documents corresponding 

to the product: 

Standard EN 60947-3 and IEC947-3 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical 

circuits 

• Breaking of electrical circuits 

• Can be used as a main breaker 

• It has no protective function 

• Specification: CE, ROHS, BS, EN,EIC60439-3 




• Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or 

flexible conductors 



Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 

≥10000 

Dimensions (mm) 

H1 H2 D1 D2 D3 W1 W2 W3 W3 

81 45 50 65 76 17.5 35 52.5 70 

• Mechanical wear resistance (number of 

cycles): ≥20000 


• Mounting: DIN-rail 

• Plastic material of UV rays 

• Ambient temperature: -20°C + 65°C 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of poles 

Rated 

current In (A) 



41914 ISS 1P 40 10 12/240 

41911 ISS 1P 63 16 12/240 

41912 ISS 1P 80 25 12/240 

41913 ISS 1P 100 35 12/240 

41916 ISS 1p 125 50 12/240 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of poles 

Rated 




41924 ISS 2P 40 10 6/120 

41921 ISS 2P 63 16 6/120 

41922 ISS 2P 80 25 6/120 

41923 ISS 2P 100 35 6/120 

41925 ISS 2p 125 50 6/120 

38 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of poles 

Rated 


Recommended 

conductor 

(mm²) 

41935 ISS 3P 20 2.5 4/80 

41936 ISS 3P 32 6.0 4/80 

41934 ISS 3P 40 10 4/80 

41931 ISS 3P 63 16 4/80 

41932 ISS 3P 80 25 4/80 

41933 ISS 3P 100 35 4/80 

41937 ISS 3p 125 50 4/80 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of poles 

Rated 


Recommended 

conductor 

(mm²) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41944 ISS 4P 40 10 3 / 60 

41941 ISS 4P 63 16 3 / 60 

41942 ISS 4P 80 25 3 / 60 

41943 ISS 4P 100 35 3 / 60 

41945 ISS 4p 125 50 3 / 60 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



PADLOCK ADAPTER FOR MCB 

The adapter makes it possible to block the operating lever whether switched ON or OF 

Catalogue number 

Type 

41904 Padlock adaptor for MCB 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

39

II 

O 

I 

1 

II 

I 

2 4 

5 

II 

I 

6 8 

10 

9 

II 

I 

12 14 

13 

II 

I 

16 

II 

O 

EKCS101G EKCS101G 

400V~ 50/60Hz 400V~ 50/60Hz I 

1 

II 

II I 

O 

2 4 

I 

5 

II 

I 

6 8 

91 

II II 

II 

O 

I 

I 

13 5 

II 

I 

102 12 4 146 16 8 

1 

II 

I 

2 4 

5 

II 

I 

6 8 

10 

9 

II 

I 

12 14 

13 

II 

9 13 

O 

EKCS101G 

II I II I EKCS101G 

10 400V~ 12 14 50/60Hz 16400V~ 50/60Hz I 

II 

I 

16 

1 

II 

II I 

O 

2 4 

I 

5 

II 

I 

6 8 

19 

II 

I 

513 

II II I 

10 2 412 14 6 81610 

9 

II 

I 

12 14 

13 

II 

I 

16 

EKCS101G 

400V~ 50/60Hz 

II 

O 

I 

1 5 9 

II I II I II 

EKCS101G 

2 4 6 8 10 

400V~ 50/60Hz 

I 

12 14 

13 

II 

II 

I 

O 

16 

I 

1 

II 

I 

2 4 

5 

II 

I 

6 8 

10 

9 

II 

I 

12 1 

Electrical 

Electrical Life 

1500 Cycles 

ch can Features Mechanical Life 

8500 Cycles 

switch on, Load and break the circuit under normal conditions, using as Switch 

Protection degree 

IP20 

240/415V~ 

Electrical Terminal/Cable size 

Changeover Switch 

Changeover Switch Switch 

63,80,100,125A 

Features Mounting 

Switch 

50/60Hz 

Circuit 

Diagram 

Ambient Temperature -5℃...40℃ 

EKCS101G 

EKCS101G 

2 

50mm 

Standard_ IEC60947-3 


On DIN rail EN60715(35mm) by means of fast clip device. 

1,2,3,4P 

1 

5 

II 

I 

II 

I 

1P 2P II 

I 

II 

I 

II 

I 

3P 

2 4 

6 8 

1500 Cycles 

2 4 

6 8 

10 

12 

1 

1 

5 

9 

THREE POSITION 1-0-2 CHANGEOVER SWITCH 1-0-2 ISS3 SERIES, 63A 

II 

I 

2 4 

8500 Cycles 

Documents 1 5corresponding 

9 

13 A changeover switch is designed to transfer a house or business electricity from the commercial 

IP20 

power grid to a local generator when an outage occurs also known as transfer switches, they 

to IIthe I product: II 

I 

II 

I 

II 

I 

4P 

connect directly to the generator commercial power supply or line and the house. 

2Standard 4 IEC60947-3 

6 

-5℃...40℃ 

8 

10 

12 14 

16 ISS3 can be freely switched on and off between two loads carried by a group of lines, or on two 

2 

power sources. 

50mm 

Application Application 

Overall and Installation Overall and Dimension(mm) 

installation On DIN rail EN60715(35mm) FUNCTIONS: 

by means of fast clip device. 

dimensions (mm) 


The Changeover The Changeover Switch can Switch switch can on, switch Load and on, break Load and the circuit break the undc 

circuits 

4P 144 mm 

Disconnectors. Disconnectors. 

1 5 

78 

• Switching 3P between 108 mm 

Application 

Application 

1 5 9 two loads or two power 

sources 

2P 72 mm 

II I II I 

50 

2P 

II I 

1P II 

36 mmI 

II I 

3P 

• Breaking of electrical circuits Technical Technical Data Rated DataVoltage 

Rated Voltage 240/415V~ 240 

2 The 4 The Changeover 6 8 Switch The Switch The can Changeover can switch switch Switch on, Switch Load on, can 

2Load and can switch and break switch 

4 break on, • 6 the Load on, circuit the Load and 

Can be 8 

used 10 circuit under and break under break 

as 12normal the normal the circuit conditions, circuit under under normal using normal using as Switch conditions, as Switch using using as Switch as Switch 

1 5 a 9 main breaker 

13 

Rated Current Rated Current 63,80,100,125 

Disconnectors. 



Rated Frequency Rated Frequency 50/60Hz 50/ 

9 13 

EKCS101G 

125A 

400V~ 50/60Hz 

Number of Number Poles of Poles 1,2,3,4P 1,2 

Technical II IDataData 

II 

Rated Technical I Rated Voltage Data Voltage DataRated Rated Voltage Voltage 

4P 

TECHNICAL 240/415V~ 

DATA 

240/415V~ 

45 35 84 

Contact form Contact form 1-0-2 1-0 

• Rated operational voltage Ue: 2P 230V; 

10 12 14 Rated Rated 16Current 

Current Rated Rated Current Current 

63,80,100,125A 

63,80,100,125A 

• Isolating voltage: 440V 

Rated Rated Frequency 


50/60Hz 

AC-22A 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 

• wear resistance (number of cycles): 

IEC60947-3 


Electrical Life Electrical Life 1500 Cycles150 

• Rated operational voltage Ue: 3P/ 4P 400V; 

Number Number of Poles of Poles Number Number of Poles of Poles 

1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P 

≥25 000 

50/60Hz 

Features Features Mechanical Mechanical Life Life 8500 Cycles850 

nsion(mm) Contact Contact form form Contact Contact form form • Mechanical wear resistance (number of 

2 4 1-0-2 

61-0-2 

8 10 1-0-2 

12 1-0-2 

14 16 


Protection Protection degree degree 

IP20 IP2 

cycles): ≥20 000 

• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal Ambient Temperature Ambient Temperature -5℃...40℃ -5℃ 


Electrical Electrical Electrical 

Life Life Electrical Electrical Life Life 

1500 1500 Cycles Cycles 


4P 144 mm 


• Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid 

Features 

3P Mechanical 108 mm Life Life 



2 

Features 

01 

FeaturesMechanical Life Life 


2P 72 mm 

conductors till 16mm2 or flexible Electrical conductors Electrical Terminal/Cable Terminal/Cable size size 

50mm 50m 

50 

Protection degree degree 

IP20 IP20 


Protection 1P degree 36 degree mm 

till 10mm2 IP20 IP20 

Features Features Mounting• Ambient Mounting temperature: -20°C + 65°C On DIN rail On EN 

Ambient Ambient Temperature Ambient Ambient Temperature -5℃...40℃ 

• Tightening -5℃...40℃ -5℃...40℃ moment: 1.8Nm 

35 84 

1 5 9 13 


Terminal/Cable Electrical size 

sizeTerminal/Cable size 

EKCS101G 

125A 

Features FeaturesMounting 

Mounting Mounting 

400V~ 

Features Mounting 

50/60Hz 

7 


Circuit YEARS Circuit TOTAL 

Diagram WARRANTY Diagram 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 


Changeover Changeover Switch Switch 

2 2 

2 2 

Circuit Circuit1 

1 

1 

50mm 50mm 50mm 50mm 

Diagram DiagramII 

I 1PII 

I 

II I 

On DIN On rail DIN EN60715(35mm) rail On DIN On DIN rail by rail means by EN60715(35mm) means of fast of clip fast by device. clip means by device. means of fast of fast clip clip device. 1P device. 

Circuit diagram 

2 4 2 4 2 4 

1Circuit 

1Circuit 

1 1 1 1 5 5 1 1 5 5 

1 1 5 5 19 

19 

5 15 

9 51 

9 95 

13 9 

AC-22A 

IEC60947-3 

II Diagram III 

I II 

II I 

II I II I 

1P II 1P III 

I II III 

I II I II I 

2P 2P II III 

II II 

II 

III 

II 

I 

1P 1P 2P 2P 

II III 

I II III 

I II III 

I 

3P 3P 

I II 3P II I3P 

I II II 

2 2 4 4 

2 2 4 64 

6 8 8 

2 2 4 4 

2 2 4 64 

6 8 8 

2 2 4 64 

6 8 10 28 

10 2 12 4 64 

122 6 8 10 48 

10 62 12 12 84 

106 12 8 14 10 

1 1 5 5 1 9 1 9 513 

513 

9 9 13 13 

II II 

I II III 

III 

II III 

III 

I III 

II II 

III 

I III 

II 

I II II 

I 

4P 4P 

4P 4P Overall and Overall Installation and Installation Dimension(mm) Dimension(mm) 

Catalogue Type Number Rated Recommended Packing/Box 

2 2 4 64 

6 8 210 

8 210 

41264 

14 126 148 

16 10 8 16 10 12 14 12 14 16 16 

number 

of poles current In (A) conductor (mm²) (pcs) 

78 

78 

41928 ISS3 2P 63 10/16 6/120 

50 

50 

Overall Overall and and Installation Dimension(mm) 

1P 36 mm 

Overall Overall and and Installation Dimension(mm) 

41930 ISS3 3P 63 10/16 6/120 

41929 4P 144P mm144 ISS3 mm 

4P 144P mm144 4Pmm 

63 10/16 6/120 

78 

78 

50 

50 

78 

78 

50 

50 

2P 722P mm 72 mm 

1P 361P mm 36 mm 

3P 1083P mm108 mm 

2P 722P mm 72 mm 

1P 361P mm 36 mm 

3P 108 3P mm108 mm 

1 5 9 13 

1 5 9 13 

1 5 9 13 

1 5 9 13 

II 

51 

II II I I 

62 84 

16 12 14 

45 45 35 84 

35 84 

13 

II 

5 

II I 

2P 

6 8 

I 

4P 

16 

2P 72 mm 

3P 108 mm 

1P 36 mm 

1 5 9 5 

1 

125A 

125A 

2P 

4P 

4P 144 mm 

2P 72 mm 

3P 108 

AC-22A 

IEC60947-3 

AC-22A 

IEC60947-3 

Three positions I-0-II 

45 45 35 8435 45 45 35 84 35 84 

84 

125A 

125A 

125A 

125A 

2 4 6 8 10 12 

2 4 6 8 

AC-22A AC-22A 

AC-22A AC-22A 

IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3 

IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3 

01 01 

2 4 6 8 810 1012 14 16 

2 4 6 12 14 16 

12 16 

2 4 6 8 810 1012 14 1416 

2 4 6 

01 01 

01 01 


40 

ELMARK 


O 

1 

2 4 

5 

6 8 

10 

9 

12 14 

13 

16 

II 

O 


400V~ 50/60Hz 400V~ 50/60Hz I 

1 

II 

II I 

O 

2 4 

I 

5 

II 

I 

6 8 

O 

91 

II II 

I 

13 5 

II 

I 

102 12 4 146 16 8 

1 

2 4 

5 

6 8 

10 

9 

12 14 

13 

9 13 

O 

EKCS101G 

II I II I EKCS101G 

10 400V~ 12 14 50/60Hz 16400V~ 50/60Hz I 

II 

16 

1 

II 

II I 

O 

2 4 

I 

5 

II 

I 

6 8 

19 

II 

I 

513 

II II I 

10 2 412 14 6 81610 

9 

II 

I 

12 14 

13 

II 

I 

16 

EKCS101G 

400V~ 50/60Hz 

II 

O 

I 

1 5 9 

II I II I II 

EKCS101G 

2 4 6 8 10 

400V~ 50/60Hz 

I 

12 14 

13 

II 

II 

I 

O 

16 

I 

1 

II 

I 

2 4 

5 

II 

I 

6 8 

10 

9 

II 

I 

12 14 

13 

II 

I 

16 

on, Load and break the circuit under normal conditions, using as Switch 

Protection degree 

IP20 

Ambient Temperature -5℃...40℃ 

Changeover Changeover Switch Switch 

240/415V~ 

2 

Terminal/Cable size 

50mm 

S101G 

EKCS101G 

Mounting 

63,80,100,125A 

On DIN rail EN60715(35mm) by means of fast clip device. 

50/60Hz 

eover Switch 

Switch Changeover Switch Switch 



1,2,3,4P 

1 

1 

5 

1 

5 

9 

II 

I 

1-0-2 

II 

I 

II 

I 

1P 2P II 

I 

II 

I 

II 

I 

3P 

THREE POSITION CHANGEOVER SWITCH 1-0-2 ISS4 SERIES, 125A 

2 4 

2 4 

6 8 

1500 Cycles 

2 4 

6 8 

10 

12 

1 

5 8500 9Cycles 

13 

IIDocuments I 

corresponding 

I IP20 

II 

I 

II 

I A changeover 4P switch is designed to transfer a house or business electricity from the commercial 

power grid to a local generator when an outage occurs also known as transfer switches, they 

2 to the 4 product: 

6 8 

-5℃...40℃ 

10 

12 14 

16 


connect directly to the generator commercial power supply or line and the house. 

2 

ISS4 can be freely switched on and off between two loads carried by a group of lines, or on two 

50mm 

power sources. 

d Installation Dimension(mm) 

On DIN rail EN60715(35mm) by means of fast clip device. Application Application 

• Overall and installation 

FUNCTIONS: 

dimensions (mm) 

• Switching on/off 4P 144 heavy mm loaded electrical 

The Changeover The Changeover Switch can Switch switch can on, switch Load and on, break Load and the circuit break the under circuit normal under conn 

5 

78 

circuits 

3P 108 mm 

1 5 9 

• Switching 2P 72 mm 

I I II I 

50 

between two loads or two power Disconnectors. Disconnectors. 

cation 

Application 

2P 

II I 

1P 36 II 

mm I II I 

sources 

3P 

4 6 8 

2 4 

• Breaking 6 8 

of 10electrical 12 

1 5 9 circuits Technical 13 Technical Data Rated DataVoltage 

Rated Voltage 

240/415V~ 240/415V~ 

The The Changeover Switch The Switch The can Changeover can switch switch Switch on, Switch Load on, can Load and can switch and break switch break on, the Load on, circuit the Load and circuit under and break under break normal the normal the circuit conditions, circuit under under normal using normal using as Switch conditions, as Switch using using as Switch as Switch 

• Can be used as a main breaker 

Rated Current Rated Current 

63,80,100,125A 63,80,100,125A 

13Disconnectors. 


II 


II 

I 

II 

I 

II 

I 

II 

I 

EKCS101G 

125A 

Rated Frequency Rated Frequency 

50/60Hz 50/60Hz 

400V~ 50/60Hz 

I 

II I 

4P 

Number of Number Poles of Poles 

1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P 

45 35 84 

ata 

Rated Technical Rated Voltage Data Voltage DataRated Rated Voltage Voltage 

TECHNICAL 240/415V~ 

DATA 

240/415V~ 

4 16 

• Rated operational voltage Ue: 2P 240V; Contact form Contact form 1-0-2 1-0-2 

Rated Rated Current Current Rated Rated Current Current 

63,80,100,125A 

63,80,100,125A 


AC-22A 

IEC60947-3 

50/60Hz 



50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 

cycles): ≥ 8 500 

• Rated operational voltage Ue: Electrical 3P/ 4P 400V; 

Electrical Life Electrical Life 

1500 Cycles1500 Cycles 

Number Number of Poles of Poles Number Number of Poles of Poles 

1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P 1,2,3,4P 


) 

2 50/60Hz 

4 6 8 10 12 14 Features 

16 Features Mechanical Mechanical Life Life 

8500 Cycles8500 Cycles 

Contact form 1-0-2 


Contact Contact form form Contact form 

• Rated 1-0-2 1-0-2 

1-0-2 

current: 125A 

Protection Protection degree degree 

IP20 IP20 


4P 144 mm 

• Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal Ambient • Temperature Ambient Temperature temperature: -20°C + 65°C 

-5℃...40℃ -5℃...40℃ 

ical Electrical Electrical Electrical 

Life Life Electrical Electrical Life Life 

1500 1500 Cycles Cycles 1500 1500 Cycles Cycles 

3P 108 mm 

• Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or 

Features 2P 72 mm Mechanical Life Life 


2 

2 

resMechanical Life Life 

flexible 8500 8500 conductors Cycles Cycles till 50mm2 Electrical Electrical Terminal/Cable Terminal/Cable size size 

50mm 50mm 

1P 36 mm 



• Electrical IP20 IP20wear resistance IP20 IP20(number Features of cycles): Features Mounting Mounting 

On DIN rail On EN60715(35mm) 

DIN rail Ambient Ambient Temperature Ambient Ambient Temperature ≥1 500 -5℃...40℃ -5℃...40℃ 

-5℃...40℃ 

84 

1 5 9 13 

ical Terminal/Cable Electrical size 

II sizeTerminal/Cable size 

II I II I II I II I 

EKCS101G 125A 

400V~ 50/60Hz 

I 

resMounting 

Mounting 

FeaturesMounting 

cuit 

ram 

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 


2 2 

2 2 

Circuit Circuit1 

1 

1 

50mm 50mm 50mm 50mm 

Diagram DiagramII 

I 1PII 

I 

II I 

1P 

Circuit On DIN On DIN On DIN rail rail EN60715(35mm) by means by means of fast of fast clip clip device. device. 

diagram On rail DIN EN60715(35mm) rail by means by means of fast of clip fast device. clip device. 

2 4 2 4 2 4 

1Circuit 

AC-22A 

1Circuit 

1 1 1 1 5 5 1 1 5 5 

1 1 5 5 19 

19 

5 15 

9 51 

9 95 

13 9 

IEC60947-3 

II Diagram III 

I II 

II I 

II I II I 

1P II 1P III 

I II III 

I II I II I 

2P 2P II III 

II II 

II 

III 

II 

I 

1P 1P 2P 2P 

II III 

I II III 

I II III 

I 

3P 3P 

I II 3P II I3P 

I II II 

2 2 4 4 

2 2 4 64 

6 8 8 

2 2 4 4 

2 2 4 64 

6 8 8 

2 2 4 64 

6 8 10 28 

10 2 12 4 64 

122 6 8 10 48 

10 62 12 12 84 

106 12 8 14 10 

1 1 5 5 1 9 1 9 513 

513 

9 9 13 13 

II II 

I II III 

III 

II III 

III 

I III 

II II 

III 

I III 

II 

I II II 

I 

Catalogue 

4P 4P Type 4P 4P Number Overall and Overall Rated Installation and Installation Recommended 

Dimension(mm) Dimension(mm) Packing/Box 

2 2 4 64 

6 8 210 

8 210 

41264 

14 126 148 

16 10 8 16 10 12 14 12number 

14 16 16 

of poles current In (A) conductor (mm²) (pcs) 

41946 ISS4 2P 125 50 78 

78 1/2/60 

50 

50 

Overall Overall and and Installation Dimension(mm) 41948 ISS4 3P 125 50 1/45 

1P 36 mm 

nd ll and Installation Dimension(mm) 

41947 ISS4 4P 125 50 1/45 

78 

78 

50 

50 

78 

78 

50 

50 

2P 722P mm 72 mm 

1P 361P mm 36 mm 

4P 144P mm144 mm 

3P 1083P mm108 mm 

2P 722P mm 72 mm 

1P 361P mm 36 mm 

4P 144P mm144 mm 

3P 108 3P mm108 mm 

1 5 9 13 

1 5 9 13 

1 5 9 13 

1 5 9 13 

II 

51 

II II I I 

62 84 

16 12 14 

45 45 35 84 

35 84 

13 

II 

5 

II I 

2P 

6 8 

I 

4P 

16 

2P 72 mm 

3P 108 mm 

1P 36 mm 

125A 

4P 144 mm 

1 

2P 

II I 

2 4 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

4P 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



2P 72 mm 

3P 108 mm 

4P 144 mm 

1 5 9 5 13 

1 9 13 

125A 


AC-22A 

IEC60947-3 

AC-22A 

IEC60947-3 


45 45 35 8435 45 45 35 84 35 84 

84 

125A 

125A 

125A 

125A 

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1612 2 4 6 8 10 14 

AC-22A AC-22A 

AC-22A AC-22A 

IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3 

IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3 

01 01 

2 4 6 8 810 1012 14 16 

2 4 6 12 14 16 

12 16 

2 4 6 8 810 1012 14 1416 

2 4 6 

01 01 



page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

41


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



SWITCH DISCONNECTORS ISS2 FROM 125A TO 800A 




EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6 

The series three- and four-pole load switch disconnectors ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main 

electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, switching on of generators because of the fact they 

are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. 

Simple and secure management. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on and off electrical circuits under 

load 

• Disconnection of electrical circuits 

• Used as main circuit-breaker 

• Resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in 

the protected circuit 



• Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz 

• Double connector: screw connection 

• Connection: solid or flexible conductors 

• Insulation voltage: ≥1000V 

• Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V 

• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 

≥5 000 


• Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 

≥10 000 


• Mounting method: to a surface by means of 

bolts 

• Plastic resistant to UV rays 

• Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºC 

Type A B C D E J J1 K R S T Y 

ISS2-125/3 140 135 125 27 73 120 120 65 20 25 3.5 25 

ISS2-125/4 170 135 125 27 73 150 150 65 20 25 3.5 25 

ISS2-160/3 140 135 125 27 73 120 120 65 20 25 3.5 25 

ISS2-160/4 170 135 125 27 73 150 150 65 20 25 3.5 25 

ISS2-250/3 180 170 138 35 86 160 160 90 25 30 3.5 25 

ISS2-250/4 230 170 138 35 86 210 210 90 25 30 3.5 25 

ISS2-400/3 230 240 165 50 110 210 210 140 32 40 5 37 

ISS2-400/4 295 240 165 50 110 275 275 140 32 40 5 37 

ISS2-630/3 230 260 165 50 110 210 210 140 40 50 6 37 

ISS2-630/4 295 260 165 50 110 275 275 140 40 50 6 37 

ISS2-800/3 378 312 240 50 140 353 353 175 60 56 8 48 

ISS2-800/ 498 312 240 50 140 473 473 175 60 56 8 48 

Catalogue 

number 

3-pole 

Catalogue 

number 

4-pole 

Type 

Rated 

current 

In (A) 

Max. breaking 

capacity 

Icu (A) 

Tightening 

moment 

(Nm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

41951 41961 ISS2-125in 125 1250 6.5 1/12 

41952 41962 ISS2-125out 125 1250 6.5 1/12 

41953 41963 ISS2-160in 160 1250 6.5 1/12 

41954 41964 ISS2-160out 160 1250 6.5 1/12 

41955 41965 ISS2-250in 250 2000 10 1/6 

41956 41966 ISS2-250out 250 2000 10 1/6 

41957 41967 ISS2-400in 400 3200 14.5 1/2 

41958 41968 ISS2-630in 630 4000 14.5 1/2 

41959 41969 ISS2-800in 800 1000 27 1/2 

Note: 

ISS2-xxx in – load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board 

ISS2 -xxx out – load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the 

board 

42 

ELMARK 


MANUAL SWITCHING TO RESERVE SERIES EQ 2M FROM 160A TO 800A 




EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6 

The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch EQ 2 M xxx are produced for mounting 

in main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, manual switching between two 

power supplies or switching ON of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the 

frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure 

management. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on and off of low voltage electrical 

circuits under load 

• Disconnection of the electrical circuit from 

one of the power supplies, while providing 

immediately switching to the other 

• Used as main switch 


•Rated voltage: not higher than 690V; 50/60Hz 

• Double connector: screw connection 

• Connection: hard or flexible conductors 

• Insulation voltage: ≥1000V 

• Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V 


≥5 000 


≥10 000 


• Resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in 

the protected circuit 



• Mounting method: to a surface by means of 

bolts 

• Plastic resistant to UV rays 

• Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºС 

• Small size 

• Indication which of the two supplies is 

operating 

Type A B C D E J J1 K R S T Y Y1 

ЕQ2M-160/3 270 135 212 89 150 120 65 95 20 25 3.5 55 25 

EQ2M-160/4 300 135 212 104 150 150 65 95 20 25 3.5 55 25 

ЕQ2M-250/3 307 170 260 110 180 160 65 115 25 30 3.5 70 25 

EQ2M-250/4 357 170 260 135 180 210 65 115 25 30 3.5 70 25 

ЕQ2M-400/3 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 32 40 5 83 37 

EQ2M-400/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 32 40 5 83 37 

ЕQ2M-630/3 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 40 50 6 83 37 

EQ2M-630/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 40 50 6 83 37 

ЕQ2M-8003 372 240 297 150 236 210 77 180 60 56 8 83 48 

EQ2M-800/4 432 240 297 180 236 275 77 180 60 56 8 83 48 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



Catalogue 

number 

3-pole 

Catalogue 

number 

4-pole 

Type 

Rated 

current 

In (A) 

Max. breaking 

capacity 

Icu (A) 

Tightening 

moment 

(Nm) 

44641 44641P ЕQ2M-160 160 1250 6.5 1/4 

44642 44642P ЕQ2M-250 250 2000 10 1/2 

44643 44643P ЕQ2M-400 400 3200 14.5 1/2 

44644 44644P ЕQ2M-630 630 4000 14.5 1/2 

44645 44645P ЕQ2M-800 800 1000 27 1/2 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

43

AUTOMATION | MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



HIGH BREAKING CAPACITY LEVEL MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

(MCCB) DS1 MAX FROM 63A... 800A 





FUNCTIONS 

• High breaking capacity level 

• Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits 

• Breaking of electrical circuits and control of 

powerful consumers 

• Can be used as a main breaker in housing or 

industrial distributing installations 



• Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V 

• Connecting: 

‣ Rigid or flexible conductors 

‣ Front conductors joining 

‣ Possibility for mounting to lengthening 

terminal 

• Plastic elements: 

‣ Not keeping the burning material nylon PA66 

‣ Box permitivity strength: >16MV/m 

• Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of 

the outer parts: 960°C 

• Static contacts – alloy: pure copper T2Y2 

Type L1 L2 L3 

DS1 MAX 125/63 3P M 75 133 82 

DS1 MAX 125/80 3PM 75 133 82 

DS1 MAX 125/100 3P M 75 133 82 

DS1 MAX 125/125 3P M 75 133 82 

DS1 MAX 250/160 3P M 107 165 127 

DS1 MAX 250/200 3P M 107 165 127 

DS1 MAX 250/250 3P H 107 165 127 

DS1 MAX 400/400 3P H 150 257 148 

DS1 MAX 630/630 3P H 150 257 148 

DS1 MAX 800/800 3P H 210 280 155 


• Endures high currents of short circuit in the 


• Remarkable with high reliability of current 

characteristics control: manual 

• Possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for 

automation 

‣ Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) 

‣ Thickness: depends on the current 


• Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): 

≥10000 


cycles): ≥20000 


• Mounting: joining with bolts; mounting 

position: vertical 

• Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable 

• Test button 

• Ambient temperature: -20°/65°C 

Type L1 L2 L3 

DS1 MAX 125/63 4P M 100 133 82 

DS1 MAX 125/80 4PM 100 133 82 

DS1 MAX 125/100 4P M 100 133 82 

DS1 MAX 125/125 4P M 100 133 82 

DS1 MAX 250/160 4P M 141 165 127 

DS1 MAX 250/200 4P M 141 165 127 

DS1 MAX 250/250 4P H 141 165 127 

DS1 MAX 400/400 4P H 198 257 148 

DS1 MAX 630/630 4P H 198 257 148 

DS1 MAX 800/800 4P H 280 280 155 

Catalogue 

number 

3-poles 

Catalogue 

number 

4-poles 

Type 

Rated 

current ln 

(A) 

Operating 

breaking 

capacity 

(kA) lcs 

Max. breaking 

capacity (kA) lcu 

Thermal 

current 

415V 690V adjustment (A) 

Packing/ 

box 

(pcs) 

44163MM 444163MM DS1 MAX-125 63 25 36 20 50.4-63 1/16 

44164MM 444164MM DS1 MAX-125 80 25 36 20 64-80 1/16 

44165MM 444165MM DS1 MAX-125 100 25 36 20 80-100 1/16 

44166MM 444166MM DS1 MAX-125 125 25 36 20 100-125 1/16 

44160MM 444160MM DS1 MAX-250 160 36 50 20 125-160 1/6 

44200MM 444200MM DS1 MAX-250 200 36 50 20 160-200 1/6 

44250MH 444250MH DS1 MAX-250 250 36 50 25 200-250 1/6 

44401MH 444401MH DS1 MAX-400 400 60 85 30 320-400 1/3 

44630MH 444630MH DS1 MAX-630 630 60 85 30 504-630 1/2 

44800MH 444800MH DS1 MAX-800 800 75 100 50 640-800 1/2 

44 

ELMARK 


HIGH BREAKING CAPACITY LEVEL MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

(MCCB) DS1 MAX TO 800A-ELECTRONIC TYPE 





FUNCTIONS 

• High breaking capacity level 


circuits 



• Can be used as a main breaker in housing or 

industrial distributing installations 




characteristics 

• Control: manual 


• Rated operating voltage: 415/690V; 50/60Hz 





‣ Rigid or flexible conductors 

‣ Front conductors joining 

‣ Possibility for mounting to lengthening 

terminal 


≥ 10000 

Catalogue 

number 

3-poles 

Catalogue 

number 

4-poles 

Type 

Rated 

current 

ln (A) 

• Possibilities for electrical module parameters 

adjustment through direct modules 

(combination of keys) thus providing accurate 

protection from overload 

and short circuit 

• simultaneous protection of the three phases 

• possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for 

automation 

• contactor for TT test 15V DC 


cycles): ≥ 20000 



the outer parts: 960°C 

• Mounting: 

‣ Joining with bolts 

‣ Mounting position: vertical 



• Ambient temperature: -20°÷65ºC 

Operating 

breaking 

capacity 

(kA) lcs 

Max. breaking 

capacity 

(kA) lcu 

415V 

690V 

Thermal 

current 

adjustment 

(A) 

44940MH 444940MH DS1 MAX-400E 400 50 85 30 200-400 1/3 

44963MH 444963MH DS1 MAX-630E 630 50 85 30 400-630 1/2 

44980MH 444980MH DS1 MAX-800E 800 65 100 50 630-800 1/2 

Packing/ 

box 

(pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



DS1 MAX - 400E 



Tripping characteristic: 

Ir1(A) Over-load long time delay tripping current 

Ir1 adjustment, according to the different rated current of MCCB. 

t1(s) Long time delay tripping time t1 adjustment. 

Ir2(XIr1) Short circuit short time delay tripping time Ir2 adjustment. 

t2(s) Short time delay tripping time t2 adjustment. 

Ir3(XIr1) Short circuit instantaneous tripping current Ir3 adjustment. 

Ir0(XIr1) Pre-alarm tripping current Ir0 adjustment. 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

45

In) 

6 

10 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



7 7 

8 5 

8 

4 

Ii ( xIn) 

10 

OFF 

11 

14 

12 

13 

HIGH BREAKING CAPACITY LEVEL MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) DS-3E 1000 

AND 1250A-ELECTRONIC TYPE 

The feature discriminating electronic circuit breakers from thermal-magnetic breakers is to control the over current releases with electronic 

circuits. Electronic control is performed via microprocessor. During design of the electronic circuit, worst possibilities to encounter in operation 

have been taken into consideration. In high circuit currents, direct opening has been ensured without operating electronic circuit. 

Rated and Instant opening current adjustment areas of electronic circuit breakers are quite wide. This feature allows wide use opportunity to 

the breaker Furthermore, electronic circuit breakers are not affected by ambient temperatures. 

FEATURES 

FEATURES 

160 

140 180 4 

125 

300 

3 

500 

In (A) 

250 225 

1 

2 

TEST 

9 

10 

2.5 

2 

Isd ( xIn) 

Tripping test port (TEST): 

1 Tripping test input DC12V (+) 

2 Tripping test input DC12V (-) 

5 

12 

6 

10 

7 7 

8 5 

8 

4 

Ii ( xIn) 

10 

OFF 

7 5 3 1 

8 6 4 

COM 

2 

11 

14 

12 

13 

• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz 

• Electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up 

to 400A 

• Electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 

630-800A 

• Available joining conductors 


• Rated voltage: 400V AC 

• Automatic relay: Electronic type 

• Rated isolating voltage: 1000V 

• Short-circuit breaking capacity(KA)Icu/Ics: 

65/50 

• Electrical life: 1000 

• Mechanical life: 4000 

• Pole number: 3P 

• Rated current: 1000A and 1250A 

• Weight: 5,7kg 

• Dimension (LxHxD): 210x257x155mm 

PANEL ADJUSTMENT KNOB AS FOLLOWS IN 

TURN: 

• IR(A) Isd(x IR) Ii (x IR) 

• IR: Overload long delay tripping setting 

current; 1 Isd: 9Short-circuit 7 5 short 3 delay 1 tripping 

setting current; 

• Ii: 

2 10 8 6 4 2 

Short-circuit instantaneous tripping setting 

current. TEST 

COM 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of poles 

Rated 

current 

In (A) 

• Altitude up to 2000m; 

• Ambient medium temperature should be 

within -10°C to +55°C; 

• It can withstand the effect of damp air; 

• It can withstand the effect of salt fog or oil 

mist; 

• It can withstand the effect of moulds; 

• It can withstand the effect of nuclear radiation; 

• The max inclination is 22.5°C. 

• It still can work reliably when to normal 

vibration; 

• It can still work reliably if the product subjects 

to the earthquake (4g). 

• Places where the surrounding medium is free 

from explosion danger, and far away from gas 

or conductive dust that would erode the metal 

or destroy the insulation; 

• Keep away from rain or snow. 

FACTORY SETTINGS: 

• IR(A) Isd(x IR) Ii (x IR) 

• Overload long delay setting time, factory 

default: 60s; 

• tsd: Short-circuit short delay setting time, 

factory default: 0.1s; 

• Ip: Overload pre-alarm setting current, factory 

default: 0.85*IR. 

Operating 

breaking 

capacity 

(kA) Ics 

Max. 

breaking 

capacity 

(kA) Icu 

Electrical Packing/ 

adjustment Box (pcs) 

44930 DS-3 1000A 3P 1000 50 65 630-1000A 1 

44931 DS-3 1250A 3P 1250 50 65 850-1250A 1 

46 

ELMARK 


AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

SHUNT RELEASE (MX) 

The device is used for remote control of breakers as at voltage signal it starts operating and 

switches off the breaker to which it is mounted 


MOUNTING 

• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz 

• Electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up 

to 400A 

• Electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630- 

800A 


DS1 MAX - ELECTRONIC TYPE 

WITH MOUNTED MX 


400V 230V 

Type 

444511M 44452M DS1 MAX 400/3300 

44455M 44456M DS1 MAX 630/3300 

44459M 44460M DS1 MAX 800/3300 

44505 44503 DS-3E 1000 

44506 44504 DS-3E 1250 

• Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting 

CONNECTING 

• Connected with the operative system 

through the provided conductors 

DS1 MAX - THERMO MAGNETIC 

TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX 


400V 230V 

Type 

44326M 44327M DS1 MAX 125/63 

44331M 44332M DS1 MAX 125/80 

44336M 44337M DS1 MAX 125/100 

44340M 44341M DS1 MAX 125/125 

44333M 44344M DS1 MAX 250/160 

44347M 44348M DS1 MAX 250/200 

44351M 44352M DS1 MAX 250/250 

44355M 44356M DS1 MAX 400/400 

44363M 44364M DS1 MAX 630/630 

44367M 44368M DS1 MAX 800/800 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



MN for DS1 - 125-160 

MN for DS1 - 250-800 

UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (MN) 

The device switches off and/or does not allow the switching on of the breaker to which it is 

mounted at power breakdown or voltage decrease under certain limits 


MOUNTING 

• Operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz 

• Electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 

400A 

• Electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630- 

800A 


• Switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of 

the operating 

DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE 

WITH MOUNTED MN 


400V 

230V 

Type 

44483M 44484M DS1 MAX 400/3300 

44487M 44488M DS1 MAX 630/3300 

44491M 44492M DS1 MAX 800/3300 

44509 44507 DS-3E 1000 

44510 44508 DS-3E 1250 

• Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting 

Note: The breakers are offered with mounted 

accessory 

CONNECTING 

Connected with the operative system through 

the provided conductors 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

47


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 








TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN 


400V 230V 

Type 

44391M 44392M DS1 MAX 125/63 

44395M 44396M DS1 MAX 125/80 

44399M 44402M DS1 MAX 125/100 

44407M 44408M DS1 MAX 125/125 

44411M 44412M DS1 MAX 250/160 

44415M 44416M DS1 MAX 250/200 

44419M 44420M DS1 MAX 250/250 

44423M 44424M DS1 MAX 400/400 

44431M 44432M DS1 MAX 630/630 

44435M 44436M DS1 MAX 800/800 

According to the way of mounting the auxiliary devices can be divided into two groups: 

• Internal devices – accessories for whose mounting it is necessary to dismount the cover of the 

breakers and fix them in specially designed jacks 

• External devices – they are mounted right on the top cover of the breaker 

AUXILIARY CONTACT (OF) 

The device changes its condition comfortably to the breaker’s condition; it has a NO and a NC 

contactor. 


MOUNTING 

• For breakers up to 160A operating current 

through the auxiliary contact: 3A 

• For breakers from 250 to 800A operating 

current through the auxiliary contact: 6A 


• Labeling of the cables 

• Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting. 

Note: The breakers are offered with mounted 

accessory. 

CONNECTING 

• Connected with the operative system 

through the provided conductors. 

DS-3E THERMO MAGNETIC 

TYPE WITH MOUNTED OF 


Type 

44511 DS-3E 1000 

44512 DS-3E 1250 


TYPE WITH MOUNTED OF 


Type 

44303M DS1 MAX 125/63 

44304M DS1 MAX 125/80 

44305M DS1 MAX 125/100 

44306M DS1 MAX 125/125 

44307M DS1 MAX 250/160 

44308M DS1 MAX 250/200 

44309M DS1 MAX 250/250 

44310M DS1 MAX 400/400 

44312M DS1 MAX 630/630 

44313M DS1 MAX 800/800 

48 

ELMARK 


MCCB WITH AUXILIARY DEVICES MOUNTED (MX+OF) AND (MN+OF) 

DS1 MAX - ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN+OF 


400V 


230V 

DS1 MAX - THERMO MAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MN+OF 

Type 

44485M 44486M DS1 MAX 400/3300 

44489M 44490M DS1 MAX 630/3300 

44493M 44494M DS1 MAX 800/3300 

44519 44517 DS-3E 1000 

44520 44518 DS-3E 1250 


400V 


230V 

Type 

44393M 44394M DS1 MAX 125/63 

44397M 44398M DS1 MAX 125/80 

44405M 44406M DS1 MAX 125/100 

44409M 44410M DS1 MAX 125/125 

44413M 44414M DS1 MAX 250/160 

44417M 44418M DS1 MAX 250/200 

44421M 44422M DS1 MAX 250/250 

44425M 44426M DS1 MAX 400/400 

44433M 44434M DS1 MAX 630/630 

44437M 44438M DS1 MAX 800/800 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

49


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR МOULDED DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF 

DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF 


400V 


230V 

DS1 MAX - THERMO MAGNETIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF 

Type 

44453M 44454M DS1 MAX 400/3300 

44457M 44458M DS1 MAX 630/3300 

44461M 44462M DS1 MAX 800/3300 

44515 44513 DS-3E 1000 

44516 44514 DS-3E 1250 


400V 


230V 

Type 

44328M 44330M DS1 MAX 125/63 

44334M 44335M DS1 MAX 125/80 

44338M 44339M DS1 MAX 125/100 

44342M 44343M DS1 MAX 125/125 

44345M 44346M DS1 MAX 250/160 

44349M 44350M DS1 MAX 250/200 

44353M 44354M DS1 MAX 250/250 

44357M 44358M DS1 MAX 400/400 

44365M 44366M DS1 MAX 630/630 

44369M 44370M DS1 MAX 800/800 

REMOTE CONTROL FOR MCCB, DS1 MAX (MANUAL) 

The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted 

• Two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C 

MOUNTING 

The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is 

mounted at the door of the distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base 

Catalogue 

number 

Type of the breaker Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

A B C D min. D max. 

44966M DS1 MAX 63A 25 50 50 65 115 1 

44967M DS1 MAX 125A 25 50 50 65 115 1 

44969M DS1 MAX 250A 35 70 70 80 130 1 

44970M DS1 MAX 400A 45 107 107 85 105 1 

44972M DS1 MAX 630/800A 70 119 119 110 110 1 

50 

ELMARK 


DS1 - 125-160 

DS1 MAX - 63-250 

ELECTRICAL REMOTE CONTROL FOR MCCB DS1 MAX 

(ELECTRICAL) 

The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted 

• Two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C 

MOUNTING 

The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is 

mounted at the door of the distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base 

Catalogue 

number 

230V 

Catalogue 

number 

400V 

Type of the 

breaker 


L1 B B H H1 

44917M 44906M DS1 MAX 63A 116 90 50 77 12,5 1 

44912M 44907M DS1 MAX 125A 116 90 50 77 12,5 1 

44914M 44909M DS1 MAX 250A 116 90 70 77 15 1 

44915M 44910M DS1 MAX 400A 176 130 107 115 27 1 

44916M 44911M DS1 MAX 630A 176 130 119 115 31 1 

44916M 44911M DS1 MAX 630A 176 130 119 115 31 1 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



TERMINAL PLATES FOR MCCB - DS1 MAX 

Straight copper electro-tinned extensions enabling cable connection outside the switch terminals 

and providing excellent contact with the switch terminal base. Terminal extensions with different 

cross section are available depending on the switch rated power. 

MOUNTING 

Extensions are directly bolt mounted to the switch terminal base. 


3pcs/set 


4pcs/set 

Type 

31125M - TP 125 MAX 125 

31250M - TP 250 MAX 250 

31400M 314400M TP 400 MAX 400 

31630M 314630M TP 630 MAX 630 

31850M 314850M TP 800 MAX 800 

Rated current (A) 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

51


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



HIGH VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 



StandardI EC 60947-1 

IEC 60947-2 

GB/T 14048.2 

L 

+ 

W 

+ 

+ + 

H 

1000V DC HIGH VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, 

DC1 SERIES 

DC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) are used for the protection of electrical devices 

that operate with direct current. The DC MCCBs are available in 50A-300A with maximum breaking 

capacity up to 20kA, which can ensure reliable short-circuit protection of the system. The MCCBs 

available in 2P, with nominal voltage of 1000VDC. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Protection against overloading. 

• Protection against short circuit. 

• Manual switching control. 

• High breaking capacity level. 

• Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers. 


• Rated voltage Ue (V) DC: 1000V DC 

• Rated insulation voltage Ui (V): 1250V 

• Rated current In(A): 50-300A 

• Extreme short-circuit breaking capacity Icu (kA): 20kA at 1000V DC 

• Running short-circuit breaking capacity Ics (kA): Ics=100%Icu 


• Rated impulse withstands voltage Uimp (kV): 8kV 

• Transient action value (ln): 10ln 



• Working temperature: -40~+70°C 


MOUNTING 

• Joining with bolts 

• Mounting position: vertical 


Type L W H 

DC1-320 180 76 126 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

ln (A) 

Number of 

poles 

Operating/Max. 

breaking capacity 

(kA) lcs/Icu 1000V 

44000DC DC1-320 50A 2P 20/20 1/6 

44001DC DC1-320 63A 2P 20/20 1/6 

44002DC DC1-320 80A 2P 20/20 1/6 

44003DC DC1-320 100A 2P 20/20 1/6 

44004DC DC1-320 125A 2P 20/20 1/6 

44005DC DC1-320 160A 2P 20/20 1/6 

44006DC DC1-320 200A 2P 20/20 1/6 

44007DC DC1-320 250A 2P 20/20 1/6 

44008DC DC1-320 300A 2P 20/20 1/6 

Packing/ box 

(pcs) 

DC 

curent type 

52 

ELMARK 




Standard IEC 60947-1 

IEC 60947-2 

GB/T 14048.2 

L 

+ 

+ 

1500V DC HIGH VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS, 

DC1 SERIES 

DC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) are used for the protection of electrical devices 

that operate with direct current. The DC MCCBs are available in 50A-800A with maximum breaking 

capacity up to 20kA, which can ensure reliable short-circuit protection of the system. The MCCBs 

available in 2P & 3P, with nominal voltage of 1500VDC. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Protection against overloading. 

• Protection against short circuit. 

• Manual switching control. 

• High breaking capacity level. 

• Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers. 


• Rated voltage Ue (V) DC: 1500V DC 

• Rated insulation voltage Ui (V): 1500V 

• Rated current In(A): 50-800A 

• Extreme short-circuit breaking capacity Icu (kA): 20kA at 1500V DC 

• Running short-circuit breaking capacity Ics (kA): Ics=100%Icu 


• Rated impulse withstands voltage Uimp (kV): 12kV 

• Transient action value (ln): 10ln 





MOUNTING 

• Joining with bolts. 

• Mounting position: vertical. 


+ + 

W 

H 


Type L W H 

DC1-320-3P 180 107 126 

DC1-400-2P 250 124 165 

DC1-630-2P 250 124 165 

DC1-800-2P 250 124 165 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

ln (A) 

Number of poles 

Operating/Max. 

breaking capacity 

(kA) lcs/Icu 1000V 

44012DC DC1-320 50A 2P (3P housing) 20/20 1/6 











Packing/ box 

(pcs) 

DC 

curent type 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

53


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB) DW1 SERIES 



Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2; 

IEC 947-2 

The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker used to control and protect low voltage 

electrical distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters of the circuit protection, built in 

under voltage release, remote control, earth protection and load monitoring 

FUNCTIONS 


circuits. 


powerful consumers. 

• Used as a main breaker in housing or 

industrial distributing installations. 


protected circuit. 


characteristics. 

• Motor control. 

• Mounted auxiliary devices for automation - 

under voltage release, earth protection, 

intelligent controlling block with a possibility 

for a choice of the protected function. 

*A commutation type of breakers with RS 

485 connection for duplex transmission of all 

function parameters, adjustment and data 

can also be produced at client’s order and 

delivery terms agreement. 


• Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz 


• Surge voltage wear resistance: 2kV 

• Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts 

to the power supply rail 

Connecting: 

‣ Copper rails 

‣ busway connection – at the back 

• Electrical wear resistance: ≥2000 cycles 

• Mechanical wear resistance: ≥9000 cycles 

• IP code: IP54 

• Mounting: 

‣ Clamping with bolts 

‣ Mounting position: vertical gradient - 

max. 5° 




• Installation altitude: up to 2000m 

BASIC PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 

• Overload protection with long time delay 

• Short circuit protection with short time delay, 

time inversion limit. 

• Short circuit protection with short time delay, 

time fixed limit. 

• Instantaneous short circuit protection. 

• Earth protection function. 

• Full stability function. 

• “Overload alarm” function. 

• Test function & Auto diagnostics function. 

Catalogue number Type Rated 

current 

In (A) 

Rated 

voltage 

Un (V) 

Breaking capacity 

(кA) 

400 V 690 V 


Type A H W 

DW1-2000 FIXED 362 402 373 

DW1-3200 FIXED 422 402 363 

DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT 375 432 461 

DW1-3200 DRAW-OUT 435 432 494 

DW1-4000 DRAW-OUT 550 432 494 

DW1-6300 DRAW-OUT 813 452 504 

Electrical wear 

resistance 

(number of 

cycles) 

Mechanical 

wear resistance 

(number of 

cycles) 

44208 DW1-2000 FIXED 1600 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1 

44209 DW1-2000 FIXED 2000 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1 

44255 DW1-3200 FIXED 2500 AC400V 100 65 2000 9000 1/1 

44329 DW1-3200 FIXED 3200 AC400V 100 65 2000 9000 1/1 

44208DO DW1-2000 DRAW-OUT 1600 AC400V 80 50 2000 9000 1/1 








Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

54 

ELMARK 


DUAL POWER CHANGE-OVER SWITCH EQ1 SERIES (ATS) 




EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1 

The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 is designed to provide continuous power supply 

and two electrical sources automatic switch in case of failure or deviation from the set parameters. 

It switches only when the three phases of the second power supply source are available. The 

system for dual power change-over switch consists of two molded case circuit breakers mounted 

on a metal frame connected with common operating mechanism and controlled by a command 

device that controls the system parameters’ correspondence. 

FUNCTIONS 


circuits at main power supply discrepancy 

• Switching to dual power change-over at 

power supply phase lack 

•With option to connect to fire alarm controller. 

In case of fire, the ATS switches off both power 

supply sources 



• Used as a main breaker in housing or industrial 

distributing installations supplied with a 

generator or a second power supply source 

(hospitals, post offices, military sites, control 

rooms) 



• Control: motor 

• Controls the following circuit parameters: 

‣ Presence of the three phases 

‣ The phase voltage to be in the set limits 

overload 

‣ Short circuit at the outlet 

BASIC FUNCTIONS OF THE CONTROL DEVICE 

• Overload protection 

• Instantaneous short circuit protection 

• Under phase protection 

• Under voltage protection 

• Possibility for setting the change-over time 

between the two sources – min 3s 

• Possibility for automatic switch-over to the 


• Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz 


• Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts 

to the power supply rail 


‣ Copper rails 

‣ Flexible or rigid conductors 


≥2000 


cycles): 

≥6000 


• Mounting: 

‣ Clamping with bolts 

‣ Mounting position: vertical gradient, 

maximum 5° 

• Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and 

nonflammable 



main power supply source after restoring its 

parameters. The system for dual power changeover 

switch is offered in two types: 

• With display (control device) mounted on the 

mounting plate (integrated type) 

• With separated control display 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

In (A) 

Type A B C D H 

EQ1 - 100 405 365 230 250

AUTOMATION | RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1, AC TYPE 




EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1 

RCD type AC for AC current 

The residual current device works with no extra power supply to the operating mechanism. It 

compares the magnitude of the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The 

conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a measurement 

transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated 

at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of 

some of the conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is mis-balanced and 

the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual field generates in the secondary current 

winding, called current leakage. The device breaks when the value of this current exceeds the limit 

value of the residual current breaker. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits 

at insulation damage of the conductors to the 

consumers. 


at presence of a person under voltage. 

• Used to protect not only particular consumers/ 

circuits, but also the whole panel. 



• Control: manual switching on and 

automatic switching off at exit failure. 

CONNECTING 

• Power supply busbar (only for bipolar) 

• Flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding 

section 

MOUNTING 

• On DIN-rail 


The residual current device is mounted in 

the distribution box, and after the device the 

neutral conductor and the earthing conductor 

must not be connected together. In order to 

work accurately, the device must have three- or 

five-conductor grid with separate protective 

conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or 

TT with three or five conductors). The corpus 

of the consumer depending on the grid type 

must be connected either to the protective 

conductor or be earthed. (Fig.1) 


• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz 

• Rated current: according to the table 

• Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA 

• Time delay until break: 20 

• Indication for operating (switched on) position 

• Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and 

nonflammable 




W1 W2 H H1 H2 D1 D2 

35 70 81 35 45 50 72 

Connecting scheme 

Fig. 1 

56 

ELMARK 


ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1, AC TYPE 


Residual current devices JЕL 1, 6kA - Type AC - alternating fault currents sensible. Impulse withstand 

voltage 2000VAC 


Leakage current I Δ n (mA) 

Type Number 

of poles 

30 100 300 500 

Breaking Rated 

capacity (kA) current 

In (A) 

40210 40212 40213 40214 JEL 1 2P 6 10.0 1/60 

40216 40217 40218 40219 JEL 1 2P 6 16.0 1/60 

40292 40293 40294 40295 JEL 1 2P 6 20.0 1/60 

40221 40222 40223 40224 JEL 1 2P 6 25.0 1/60 

40231 40232 40233 40234 JEL 1 2P 6 32.0 1/60 

40241 40242 40243 40244 JEL 1 2P 6 40.0 1/60 

40261 40262 40263 40264 JEL 1 2P 6 63.0 1/60 

40281 40282 40283 40284 JEL 1 2P 6 80.0 1/60 

40291 40296 40297 40298 JEL 1 2P 6 100.0 1/60 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 





Type Number 

of poles 

30 100 300 500 

Breaking 

capacity 

(kA) 

Rated 

current 

In (A) 

40410 40412 40413 40414 JEL 1 4P 6 10.0 1/30 

40416 40417 40418 40419 JEL 1 4P 6 16.0 1/30 

40492 40493 40494 40495 JEL 1 4P 6 20.0 1/30 

40421 40422 40423 40424 JEL 1 4P 6 25.0 1/30 

40431 40432 40433 40434 JEL 1 4P 6 32.0 1/30 

40441 40442 40443 40444 JEL 1 4P 6 40.0 1/30 

40461 40462 40463 40464 JEL 1 4P 6 63.0 1/30 

40481 40482 40483 40484 JEL 1 4P 6 80.0 1/30 

40491 40496 40497 40498 JEL 1 4P 6 100.0 1/30 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

57


ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (RCD) JEL1A, TYPE A 





These are Residual Current Devices (RCDs) JEL 1A with enhanced sensibility and fast - operating 

protection devices applicable in circuits with harmonic or direct pulsating current component 

presence. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching off electrical circuits on load at conductor 

insulation breaking to the consumer 

• Switching off electrical circuits on load at 

direct and indirect contact 

• Switching off electrical circuits on load at 

alternating earth fault currents during consequent 

light impact 

• Switching off consumers at harmonic 

presence due to luminescent lights 

• Switching off consumers in DC circuits at fault 

currents presence 

• Mechanical indicator for ON position 

CONNECTING 

• Power supply busbar (only for bipolar) 

• Flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding 

section 


• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50 Hz 

• Rated current: according to the table 

• Responsiveness: 30mA and 300mA 

• Time delay until break:

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE (RCD)- JEL1B, TYPE B 

EKL6-100B 10KA B Type RCCB 

Residual Current Circuit Breaker 



DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATING SYSTEM 

IEC62423 


JEL1B Type B RCD has compact structure, good reliability, and high safety. They ensure higher 

protection levels with maximum operational continuity under all working conditions. Type B RCDs 

IEC61008-1 

Tripping are sensitive to Lagging AC, pulsating Angle AC and steady DC leakage I△n>0.01A currents. This type may be required for I△n≤0.01A 

IEC62423 

use in photovoltage 

Current 

0° (PV) solar energy installations 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n because the PV panels produce a DC output 0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

Range 

EKL6-100B 

and some types 

10KA 

of fault 

90° B Type 

can result 

RCCB 

in the leakage of DC currents to earth. Type B RCDs can ensure 

0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

maximum safety in many applications, such as EV Charging Station, Crane and Elevator, variable 

Residual speed Current drives, Circuit medical 135° 

Breaker equipment, PV and Wind power 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n plants, etc. 

Standard_ 

0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

IEC61008-1 

IEC62423 


Alternative Current Sensitive Pulsating direct current sensitive Surge current proof 

Tripping • Mode: Electromagnetic 

Lagging Angle I△n>0.01A • Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. I△n≤0.01A for 1min: 

Current • Type: B class B for AC/DC current 0° 0.35I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 2.5kV 

0.35I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

Range • Rated Tripping operating is ensured voltage for 90° sinusoidal Ue 2P: 240V AC 50/60 Hz 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n • Electrical life: 2 000 cycles 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

• Rated residual operating currents voltage pulsed 135° DC Ue residual 4P: 415V 50/60 Hz 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n • Mechanical life: 4 000 cycles0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

• Insulation currents, alternating voltage Ui: residual 500V 


• Circuit sinusoidal breaker currents rated up current: to 1000Hz, according They to the react to AC and pulsating DC RCCB’s surge capacity. 

Alternative Current Sensitive Pulsating direct 

• Terminal 

current sensitive 

connection type: 

Surge current proof 

table pulsating direct residual currents and fault current ‣ which Cablereach 0 or almost Not tripping at standardized 8/20 υs 

• Residual for smooth B class current direct responsiveness: residual currents, 30mA 0 within one time period of the 

‣ Pin-type busbar 

surge-current waves acc.to VDE 0432 

• Break whether Tripping time applied under is ensured suddenly IΔn: for ≤0.1s sinusoidal or AC mains frequency. 

‣ U-type busbar 

Part 2 with surge current values of up 

• Circuit increasing residual 

breaker slowly. currents 

tripping 

pulsed 

curve: 

DC residual 

C 

to 250A. 

currents, alternating residual 

• Terminal size top/bottom for cable: 35mm2 

• Breaking 

sinusoidal 

capacity: 

currents 

10 

up 

000A 

to 1000Hz, They react to • AC Terminal and pulsating size DC top/bottom RCCB’s for surge busbar: capacity. 35mm2 

• Short pulsating circuit protection direct residual device currents (SCPD) and fuse: fault current which • Tightening reach 0 or torque: almost 2.5Nm Not tripping at standardized 8/20 υs 

10 000Afor smooth direct residual currents, 0 within one time 

• Ambient 

period of 

temperature: 

the 

surge-current -10°C + 65°C waves acc.to VDE 0432 

whether applied suddenly or 

• Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.5/50) 

mains frequency. 

Part 2 with surge current values of up 

increasing slowly. 


to 250A. 

RCD type B for AC/DC current 

Uimp: 4000V 




Type B (2P) 

Type B (2P) 

Type B (4P) 

Type B (4P) 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 






21.3 

35.5 

35.5 

45 

83 

45 

35.5 

83 

21.3 

35.5 

54 72 73.1 

54 72 73.1 

Overall and installation dimensions (mm) 

02 

02 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

59


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 




2P ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE 

(RCD)- JEL1B 

Catalogue number Type Number 


of poles 

30 

Breaking 

capacity 

(kA) 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

40845B JEL1B 1P+N 10 16 1/90 

40846B JEL1B 1P+N 10 25 1/90 

40847B JEL1B 1P+N 10 32 1/90 

40848B JEL1B 1P+N 10 40 1/90 

40849B JEL1B 1P+N 10 63 1/90 

40850B JEL1B 1P+N 10 80 1/90 

40851B JEL1B 1P+N 10 100 1/90 

4P ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE 

(RCD)- JEL1B 

Catalogue number Type Number of 


poles 

30 

Breaking 

capacity 

(kA) 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

40852B JEL1B 3P+N 10 16 1/45 

40853B JEL1B 3P+N 10 25 1/45 

40854B JEL1B 3P+N 10 32 1/45 

40855B JEL1B 3P+N 10 40 1/45 

40856B JEL1B 3P+N 10 63 1/45 

40857B JEL1B 3P+N 10 80 1/45 

40858B JEL1B 3P+N 10 100 1/45 


60 

ELMARK 


90° 0.25I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.25I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

135° 0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

Thermal Tripping 

Magnetic Tripping 

B Curve 

C Curve 

D Curve 

B Curve 1.13×I 

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC RESIDUAL 

N ≥1h 3×I 

CURRENT 

N 

≥0.1s 

As per No Tripping Time OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCBO) - JEL5A, 

1.45I 

10000 

5000 

1000 

500 

100 

50 

10 

5 

1 

0.5 

0.1 


2 3 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 

2 3 5 5 

4 4 4 5 X I n 

0.01 

0.006 

0.002 

0.001 

1.13In 

1.45In 

AC 

A 

1 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 

on Dimension(mm) 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



B Curve 

current I 

ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT t 

2 

I 

OPERATED 4 

I 

CIRCUIT 5 

t 

BREAKER (RCBO)- JEL4A, 

C Curve 

TYPE A CURVE C 


D Curve 

B Curve 1.13×I N ≥1h 3×I N 

≥0.1s 

1.45×I N 5×I N 

36 

T 

135° 

Thermal 

0.11I△n≤I△≤1.4I△n 

Tripping 

0.11I△n≤I△≤2I△n 

Magnetic Tripping 

1 

2 

81 

35.5 

As per 

IEC60898 

N 

N 

No 

50 

50 

66 

78 66 

78 

tripping 

Tripping 

current 

FUNCTIONS 

Switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at 

short circuit or overload. 


at insulation damage of the conductors to the 

consumers. 


at presence of a person and animals under 

voltage. 

• Switching off consumers at harmonic presence 

due to luminescent lights. 

• Switching off consumers in DC circuits at fault 

currents presence. 

• Used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, 

but also the whole panel. 



• Control: manual switching on and automatic 

switching off at failure in the insulation after 

the breaker. 

MOUNTING 



The residual current device is mounted in 

the distribution box, and after the device the 

neutral conductor and the earthing conductor 

must not be connected together. In order to 

work accurately, the device must have three- or 

five-conductor grid with separate operating 

neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting 

conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT 

with three or five conductors). 

02 

45 

Time 

Limits 

Hold 

current 

RCBO type A for AC/DC current 


COMBINED ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE AND 

CIRCUIT BREAKER 2P 6KA 



Type Number 

of poles 

30 300 

Breaking 

capacity 

(kA) 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

40206A 40205A JEL4A 1P+N 6 6 1/90 

40211A 40208A JEL4A 1P+N 6 10 1/90 

40215A 40235A JEL4A 1P+N 6 16 1/90 

40225A 40230A JEL4A 1P+N 6 20 1/90 

40240A 40246A JEL4A 1P+N 6 25 1/90 

40265A 40236A JEL4A 1P+N 6 32 1/90 

40274A 40273A JEL4A 1P+N 6 40 1/90 

COMBINED ELECTRONIC RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE AND 

CIRCUIT BREAKER 4P 6KA 



Type Number 

of poles 

30 300 

Breaking 

capacity 

(kA) 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

40470A 40477A JEL4A 3P+N 6 6 1/30 

40471A 40478A JEL4A 3P+N 6 10 1/30 

40472A 40479A JEL4A 3P+N 6 16 1/30 

40473A 40480A JEL4A 3P+N 6 20 1/30 

40474A 40485A JEL4A 3P+N 6 25 1/30 

40475A 40486A JEL4A 3P+N 6 32 1/30 

40476A 40487A JEL4A 3P+N 6 40 1/30 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

63

Characteristics 

A 

A 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



Tripping 

Current 

Range 

Documents Characteristics corresponding 


Curves 

IEC61009-1 

120 

IEC62606 

min 

T V [s] 

Type 

1.13In 

1.45In 

AC 

A 

RCBO WITH ARC FAULT PROTECTIVE, JEL8A CURVE C 

Tripping current I△/A 

0.5I△n

B 

A 

A 



EKL9-40 6KA RCBO 

IEC61009-1 

RCCB with Overcurrent Protection 


Tripping Curves 

Type 

Current 

Range 


Curves 

EKL9-40 6KA RCBO 

RCCB with Overcurrent Protection 

Current 

Range 

min 

120 

60 

30 

10 

5 

2 

1 

T V [s] 

10000 

5000 

1000 

0.01 

0.006 



500 

100 

50 

10 

5 

1 

0.5 

0.1 

0.002 

0.001 

AC 120 

1.13In 

1.45In 

A 

min 

60 

30 

10 

5 

2 

1 

T V [s] 

10000 

5000 

1000 

500 

100 

50 

10 

5 

1 

0.5 

0.1 

0.01 

0.006 

0.002 

0.001 

1.13In 

1.45In 

AC 

A 

1 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 

5 5 

4 4 4 5 X I n 

1 2 3 


guarantees its proper actuation against earth leakage faults even when the neutral and phase 

Tripping current I△/A 

0.5I△n

AUTOMATION | SURGE ARRESTERS 

COMBINED SURGE ARRESTERS DS1 TYPE MAX-ELECTRONIC 1 + 2 

TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF 

Type 1+2 for AC current 

Combined surge arresters type 1 + 2 are coordinated in advance. They can manage and prevent 

the high energy during a thunderbolt and to assure the better level of security of electricity of the 

electrical equipment 

Surge arresters Type 1 is used to catch the energy caused by higher electricity compared to the 

capacity of direct thunderbolt. The security device has passed a successful test according to the 

standards with electric wave 10/350 (class 1 test). 

Surge arresters Type 2 is used to catch the energy caused by higher electricity, compared to the 

capacity of indirect strike or commutative overvoltage. The security device has passed a successful 

test according to the standards with electric wave 8/20 (class 2 test). 

Response time:

SURGE ARRESTERS SPD TYPE 2 FOR AC CURRENT 



Standard EN61 643-1 

Type 2 for AC current 

The surge arrester consists of a semi-conductor valve element that opens at certain conditions. 

At normal conditions of the system, the surge arrester has infinitely high resistance between the 

protected conductors and earthing circuit. At voltage increase due to atmospheric nature or system 

failure, the valve element opens and leads the excessive voltage to the grounded circuit. After 

reversion of the normal voltage the valve element closes. The arrester can endure high momentary 

overloading. 

FUNCTIONS 

• protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits 

from overload 

• used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, 

but also the whole panel 

• remarkable with high reliability of current 


• control: automatic switching off at exit failure 

and recovery after eliminating the danger 

CONNECTING 

• flexible or rigid conductors with 

corresponding section 

MOUNTING 

• on DIN-rail 

• mounting position: vertical 

• mounting in the distribution box on the front 

or right before the breaker according to the 

attached schemes 

• Breakers plastic material of UV rays and 

nonflammable 




• Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating 

voltage of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz 

• Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge 

arrester terminals at rated discharge current 

running: according to the tables 

• Rated discharge current In – the rated value of 

discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20μs, which 

can be repeatedly led to the ground: according 

to the tables 

• Full discharge current Imax – the peak value 

of the discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20μs, 

which the surge arrester can bear once: 

according to the table 

• Constant operating current: up to 800μA for 

1P, 2P and 3P; up to 600μA for 1P + N, 3P + N 

• Indication for damaged surge arrester 

• Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N 


C H1 H2 D1 D2 

5 90 45 43.5 58 

COLOUR CODE for all types 5кA - yellow; white – 10кA; green – 20 кA and red 40кA 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

67


The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity, 

named B, C or D (from high to low risk level). 

THE COMPANY OFFERS THE FOLLOWING MODELS OF ARRESTERS 

Model SPD – Bxxxx – for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the beginning 

of the installation or in the main panel. 

Model SPD – Cxxxx – for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the 

installation or before the breaker. 

Model SPD – Dxxxx – for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consumers 

in combination with SPD – Bxxxx/SPD – Cxxxx 

Catalogue 

number 

Type of the 

arrester 

In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

64101 SPD-D5/1p 5 10 275 1.2 17/170 

64102 SPD-C10/1p 10 20 275 1.2 17/170 

64103 SPD-C20/1p 20 40 275 1.8 17/170 

64104 SPD-B40/1p 40 60 275 2 17/170 

Catalogue 

number 

Type of the 

arrester 


(pcs) 

64201 SPD-D5/1pN 5 10 275 1.2 8 / 80 

64202 SPD-C10/1pN 10 20 275 1.2 8 / 80 

64203 SPD-C20/1pN 20 40 275 1.8 8 / 80 

64204 SPD-B40/1pN 40 60 275 2 8 / 80 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



Catalogue 

number 

Type of the 

arrester 


(pcs) 

64301 SPD-D5/3p 5 10 440 1.2 5 / 50 

64302 SPD-C10/3p 10 20 440 1.2 5 / 50 

64303 SPD-C20/3p 20 40 440 1.8 5 / 50 

64304 SPD-B40/3p 40 60 440 2 5 / 50 

Catalogue 

number 

Type of the 

arrester 


(pcs) 

64401 SPD-D5/3pN 5 10 440 1.2 4 / 40 

64402 SPD-C10/3pN 10 20 440 1.2 4 / 40 

64403 SPD-C20/3pN 20 40 440 1.8 4 / 40 

64404 SPD-B40/3pN 40 60 440 2 4 / 40 

Type 2 for AC current 


68 

ELMARK 


Type 2 for AC/DC current 

COMBINED SURGE ARRESTERS AC/DC, TYPE 2 

Specially designed surge arresters providing protection of solar and photo - voltaic systems; 

designed to protect system against over voltages resulting from indirect light impact. They could 

be installed in earthed and non - earthed systems. They break photo - voltaic generator electric 

circuit when voltage reaches or over passes limit threshold value, providing photo - voltaic protection 

against destroying. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

64105 SPD-DC-D5/1p 5 10 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.2 17 / 170 

64106 SPD-DC-C10/1p 10 20 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.5 17 / 170 

64107 SPD-DC-C20/1p 20 40 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.8 17 / 170 

64108 SPD-DC-B40/1p 30 60 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 2.2 17 / 170 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

64205 SPD-DC-D5/1pN 5 10 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.2 8 / 80 

64206 SPD-DC-C10/1pN 10 20 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.5 8 / 80 

64207 SPD-DC-C20/1pN 20 40 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 1.8 8 / 80 

64208 SPD-DC-B40/1pN 30 60 275 AC/440 DC ≤ 2.2 8 / 80 



Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

64305 SPD-DC-D5/3p 5 10 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.2 5 / 50 

64306 SPD-DC-C10/3p 10 20 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.5 5 / 50 

64307 SPD-DC-C20/3p 20 40 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 1.8 5 / 50 

64308 SPD-DC-B40/3p 30 60 385 AC/500 DC ≤ 2.2 5 / 50 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 






page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

69

EKU5-T2-40PVSPDTYPET2 

Standard_ IEC/EN61643-31 


DC SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR PHOTOVOLTAGE (PV) SYSTEMS, TYPE 2 



IEC/EN61643-31 

Type 2 for DC current 

DC 

curent type 

EKU5T240PV2M600S 

- - - - 

Type 2 PV SPD is a DC surge protector specially designed for photovoltage power supply systems. 

Max continuous operating voltage reach DC1500V. These units must be installed in parallel on the 

DC networks to be protected and provide common and different modes protection. Its installed 

location is recommended at both ends of the DC power supply line (solar panel side and inverter/ 

converter side), especially if the line routing is external and long. Type 2 SPDs protect against indirect 

lightning strikes, which are characterized by 8/20 µs waveforms. An 8/20 µs waveform means 

that the strike has an 8 µs rise time and a duration to one-half peak of 20 µs. 

Catalogue 

number 

Number of 

poles 

WithRemoteSignaling 

Uc:600:DC600V,1000:DC1000V,1500:DC1500V 

No.ofModule:2:2Module,3:3Module 

SolarPVSystem 

I.max:40kA 

ClassificationT2 

SPDserieNo.5 

CompanyCode 


• SPD classification according to IEC/EN61643- 

31: T2 

• Max. continuous operating a.c.voltage Ucpv: 

‣ 2P: 600 and 1000V 

‣ 3P: 1500V 

• Nominal discharge current (8/20μs) In: 20kA 

• Maximum discharge current (8/20μs) Imax: 

40kA 

• Voltage protection level DC+/DV-to PE: 

‣ 2P 600V: ≤2.6kV 

‣ 2P 1000V: ≤4kV 

‣ 3P 1500V: ≤5.2kV 

• Operating temperature range (Tu): -40 º ~80 º 

• Operating State/Fault Indication: Green/Red 

• Cross-section area (Min.): 4 mm2 

• Cross-section area (Max.): 35 mm2 

• Enclosure material: Thermal Plastic UL94-V0 

• Ingress Protection: IP20 

In (kA) Imax (kA) Ucpv Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

64209 2P 20 40 600 1/60 

64210 

EKU5-T2-40PV 

2P 20 

EKU5-T2-40PV 

40 1000 

EKU5-T2-40PV 

1/60 

EKU5-T2-40PV 

2P(600VDC) 64309 3P 2P(1000VDC) 20 40 3P(1000VDC) 1500 1/403P(1500VDC) 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



Basiccircuitdiagram 

DC+ DC- DC+ DC- 

Type 2 for DC current 

DC 

curent type 

09 

2P 


3P 

Overall and installation dimensions 

70 

ELMARK 


DC SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES FOR PHOTOVOLTAGE (PV) SYSTEMS, TYPE 1+2 



IEC/EN61643-31 


T1+T2 three-module photovoltage surge protective device (SPD) (with three -step DC switching 

device) features visual indication and optional remote contact signaling (floating changeover 

contact) for use in PV systems. 


• SPD classification according to IEC/EN61643-31: T1+T2 

• Max. continuous operating a.c.voltage Ucpv: 1000 and 1500 VDC 

• Impulse Discharge Current Iimp (10/350 μs): 6.25kA 

• Total Discharge Current Itotal (10/350 μs): 12.5kA 

• Nominal discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA 

• Maximum discharge current Imax (8/20µs): 40kA 

• Voltage protection level DC+/DV-to PE: ≤5.2kV 

• Response time: ≤25ns 

• Operating temperature range (Tu): -40 º ~80 º 

• Operating State/Fault Indication: Green/Red 

• Cross-section area (Min.): 4 mm2 

• Cross-section area (Max.): 35 mm2 

• Enclosure material: Thermal Plastic UL94-V0 

• Ingress Protection: IP20 


Catalogue 

number 

Number of 

poles 

In (kA) Imax (kA) Ucpv Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

64310 3P 20 40 1000 1/40 

64311 3P 20 40 1500 1/40 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

7 standard 

0 extended 



Type 1+2 for DC current 

DC 

curent type 

Connection diagram 

Overall and installation dimensions 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

71

AUTOMATION | LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



THREE POLE (3P) LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D/HK 



Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60 947-4-1 

Type LT1-D/ 3P 

Type LT1-D/ 3P 

LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers 

operating in class AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors 

are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating circuit making and the models over 40A also 

have 1NC operating contactor. 

FUNCTIONS 

• switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical 

circuits at controlling signal to the coil 

• making of control systems 

• used as an operating element in process 

control panels 



• reliable separation of power contactors 

• secured cover of the movable part of the 

contactor 

CONNECTING 

• flexible conductors with or without cable 

terminal 

• rigid conductors 

MOUNTING 


• with bolts to the surface 

• mounting position: vertical gradientmax. 

± 5° 

• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and 

nonflammable (self-extinguishing material) 






• Operation class: utilization category AC-3 

• Rated operating voltage of power contactors: 

up to 690V; 50/60Hz 

• Composition of the power contact surfaces: 

unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO 

• Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V 

• Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC 

• Coil material: pure copper type QA-1 

• Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360 

• Moveable part material: Bakelite 

• Limits of the controlling coil voltage: operating 

range of coil 

• Joining terminal: screw terminal 


≥1000000 


cycles): 

≥10000000 

• Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 

600 for 40-95A 

• Pole leaking power: up to 13W 


Type a b Ø A B C 

LT1-HK 06~12/LT-1K 34/35 45 4.5 45 50 50 

LT-D 09~12 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 82 

LT1 D18 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 87 

LT1 D25 40 48 4.5 57 80 95 

LT1 D32 40 48 4.5 57 80 100 

LT-D 40~65 40 100/110 6.5 77 126 116 

LT-D 80~95 40 100/110 6.5 87 126 127 

Type LT1-HK/ 3P 

72 

ELMARK 



according to the coil 

voltage (V) 

Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power Rated 

consumption current 

of coil (VA) in AC-3 

230V 400V 220V 

230V 

380V 

400V 

415V 440V 660V 

690V 

closed 

inrush 

open 

hold 

440V to 

up 

Tightening 

moment 

(N.m) 

Section of 

the power 

supply 

conductor 

23061E 23062E LT 1 - HK 0610 1NO 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 7 60 6A 1.7 0.75-2.5 1/100 

23091 23092 LT1 - D0910 1NO 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

23273 23270 LT1 - D0901 1NC 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

23121 23122 LT1 - D1210 1NO 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

23274 23280 LT1 - D1201 1NC 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

23181 23182 LT1 - D1810 1NO 4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

23275 23286 LT1 - D1801 1NC 4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

23251 23252 LT1 - D2510 1NO 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 

23276 23292 LT1 - D2501 1NC 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 

23321 23322 LT1 - D3210 1NO 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 7.5 90 32A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 

23401 23402 LT1 - D4011 1NO+1NC 11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1/20 

23501 23502 LT1 - D5011 1NO+1NC 15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1/20 

23651 23652 LT1 - D6511 1NO+1NC 18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1/20 

23801 23802 LT1 - D8011 1NO+1NC 22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1/15 

23951 23952 LT1 - D9511 1NO+1NC 25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1/15 


according to the coil voltage (V) 

Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power 

12V 24V 36V 48V 110V 220V 380V 415V 440V 660V 

230V 400V 

690V 

23063E 23064E 23065E 23066E 23067E LT 1 - HK 

0610 1NO 

23093 23094 23095 23096 23097 LT1 - D0910 

1NO 

23271 23272 23277 23278 23279 LT1 - D0901 

1NC 

23123 23124 23125 23126 23127 LT1 - D1210 

1NO 

23281 23282 23283 23284 23285 LT1 - D1201 

1NC 

23183 23184 23185 23186 23187 LT1 - D1810 

1NO 

23287 23288 23289 23290 23291 LT1 - D1801 

1NC 

23253 23254 23255 23256 23257 LT1 - D2510 

1NO 

23293 23294 23295 23296 23297 LT1 - D2501 

1NC 

23323 23324 23325 23326 23327 LT1 - D3210 

1NO 

23403 23404 23405 23406 23407 LT1 - D4011 

1NO+1NC 

23503 23504 23505 23506 23507 LT1 - D5011 

1NO+1NC 

23653 23654 23655 23656 23657 LT1 - D6511 

1NO+1NC 

23803 23804 23805 23806 23807 LT1 - D8011 

1NO+1NC 

23953 23954 23955 23956 23957 LT1 - D9511 

1NO+1NC 

consumption 

of coil (VA) 

closed open 

inrush hold 

Rated 

current 

in AC-3 

440V to 

up 

Tightening 

moment 

(N.m) 

Section of 

the power 

supply 

conductor 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

Pack./ 

Box 

(pcs) 

1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 7 60 6A 1.7 0.75-2.5 1/100 

2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 

5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 

7.5 15 15 15 18.5 7.5 90 32A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 

11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1/20 

15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1/20 

18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1/20 

22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1/15 

25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1/15 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

73


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



FOUR POLE (4P) LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS LT1-D 




LT1 25A-4P 

LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers 

operating in class AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors 

are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating circuit making and the models over 40A also 

have 1NC operating contactor. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical 

circuits at controlling signal to the coil 

• Making of control systems 

• Used as an operating element in process 




• Reliable separation of power contactors 

• Secured cover of the movable part of the 

contactor 

CONNECTING 

• Flexible conductors with or without cable 

terminal 

• Rigid conductors 

MOUNTING 


• With bolts to the surface 

• Mounting position: vertical gradientmax. 

± 5° 










up to 690V; 50/60Hz 




• Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC 

• Coil material: pure copper type QA-1 

• Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360 

• Movable part material: Bakelite 


range of coil 



≥1000000 


cycles): 

≥10000000 

• Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 

600 for 40-95A 



Type a b Ø A B C 

LT-D 09~12 34/35 50/60 4.5 47 70 82 

LT1 D25 40 48 4.5 57 80 95 

LT-D 40~65 40 100/110 6.5 86 126 116/129 

LT-D 80~95 40 100/110 6.5 97 126 127/140 

LT1 80A-4P 

74 

ELMARK 



according to the coil 

voltage (V) 

Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power Rated 

consumption current 

of coil (VA) in AC-3 

230V 400V 220V 

230V 

380V 

400V 

415V 440V 660V 

690V 

closed 

inrush 

440V to 

up 

Tightening 

moment 

(N.m) 

Section of 

the power 

supply 

conductor 

234091 234092 LT1 - D0910 1NO 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

234121 234122 LT1 - D1210 1NO 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

234251 234252 LT1 - D2510 1NO 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 

234401 234402 LT1 - D4011 1NO+1NC 11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1/20 

234501 234502 LT1 - D5011 1NO+1NC 15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1/20 

234651 234652 LT1 - D6511 1NO+1NC 18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1/20 

234801 234802 LT1 - D8011 1NO+1NC 22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1/15 

234951 234952 LT1 - D9511 1NO+1NC 25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1/15 



open 

hold 

Type number Rated capacity (kW) Power 

12V 24V 36V 48V 110V 220V 380V 415V 440V 660V 

230V 400V 

690V 

234093 234094 234095 234096 234097 LT1 - D0910 

1NO 

234123 234124 234125 234126 234127 LT1 - D1210 

1NO 

234253 234254 234255 234256 234257 LT1 - D2510 

1NO 

234403 234404 234405 234406 234407 LT1 - D4011 

1NO+1NC 

234503 234504 234505 234506 234507 LT1 - D5011 

1NO+1NC 

234653 234654 234655 234656 234657 LT1 - D6511 

1NO+1NC 

234803 234804 234805 234806 234807 LT1 - D8011 

1NO+1NC 

234953 234954 234955 234956 234957 LT1 - D9511 

1NO+1NC 

consumption 

of coil (VA) 

closed open 

inrush hold 

Rated 

current 

in AC-3 

440V to 

up 

Tightening 

moment 

(N.m) 

Section of 

the power 

supply 

conductor 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

Pack./ 

Box 

(pcs) 

2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12A 1.7 1-4 1/50 

5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25A 2.5 2.5-10 1/50 

11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40A 5 2.5-16 1/20 

15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50A 5 6-25 1/20 

18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65A 5 6-25 1/20 

22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80A 9 10-50 1/15 

25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95A 9 10-50 1/15 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

75


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



THREE POLE LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC LT1-F TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF 




The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current contactors used to control circuits and consumers 

operating in normal working conditions with switching on /off the consumer and dirty working 

environment. They are suitable for consumers with electrical power consumption from 115A to 

800A. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded 

electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil 

• Making of systems for consumers’ control 





• Reliable separation of power contactors 


contactor 

CONNECTING 


terminal 


• rail 

MOUNTING 


• Mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 

10°C 





up to 1000V; 50/60Hz 




• Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type 

• Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360 

• Movable part composition: bakelite 


range of coil 



≥10000000 


cycles): 

≥10000000 

• Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200 

• Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W 

• Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and nonflammable 

(self-extinguishing material) 



Type A B C L M Q Q1 P 

LT 1 F150 163.5 170 171 107 150 26 57.5 40 

LT 1 F225 168.5 197 181 113.5 172 21 51.5 48 

LT 1 F265 201.5 203 181 141 178 39 66.5 48 

LT 1 F400 213 206 219 145 182 43 74 48 

LT 1 F630 309 304 255 155 264 60 89 80 

LT 1 F800 309 304 255 155 264 60 89 80 



Type 

number 

Motor rated capacity (kW) 

Power 

consumption 

of coil (VA) 

230V 400V 36V 48V 110V 220V 380V 415V 440V 500V 660V 1000V closed open 

230V 400V 

690V 

Rated 

current 

in AC-3 

440V to 

up 

Tightening 

moment 

(N.m) 

23111 23112 23115 23116 23117 LT1 - F115 30 55 59 59 59 80 60 45 550 115 A 18 1 / 4 

23151 23152 23155 23156 23157 LT1 - F150 40 75 80 80 90 100 65 45 550 150 A 25 1 / 4 

23861 23862 23865 23866 23867 LT1 - F225 63 110 110 110 129 129 100 55 805 225 A 35 1 / 2 

23261 23262 23265 23266 23267 LT1 - F265 75 132 140 140 160 160 147 10 700 265 A 35 1 / 2 

23751 23752 LT1 - F400 110 200 220 250 257 280 185 18 1000 400 A 50 1 / 1 

23771 23772 LT1 - F630 200 335 375 400 400 450 450 25 1500 630 A 50 1 / 1 

23881 23882 LT1 - F800 250 450 450 450 450 475 450 15 1300 800 A 50 1 / 1 

Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of 

eventual coil change. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

76 

ELMARK 


LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS WITH DIRECT CURRENT COIL LP1-D 



Standard EN60947-1; EN 60947-4-1 

DC 

curent type 

The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors with DC operating of coil for control. The 

power plugs of the contactor are designed for control of alternating current circuits and consumers 

operating in normal operating class AC-3 with frequently switching on/ off the consumer 

and dirty working environment. The contactors are suitable for consumers with electrical power 

consumption from 9A to 225A. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on/off alternating current consumers 

in direct current controlling schemes at 

controlling signal to the coil 

• Making of systems for consumers’ control 





• Reliable separation of power contacts 


contactor 

CONNECTING 


terminal 


MOUNTING 


• with bolts to the surface 

• mounting position: vertical gradientmax. 

± 5° 


• Rated operating voltage of the coil: from 12V 

DC to 220V DC 

• Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: 

up to 690V DC 

• Insulation voltage: 690V 



range of coil 



≥10000000 


cycles): 

≥10000000 

• Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 

600 for 40-95A 







Type A B C a b 

LP 1 D0910 47 76 95 34/35 50/60 

LP 1 D1210 47 76 95 34/35 50/60 

LP 1 D1810 47 76 95 34/35 50 

LP 1 D2510 57 86 101 40 50 

LP 1 D3210 57 86 101 40 50 

LP 1 D4011 77 129 176 40 100 

LP 1 D5011 77 129 176 40 100 

LP 1 D6511 77 129 176 40 100 

LP 1 D9511 87 129 182 40 100 

LP 1 F115 163.5 170 171 40 150 

LP 1 F150 163.5 170 171 40 150 

LP 1 F225 168.5 197 181 48 172 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




according to the coil voltage (V DC) 

Type 

Rated Auxiliary 

current contact 

(A) (pcs.) 

Rated capacity 

of the consumer (kW) 

12V 24V 36V 48V 110V 230V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 

23962 23098 23130 23971 23980 23139 LP 1 D0910 9 1NO 2.20 4.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 1/40 

23963 23128 23131 23972 23981 23140 LP 1 D1210 12 1NO 3.00 5.50 5.50 5.50 7.50 1/40 

23964 23188 23132 23973 23982 23141 LP 1 D1810 18 1NO 4.00 7.50 7.50 7.50 10.0 1/30 

23925 23258 23133 23974 23983 23142 LP 1 D2510 25 1NO 5.50 11.0 11.0 11.0 15.0 1/20 

23966 23328 23134 23975 23984 23143 LP 1 D3210 32 1NO 7.50 15.0 15.0 15.0 18.5 1/30 

23967 23408 23135 23976 23985 23144 LP 1 D4011 40 1NO+1NC 11.0 18.5 18.5 18.5 30.0 1/10 

23968 23508 23136 23977 23986 23145 LP 1 D5011 50 1NO+1NC 15.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 33.0 1/10 

23969 23658 23137 23978 23987 23146 LP 1 D6511 65 1NO+1NC 18.5 30.0 30.0 30.0 37.0 1/10 

23970 23958 23138 23979 23988 23147 LP 1 D9511 95 1NO+1NC 25.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 1/10 

23914 23917 23989 23148 LP 1 F115 115 1NO 30.0 55.0 59.0 59.0 80.0 1/4 

23915 23918 23990 23149 LP 1 F150 150 1NO 40.0 75.0 80.0 80.0 100 1/4 

23916 23919 23994 23201 LP 1 F225 225 1NO 63.0 110 110 110 129 1/2 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

77


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



LOW VOLTAGE CONTACTORS DS1 FOR MAX-ELECTRONIC SWITCHING OF TYPE CAPACITOR WITH MOUNTED BANKS CJ19-43 MX+OF 




The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed electrical devices for commutation of three 

phase capacitors used for power correction. They are alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx 

with mounted a group for peak current lowering from the transitional process of the capacitor’s 

switching on/off. This group is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched on in the 

beginning of the transitional process (switching on/off of the capacitor group). The contactors are 

suitable for capacitors with rate up to 50 kVAr. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on/off of capacitor banks for reactive 

power compensation 

• Making of systems for compensation of the 

energy reactive component 

• Lowering of the peak transitional currents at 

switching on/off of the capacitor 



• Reliable separation of power contacts 

• Secured part of the contactor against 

consumer contact 

• do not allow manual operation 

CONNECTING 


terminal 


MOUNTING 

• On DIN-rail or 


• Mounting position: vertical gradientmax. 

± 5° 






• Operation class: utilization category AC6b 

• Rated operating voltage of the controlling 

coil: 230V AC; 50/60Hz 


up to 690V AC 



• Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 

to 1.15 Uc 

• Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts 

+1NO operative 



≥300000 


cycles): 

≥1000000 

• Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 

up to 600 



Type A B C D 

CJ19-32 DPK 56 74 130 150 

CJ19-40 DPK 75 127 180 150 

CJ19-65 DPK 85 127 200 157 

CJ19-95 DPK 85 127 200 157 

CJ19-115DPK 122 165 230 157 

CJ19-150DPK 122 165 230 157 

CJ19-170DPK 122 165 230 157 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current Rated capacity 

(A) 

of the consumer (kVAr) 

400/440V 690V 

Coil voltage 

(V) 

23932 CJ19-32 DPK 32 8 12.5 230 1/20 

23910 CJ19-32 DPK 32 8 12.5 400 1/20 

23900 CJ19-40 DPK 40 12.5 15 230 1/16 

23940 CJ19-40 DPK 40 12.5 15 400 1/16 

23961 CJ19-65 DPK 65 25 30 230 1/16 

23965 CJ19-65 DPK 65 25 30 400 1/16 

23909 CJ19-95 DPK 95 30 36 230 1/16 

23995 CJ19-95 DPK 95 30 36 400 1/16 

23991 CJ19-115 DPK 115 35 40 230 1/4 

23992 CJ19-150 DPK 150 40 50 230 1/4 

23993 CJ19-170 DPK 170 50 60 230 1/4 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

78 

ELMARK 


REVERSE CONTACTORS LT4-DXX 




LT 4-Dxx series contactors is suitable for across- the line starting and reversing of-3 phase squirrel 

cage and slip ring motors. It consist of two magnetic contactors LT1D. The contactor is provided 

whit a built-in interlock safety mechanism. The contactor is used for reverse control of induction 

motors with shortly rotor. The contactors from the series are offered for consumers up to 95A. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on of electrical motors in one 

direction of rotation and reversing of the 

rotation direction at outside command 

• Making of control systems 



• Reliable switching on or separation of power 

contacts 

• Secured part of the contactors against consumer 

contact 


contactor 

• Impossibility for simultaneous switching on 

of the two contactors from the group due to 

mechanical locking 

CONNECTING 


terminal 


MOUNTING 

• On DIN-rail or with bolts to the surface 

• Mounting position: vertical gradient – 

max. ± 5° 


non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) 




• Operation class: AC 3 

• Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 

230V AC; 50/60 Hz 


up to 690V AC 



• Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 

to 1.15 Uc 

• Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO 

Operative (for contactors over 40A there is also 

Additional 1NC contact) 



≥1 000 000 


cycles): ≥10 000 000 

• Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up 

to 600 

• Pole leaking power: up to 13W ≥10000000 

• Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 

600 for 40-95A 



YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




Type A B C 

LT 4 - D1810 100 70 83 

LT 4 - D2510 130 80 98 

LT 4 - D3210 130 80 105 

LT 4 - D4011 167 126 116 

LT 4 - D6511 167 126 116 

LT 4 - D9511 182 127 127 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Note: The contactors are offered without factory cabling 

Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) 

230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

23301 LT 4 D1810 18 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 1 / 20 

23302 LT 4 D2510 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 1 / 20 

23303 LT 4 D3210 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 1 / 20 

23304 LT 4 D4011 40 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 30 1 / 8 

23305 LT 4 D6511 65 18.5 30 30 30 37 1 / 8 

23306 LT 4 D9511 95 25 45 45 45 45 1 / 6 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

79

AUTOMATION | AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS 



Standard EN 60947-4-1 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS LT01 

At necessity the element provide auxiliary number of contacts. They are specially designed for 

mounting on the movable part of the magnetic core of the contactors LT 1K/D series. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Extending the number of the operative 

contactors up to 4 in different 

• Combinations: 

‣ Switches on simultaneously with the other 

contact system of the contactor 

CONNECTING 


terminal 



• Operation class: AC 3 





MOUNTING 

• On the movable cover of the contactor 

through pinching 

• Mounting position: vertical gradient - 

max. ± 5° 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




H W L W1 W2 H2 L1 L2 

32 40 35 26 45 48 6.5 37 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

For Contactor 

Series 

Number of 

contacts 

Rated 

current 

23002 LT01-DN02 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NC 6A 0,5-1 

23011 LT01-DN11 LT1-D & LT1-F NO+NC 6A 0,5-1 

23020 LT01-DN20 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NO 6A 0,5-1 

23022 LT01-DN22 LT1-D & LT1-F 2NO+2NC 6A 0,5-1 

23040 LT01-DN40 LT1-D & LT1-F 4NO 6A 0,5-1 

23004 LT01-DN04 LT1-D & LT1-F 4NC 6A 0,5-1 

23001 LT01-KN11 LT1-HK NO+NC 6A 0,5-1 

23003 LT01-KN22 LT1-HK 2NO+2NC 6A 0,5-1 

Section of the 


80 

ELMARK 


AUXILIARY CONTACTS LT03-DN11 

Providing on necessity additional number of plug points and are mounted sideward to the 

movable part of the magnetic cores of contactors of the series LT1D till 65A. Variants with two 

additional plug points NO and NC are offered. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Expanding the number of the operational 

plug points 

• Switching on simultaneously with the rest of 

the contact system of the contactor 

CONNECTING 

• Flexible conductors with or without cable end 

• solid conductors 


• Environment operational regime: AC 3 


• Double connector: screw connector 

• Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning 

(self extinguishing material) 

MOUNTING 

• Mounting position- sideward to the 

contactor 


W1 W2 H L A 

73 48 22 12.5 72 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Rated current Section of the conductor 

(mm²) 

23311 LT03-DN11 6A 0,5-1 

AUTOMATION | AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS 

TIME DELAY CONTACT BLOCK LT02-DXX 

LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used 

most frequently in combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form “star/delta” starters for 

electrical motor control, as it provides the necessary time for motor winding. 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




W W2 L1 h1 h2 H 

33 45 48 22 14 59 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Number of contacts Time delay Delay 

23901 LT02-DT0 NO+NC 0.1~3s ON 

23902 LT02-DT2 NO+NC 0.1~30s ON 

23903 LT02-DT4 NO+NC 10~180s ON 

239022 LT02-DT22 NO+NC 0.1~30s OFF 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

81

AUTOMATION | MODULE CONTACTORS 

MODULE CONTACTORS K SERIES 



Standard EN 61095 

Modular contactors K series are used for commutation of mono-phase and three-phase low 

power electrical consumers. They provide connection between the consumers in small overall 

dimensions, silent work, mounting only at DIN-rails. 

FUNCTIONS 

• switching on of consumers 

• making of control systems 



• reliable switching on or separation of power 

contacts 

CONNECTING 

• flexible conductors with or without cable 

terminal 

• rigid conductors 

MOUNTING 

• on DIN-rail or 

• mounting position: vertical gradientmax.± 5° 


• Operation class: AC 7a 

• Rated operating voltage of the controlling 

coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz 


up to 690V AC 









H1 C D1 D2 A E 

81 5 31 66 18 9 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



H1 

C 

Catalogue 

number 

Type In Coil 

voltage (V) 

Contacts 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

23008 K20 20A 230V 2NO 1/12/120 

23007 K20 20A 230V NO+NC 1/12/120 

23009 K20 20A 230V 2NC 1/12/120 

23012 K20 25A 230V NO+NC 1/12/100 

23013 K20 25A 230V 2NO 1/12/100 

23014 K20 25A 230V 2NC 1/10/100 

23015 K20 40A 230V NO+NC 1/6/60 

23016 K20 40A 230V 2NO 1/6/60 

23017 K20 40A 230V 2NC 1/6/60 

23080 K20 100A 230V 2NO 1/4/40 

23083 K20 100A 230V 1NO+1NC 1/4/40 

23084 K20 100A 230V 2NC 1/4/40 

82 

ELMARK 


MODULE CONTACTORS K SERIES 


C D1 D2 H3 H4 E F 

5 66 48 45 20 35 85 

Catalogue 

number 

Type In Coil 

voltage (V) 

Contacts 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

23410 K40 25A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/6/60 

23411 K40 25A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/6/60 

23412 K40 25A 230V 4NO 1/6/60 

23413 K40 25A 230V 4NC 1/6/60 

23422 K40 40A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/4/40 

23423 K40 40A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/4/40 

23409 K40 40A 230V 4NO 1/4/40 

23424 K40 40A 230V 4NC 1/4/40 

23425 K40 63A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/4/40 

23426 K40 63A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/4/40 

23427 K40 63A 230V 4NO 1/4/40 

23428 K40 63A 230V 4NC 1/4/40 

23480 K40 80A 230V 4NO 1/2/20 

23483 K40 80A 230V 2NO+2NC 1/2/20 

23484 K40 80A 230V 4NC 1/2/20 

23485 K40 80A 230V 3NO+1NC 1/2/20 

AUTOMATION | MODULE CONTACTORS 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

83

AUTOMATION | THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 




EN 60947-4-1 

The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are three pole relays designed for protection of induction 

motors from overload or overheat. They are mounted to contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an operating 

circuit for motor control is passed through their NC contacts. They have bimetallic releases 

/1 per phase/ through them the motors current flows and indirectly mated. The bimetallic releases 

bend subject to the influence of mating and this results in tripping of the relay. The contacts 

change switch position. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual 

temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness 

and prolongs the term of exploitation. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching off alternating current consumers 

at current overload. 

• Making of control systems for consumers. 

• Used as a protective operating element in 

control panels of induction motors. 



CONNECTING 

• Flexible or rigid conductors with or without 

cable terminal for joining to the consumer. 

• To the contactor through the relay terminals. 

• The connecting terminals with the consumer 

can be adjusted according to the type of the 

contactor. 

MOUNTING 

• Mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of 

the contactor as it is additionally clamped to its 

frame through a pin. 

• Mounting position: vertical gradientmax. ± 5° 

Note: To protect the consumer from short 

circuit, before the combination contactor- thermal 

relay, a suitably measured breaker or safety 

device should be mounted. 


• Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 

50/60 Hz 

• Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC 

• Insulation voltage: >690V 

• Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V 


• Temperature compensation: -25 +55 

• Tripping category: class 10A 

• Electrical wear resistance (number of. 

cycles):≥1000000 


cycles):≥10000000 

• Indication for protection activating 

• Possibility for choice of the protection restoring 

(through the blue button) 

• Possibility for range adjustment of the 

protection activating 

• Possibility for operation at higher frequency 






Type a b c m x y v z 

LT 2 - E13xx 86 55 10.7 108 47 92 44 17 

LT 2 - Kxx 81 50 0 98 47 92 44 17 

LT 2 - E23xx 86 55 9 109 47 92 44 17 

LT 2 - E33xx 115 76 9.5 124 54 109 70 30 

LT 2 - E13xx 

Catalogue 

number 

For contactor 

LT1-D9 to 

LT1-D25 type 

220V 

230V 

Motor capacity (kW) 

380V 

400V 

660V 

690V 

Rated 

current (A) 

Protection Packing/Box 

adjustment (pcs) 

range 

13001 LT2-E1301 - - - 0.16 0.10 - 0.16 1 / 100 

13002 LT2-E1302 - - - 0.25 0.16 - 0.25 1 / 100 

13003 LT2-E1303 - - - 0.40 0.25 - 0.40 1 / 100 

13004 LT2-E1304 - - 0.37 0.63 0.40 - 0.63 1 / 100 

13005 LT2-E1305 - - 0.55 1.00 0.63 - 1.00 1 / 100 

13006 LT2-E1306 - 0.37 1.10 1.60 1.0 - 1.60 1 / 100 

13007 LT2-E1307 0.37 0.75 1.50 2.50 1.6 - 2.50 1 / 100 

13008 LT2-E1308 0.75 1.50 3.00 4.00 2.5 - 4.00 1 / 100 

13010 LT2-E1310 1.10 2.20 4.00 6.00 4.0 - 6.00 1 / 100 

13012 LT2-E1312 2.00 3.70 5.50 8.00 5.5 - 8.00 1 / 100 

13014 LT2-E1314 2.20 4.00 7.50 10.0 7.0 - 10.0 1 / 100 

13016 LT2-E1316 3.70 5.50 11.0 13.0 9.0 - 13.0 1 / 100 

13021 LT2-E1321 4.00 7.50 15.0 18.0 12.0 - 18.0 1 / 100 

13022 LT2-E1322 5.50 9.00 18.5 25.0 17.0 - 25.0 1 / 100 

13053 LT2-E1353 9.00 11.0 18.5 33.0 23.0 - 32.0 1 / 100 

84 

ELMARK 


LT 2 - Kxx 

LT 2 - E23xx 

Catalogue 

number 

For contactor 

LT1-K06 type 

220V 

230V 


380V 

400V 

660V 

690V 

Rated 

current (A) 

Protection 

adjustment 

range 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

13403 LT2-K0303 - - - 0.30 0.25 - 0.30 1/100 

13406 LT2-K0306 - 0.37 1.10 1.20 1.00-1.60 1/100 

13407 LT2-K0307 0.37 0.75 1.50 1.80 1.60-2.50 1/100 

13408 LT2-K0308 0.75 1.10 2.20 2.60 2.50-4.00 1/100 

13411 LT2-K0312 1.10 2.20 4.00 5.50 3.70 - 5.50 1/100 

13412 LT2-K0314 2.20 4.00 5.50 8.00 5.50 - 8.00 1/100 

13413 LT2-K0316 3.00 5.00 7.50 11.5 8.00 - 11.5 1/100 

Catalogue 

number 

For contactor 

LT1-D32 type 

220V 

230V 


380V 

400V 

660V 

690V 

Rated 

current (A) 

Protection 

adjustment 

range 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

13253 LT2-E2353 11 11 18.5 32 23.0 - 32.0 1 / 100 

13255 LT2-E2355 15 15 22.0 36 28.0 - 36.0 1 / 100 


Catalogue 

number 

For contactor 

LT1-D40 to 

LT1-D95 type 

220V 

230V 


380V 

400V 

660V 

690V 

Rated 

current (A) 

Protection 

adjustment 

range 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

13355 LT2-E3355 18.5 18.5 30 40 30.0 - 40.0 1 / 50 

13357 LT2-E3357 22 22 30 50 37.0 - 50.0 1 / 50 

13359 LT2-E3359 30 30 37 65 48.0 - 65.0 1 / 50 

13363 LT2-E3363 45 45 55 80 63.0 - 80.0 1 / 50 

13365 LT2-E3365 55 55 75 93 80.0 - 93.0 1 / 50 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



LT 2 - E33xx 

Catalogue 

number 

For contactor 

LT1-F115 to 

LT1-F150 

220V 

230V 


380V 

400V 

660V 

690V 

Rated 

current (A) 

Protection 

adjustment 

range 

13367 LT2-F4367 40 75 100 150 90-150 1/30 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

Catalogue 

number 

For contactor 

LT1-F225 to 

LT1-F400 

220V 

230V 


380V 

400V 

660V 

690V 

Rated Protection 

current (A) adjustment 

range 

13368 LT2-F4368 63 110 129 220 132-220 1/30 

13369 LT2-F4369 100 160 220 330 200-330 1/18 

13370 LT2-F4370 147 250 335 500 300-500 1/18 

For contactor LT1-F630 

13371 LT2-F4371 200 335 450 630 380-630 1/18 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

85

AUTOMATION | THERMO MAGNETIC BREAKERS 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



THERMO MAGNETIC AUTOMATIC DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC BREAKERS TM2/TM3 TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF 

Auxiliary 

contact 

Dimensions 

UVR 

The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx series are devices designed for control 

and protection of induction motors from overload, overheat or short circuit. The overload 

motor protection is carried out by the built in the breaker thermal elements, and the short 

circuit protection is carried out by the magnetic elements. These magnetic elements allow 

the adjustment of the current leakage which is 13 times the maximum current of the thermal 

protection. The overload protection elements include automatic compensation for the ambient 

temperature changes. In combination with under voltage release the thermomagnetic breaker TM 

2-Exx also provides protection of the motors from fall out of a phase from the power supply. The 

choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and 

guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of 

exploitation. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching off alternating current consumers 

at current overload 

• Switching off the electrical circuit to the consumer 

at inlet short circuit 

• Protects the motor at lack/lowering of the 

phase voltage (if there is under voltage release) 


control panels of induction motors 



• Possibility for change/choice of the protection 

current (according to the operating current of 

the motor) 

• Automatic compensation of the ambient 

temperature 

CONNECTING 


cable terminal for joining to the consumer 

• To the contactor through the relay terminals 

• The connecting terminals with the consumer 

can be adjusted according to the type of the 

contactor 

MOUNTING 

• Mounting to DIN-rail 

• Mounting position: vertical gradientmax.± 5° 


• Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 

50/60 Hz 

• Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to 

80A according to the type in table 1 





≥1000000 


cycles): 

≥10000000 

• Indication for protection activating 

• Switching on of the breaker manually with 

button “I” and switching off with button “O” 

manually or automatically at failure or after 

activating of the protection 

• Possibility for range adjustment of the protection 

activating 


• Possibility for independent operation or as an 

element of an automation system 

• Tripping category: class 10A 






H l1 l2 d D w1 w2 h1 h2 

89 16 50 10 9.2 44.5 18 22 45 

86 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated capacity of three-phase motor 

in AC-3 category 

220V 

230V 

400V 

410V 

440V 500V 690V 

Instantaneous 

short-circuit 

release (A) 

Current 

setting 

range (A) 

Thermal 

current 

Ithe 

TM2-E 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

48001 TM2-E01 - - - - - 1.5 0.1 - 0.16 0.16 1 / 50 

48002 TM2-E02 - 0.06 0.06 - - 2.4 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 1 / 50 

48003 TM2-E03 0.06 0.09 0.09 - - 5.0 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 1 / 50 

48004 TM2-E04 - 0.12 0.18 - 0.37 8.0 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 1 / 50 

48005 TM2-E05 0.09 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 13.0 0.63 - 1.00 1 1 / 50 

48006 TM2-E06 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 22.5 1 - 1.60 1.6 1 / 50 

48007 TM2-E07 0.37 0.75 0.75 1.10 1.50 33.5 1.6 - 2.50 2.5 1 / 50 

48008 TM2-E08 0.55 1.10 1.50 1.50 2.20 51.0 2.5 - 4.00 4 1 / 50 

48010 TM2-E10 1.10 2.20 2.20 3.00 4.00 78.0 4 - 6.30 6.3 1 / 50 

48014 TM2-E14 1.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 138 6 - 10.0 9 1 / 50 

48016 TM2-E16 2.20 5.50 5.50 7.50 9.00 170 9 - 14.0 13 1 / 50 

48020 TM2-E20 4.00 7.50 7.50 9.00 15.0 223 13 - 18.0 17 1 / 50 

48021 TM2-E21 5.50 9.00 11.0 11.0 18.5 327 17 - 23.0 21 1 / 50 

48022 TM2-E22 5.50 11.0 11.0 15.0 22.0 327 20 - 25.0 23 1 / 50 

48032 TM2-E32 7.50 15.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 416 24 - 32.0 24 1 / 50 

48040 TM3-E40 11.0 18.5 22.0 25.0 33.0 480 25 - 40.0 32 1 / 15 

48063 TM3-E63 15.0 30.0 33.0 40.0 55.0 550 40 - 63.0 50 1 / 15 

48080 TM3-E80 22.0 40.0 45.0 55.0 63.0 665.5 56 - 80.0 64 1 / 15 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

87

AUTOMATION | AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR TM2 

ACCESSORIES FOR TM2 




EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1 

VOLTAGE RELEASE (VR) FOR TM2 

For increasing the effectiveness of the thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they can 

be supplied with auxiliary devices, designed for widening the practice range and improving the 

technical characteristics of the breakers. The release is designed to switch off the thermomagnetic 

breaker when the controlling voltage falls under breaking level 0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not allow 

switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is over 0.85 Un. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching off the breaker at power supply 

voltage fall under 0.55 – 0.7 Un 

• does not allow switching on of the breaker 

when the power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un 

• Prevents unwarranted secondary start of the 

breaker at falling off and restoring of the power 

supply voltage 

MOUNTING 

• Laterally to a breaker 

• At the side of the breaker through special 

openings 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

48099 TМ2 AU225 230 

48098 TМ3 AU385 400 

Voltage (V) 

• Protects the motor at lack/lowering of the 

phase voltage 


control panels of induction motors 



YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 





Standard EN 60529 

EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1 

WATERTIGHT BOX FOR TM2-E 

Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for increasing the IP code from dust and 

moisture to IP 65. Designed for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers of up to 32A 

MOUNTING 

• Mounting position: vertical gradient, 

maximum± 5° 

• Mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with 

bolts 

• The breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on 

rail material 

Plastic wear resistance of UV rays and non 

flammable (self-extinguishing material) 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

8083 TМ2 Е 

88 

ELMARK 


AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TM2 AE11- FRONT MOUNTING 

It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC 

contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched 

on/ off) to which it is mounted. 






Catalogue 

number 

Type 

48912 TМ2 AE11 

MOUNTING 

• Laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx 

21 22 

13 14 

AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK TM2 AE11- SIDE MOUNTING 

It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC 

contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched 

on/ off) to which it is mounted. 






Catalogue 

number 

Type 

48911 TМ2 AN11 

48913 TМ3 AN11 

MOUNTING 

• Laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx 

AUTOMATION | AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR TM2 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

89

STARTERS FOR DIRECT START DS1 MAX-ELECTRONIC TYPE WITH MOUNTED MX+OF 

AUTOMATION | STARTERS 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 







With thermal overload relays 

The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control 

and protection of induction motors or other electrical consumers. They are a combination of 

contactors LT 1 Dxx series and thermal protection LT 2 Exx factory cabled. The starters are offered 

on the market in metal or plastic boxes with the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture. 

At mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through 

breakers or disconnectors. If necessary, at client’s order the factory mounted thermal protection 

in the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s 

operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, 

increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on/off alternating current consumers 

• Does not allow secondary unwarranted 

switching on of the starter at transitory lowering 

of the voltage 

• Protects the motor from overload in the range 

of the corresponding thermal protection 



CONNECTING 


cable terminal for joining to the consumer and 

section according to the motor power 

• Two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orifices 

for the cables 

MOUNTING 

• Mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/ 

screws 

• Mounting position: vertical gradient, max.± 5° 


• Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 

230/400V AC; 50/60 Hz 

• Rated operating voltage: 690V 

• Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 

A AC 

• insulation voltage: 690V 



• Little power consumption and small dimensions 

• Possibility for range adjustment of the protection 

activating 





• Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating 



Note: In case you need different controlling 

coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our 

regional representatives. 

90 

ELMARK 


120 

140 

166 

2 x PE13 2 x 5.5 

2xPE13 

88 

150 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated capacity of motors 

50/60Hz AC-3 category 

220V 

230V 

380V 

400V 

415V 

440V 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Thermal 

relay 

adjustment 

range 

Coil 

voltage 

(V) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

43091 LT5 D093 2.2 4.0 4.0 9 7 .. 10A 230 1/16 

43092 LT5 D093 2.2 4.0 4.0 9 7 .. 10A 400 1/16 

43121 LT5 D123 3.0 5.5 5.5 12 9 .. 13A 230 1/16 

43122 LT5 D123 3.0 5.5 5.5 12 9 .. 13A 400 1/16 

43181 LT5 D185 4.0 7.5 9.0 18 12 .. 18A 230 1/16 

43182 LT5 D185 4.0 7.5 9.0 18 12 .. 18A 400 1/16 

Note: Upon request the thermal relay will be replaced 


2 x 5.5 

PE13 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 



220V 

230V 

380V 

400V 

415V 

440V 


Rated 

current 

(A) 

Thermal 

relay 

adjustment 

range 

Coil Packing/ 

voltage (V) Box (pcs) 

43251 LT5 D255 5.5 11 11 25 17 .. 25A 230 1/16 

43252 LT5 D255 5.5 11 11 25 17 .. 25A 400 1/16 

43321 LT5 D325 7.5 15 15 32 23 .. 32A 230 1/16 

43322 LT5 D325 7.5 15 15 32 23 .. 32A 400 1/16 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



185 

165 

16 

135 

142 

2xPE16 

101 

4x 7.7 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 



220V 

230V 

380V 

400V 

415V 

440V 


Rated 

current 

(A) 

Thermal 

relay 

adjustment 

range 

Coil Packing/ 

voltage (V) Box (pcs) 

43401 LT5 D405 11.0 18.5 22 40 30 .. 40A 230 1/6 

43402 LT5 D405 11.0 18.5 22 40 30 .. 40A 400 1/6 

43651 LT5 D655 18.5 30.0 37 65 48 .. 65A 230 1/6 

43652 LT5 D655 18.5 30.0 37 65 48 .. 65A 400 1/6 

43951 LT5 D955 25.0 45.0 45 95 80 .. 93A 230 1/6 

43952 LT5 D955 25.0 45.0 45 95 80 .. 93A 400 1/6 

312 

195 

150 

161 

2xPE29 

105 

181 

PE13 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

91


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



”STAR/DELTA” STARTER 






The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control 

and protection of induction motors coiled and operating according to a starter scheme “star/delta”. 

They are a combination of three contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time relay and a set of buttons “start” 

and “stop” factory cabled. They provide the easy motor unwinding giving possibility for setting 

the time for unwinding in “star” as the time for switching between “star” and “delta” is fixed to 0.5 

seconds. The starters are offered on the market in two types: 

• closed type – metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54) 

as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through 

breakers or disconnectors 

• open type – for mounting in distribution boxes as at mounting there should be provided 

protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. 

The starters are offered on the market without mounted thermal protection which is purchased 

separately according to the motor capacity. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s 

operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, 

increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. If necessary, at client’s order the 

power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed. 

FUNCTIONS 

• switching on/off alternating current three 

phase motors operating according to a scheme 

“star - delta” 

• does not allow secondary unwarranted 



• protects the motor from overload in the range 


• indication of the operating condition through 

a valve indicator 

• possibility for mounting of additional contacts 

(for the open type) 



CONNECTING 

• flexible or rigid conductors with or without 



• three by three inlets/outlets supplied with 

orifices for the cables 


• Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V 

AC; 50/60 Hz 


• Rated operating current range: from 7 to 

93A AC 

• insulation voltage: >690V 






• The metal body is covered with corrosionproof 

paint 



MOUNTING 

• mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/ 

screws 

• mounting position: vertical gradient, max.± 5° 

Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional 

representatives. 

92 

ELMARK 


”STAR/DELTA” STARTER WITHOUT BOX 


Type designation (without box) height width depth 

LT3-D25A 135 170 160 

LT3-D32A 135 170 160 

LT3-D40A 150 285 190 

LT3-D65A 150 285 190 

LT3-D95A 150 310 190 

Catalogue 

number 

Type designation 

(without a box) 

220V 

230V 

Rated capacity (kW) 

380V 415V 440V 

400V 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Coil 

voltage 

(V AC) 

43253 LT3-D25A 11 15 15 15 25 400 1/6 

43323 LT3-D32A 15 18.5 18.5 18.5 32 400 1/6 

43403 LT3-D40A 18.5 22 22 22 40 400 1/4 

43653 LT3-D65A 30 55 55 55 65 400 1/4 

43953 LT3-D95A 37 75 75 75 95 400 1/4 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled 

motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard 

operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor. 


”STAR/DELTA” STARTER WITH BOX 


Type designation (with box) height width depth 

LT 3 -B-D25A 370 240 160 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



Catalogue 

number 

Type designation 

(with box) 

220V 

230V 

Rated capacity (kW) 

380V 415V 440V 

400V 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Coil 

voltage 

(V AC) 

43254 LT 3 - B - D25A 11 15 15 15 25 400 1/4 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled 

motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard 

operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor. 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

93


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



REVERSE STARTER 





scheme “Reverse” 


The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices used for direct start, reverse start and 

protection of induction motors with short connected rotor. They are a combination of two 

contactors LT1 Dxx series supplied with two buttons “start” and one “stop” factory cabled. They 

provide the unwinding of the motor in one of the directions with possibility for pushing the 

button “stop” and giving command from the other “start” for changing the motor winding 

direction. The two contactors are mechanically blocked and do not allow simultaneous start 

in both winding directions. The starters are offered – closed type in metal boxes providing the 

corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP54) as at mounting there should be provided 

protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. The starters are 

offered with mounted thermal protection which can be substituted according to the motor power. 

The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions 

and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term 

of exploitation. If necessary, at order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter 

can be changed. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Switching on alternating current three phase 

motors in one winding direction, switching off 

and change of the winding direction at giving 

a signal 

• Does not allow secondary unwarranted 



• Protects the motor from overload in the range 



characteristics through a valve indicator 

• Possibility for mounting of additional contacts 




CONNECTING 




• Three by three inlets/outlets supplied with 

orifices for the cables 


• Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 

400V AC; 

50/60 Hz• Rated operating voltage: 690V 


• Rated operating current range: 

from 7 to 93 A AC 






• IP 44 

• The metal body is covered with corrosionproof 

paint 



MOUNTING 

• Mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/ 

screws 

• Mounting position: vertical gradient, max.± 5° 

Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional 

representatives. 

with thermal overload relays 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

designation 

(with a box) 

Rated capacity (kW) Overall dimensions Rated Coil 

(mm) current voltage 

380V 415V 440V height width depth (A) (V AC) 

400V 

220V 

230V 

43001 LT 4 - B - D25A 11.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 240 240 160 25 400 1/8 

43003 LT 4 - B - D40A 18.5 22.0 22.0 22.0 270 265 160 40 400 1/2 

43005 LT 4 - B - D95A 37.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 270 265 160 95 400 1/4 

43006 LT 4 - B - D25A 11.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 240 240 160 25 230 1/4 

43007 LT 4 - B - D32A 15.0 18.5 18.5 18.5 240 240 160 32 230 1/4 

43008 LT 4 - B - D40A 18.5 22.0 22.0 22.0 270 265 160 40 230 1/4 

43009 LT 4 - B - D65A 30.0 55.0 55.0 55.0 270 265 160 65 230 1/4 

43010 LT 4 - B - D95A 37.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 270 265 160 95 230 1/4 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

94 

ELMARK 


ELM 2000+ FREQUENCY INVERTERS 




EN61800-5-1 

High-tech motor control concept, based on advanced DSP-technology - ready for V/Hz, 

SENSORLESS VECTOR, CLV and PMM motor control - intelligent AUTOTUNING functions for easy 

setup. 

Flexible inverter control, dual high resolution analogue inputs, free mappable digital I/O channels. 

Ready for all commonly used fieldbus systems. 

Universal function-set for all kind of industrial and residential applications, including integrated 

PID/pump controller routines. 

Smart PC-tools, for inverter control, parametrization and troubleshooting. Parameter-duplication 

stick. 

Brake chopper integrated. 


• Power range: 

‣ 0,4……400 kW 

• Power input: 

‣ Rated input voltage- 1-Phase 

220V~240V~±15%); 3-Phase 380V-460V (+/- 

)15% 

‣ Input frequency- 44….67 Hz 

• Motor output: 

‣ Output frequency- 0-650 Hz 

‣ Frequency resolution- 0,01 Hz 

‣ Overload capability- 150% - 60 sec. / 10 

min 

• Control mode: 

‣ Motor control algorithm- V/Hz-SpaceVector, 

SLVSENSORLESS VECTOR,Torque/Speed 

control 

‣ mode CLV-Closed loop vector,Permanent 

Magnet Synchronous Motor 

‣ Chopper frequency- 0.8…16 kHz (fixed / 

random) 

‣ V/Hz curve- Linear, exponential, and userprogrammable 

curve 

‣ Starting torque- 150% rated torque at 0,5 

Hz (in SLV Mode) 

‣ Torque compensation- Automatic / Manual 

‣ Motor data input- Manual, from nameplate 

/ AUTOTUNING 

‣ Control range- 1:100 in SLV mode,1:1000 in 

CLV mode,1:20 in PMSM mode 

‣ Speed precision +/- 0,5% (SLV),+/- 0.02% 

(CLV) 

‣ Torque precision +/- 5% (SLV) 

‣ DC-Brake- User programmable functions 

‣ Brake chopper- Chopper transistor integrated 

(up to 90 kW) 

• Display: 

‣ 7 segment, 4 characters 

‣ Config-Parameters and -value, programmable 

to display various working parameters 

• I/O Channels and control functions: 

‣ Inverter control- Via terminals / Keypad / 

Serial link (or combination of all) 

‣ Digital inputs- 6 (8) Dig. inputs 

(NPN-PNPselectable) pulstrain-input 

‣ Speed reference input- Potentiometer 

(on keypad unit, external), analogue signal 

(terminals), 

‣ keypad, internal programmable value, 

pulsetrain, serial link 

‣ Analogue channels- analogue channels - 

12 BIT: 0…10V, 0...5V, -10V...0...10V, 0..(4)20 mA, 

‣ all free scalable in gain and offset, andmathematically 

concatenable 

‣ Analogue outputs- 2 analogue outputs, 

programmable in gain and function (0…10V, 

0(4)..20 mA) 

‣ Digital outputs- 2 digital outputs (free 

mapping to different functions) 

‣ Relais output- 1 switchover contact 3A 

250VAC/30VDC (programmable assignment) 

‣ Data link- Serial link RS 485 (MODBUS) 

‣ Special functions- 24V / 50 mA auxiliary 

power supply on terminals, 10V potentiometer 

power 

‣ supply, 5V/100 mA power supply on 

modbus connector Simple PTC / KLIXON motor 

protection 

• Protection: 

‣ Electrical- Overvoltage, undervoltage 

‣ Overcurrent, overload, motor-overload, 

output short-circuit 

‣ Thermal- Heatsink overtemperature, I²xt 

motorprotection 

• Operating conditions: 

‣ Protection class IP20 

‣ Working temperature -10+50 °C 

‣ Humidity- 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing, 

noncorrosive 

‣ Altitude- 1000 m, above 1% derating / 

100m 

‣ Vibration- Max. 0,5 g 

AUTOMATION | FREQUENCY INVERTERS 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Type of sign 

ELМ2000+ 0015 T3 

power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase 

motor power 

inverter model 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

95


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Scan and watch 

detailed video 

with all product 

functions. 

FREQUENCY INVERTERS ELM 2000 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Input 

voltage (V) 

Maximum 

output 

power (kW) 

Maximum 

current 

output (A) 

Dimensions 

WxDxH 

(mm) 

Weights 

(kg) 

423400P E2000-0004 S2B 230 0.4 2.5A 80x140x135 1.40 

423401P E2000-0007 S2B 230 0.7 4.5A 80x140x135 1.50 

423402P E2000-0015 S2B 230 1.5 7A 106x180x150 2.00 

423403P E2000-0022 S2B 230 2.2 10A 106x180x150 2.10 

423404P E2000-0007 T3 400 0.7 2A 106x180x150 2.00 

423405P E2000-0015 T3 400 1.5 4.6A 106x180x150 2.10 

423406P E2000-0022 T3 400 2.2 6.5A 106x180x170 2.20 

423407P E2000-0030 T3 400 3.0 7A 138x235x152 2.50 

423408P E2000-0040 T3 400 4.0 9A 138x235x152 3.00 

423409P E2000-0055 T3 400 5.5 12A 156x265x170 3.50 

423410P E2000-0075 T3 400 7.5 17A 156x265x170 4.50 

423411P E2000-0110 T3 400 11.0 23A 205x340x196 4.80 

423412P E2000-0150 T3 400 15.0 32A 205x340x196 8.00 

423413P E2000-0185 T3 400 18.5 38A 205x340x196 8.50 

423414P E2000-0220 T3 400 22.0 44A 270x435x235 9.00 

423415P E2000-0300 T3 400 30.0 60A 315x480x235 22.50 

423416P E2000-0370 T3 400 37.0 75A 315x480x235 24.00 

423417P E2000-0450 T3 400 45.0 90A 360x555x265 24.50 

423418P E2000-0550 T3 400 55.0 110A 360x555x265 41.50 

423419P E2000-0750 T3 400 75.0 150A 410x650x300 42.00 

423420P E2000-0900 T3 400 90.0 180A 410x650x300 56.00 

423421P E2000-1100 T3 400 110.0 220A 516x765x326 56.50 

423422P E2000-1320 T3 400 132.0 265A 560x910x342 87.00 

423423P E2000-1600 T3 400 160.0 320A 560x910x342 123.00 

423424P E2000-1800 T3 400 180.0 360A 400x1310x385 124.00 

423425P E2000-2000 T3 400 200.0 400A 535x1340x380 125.00 

423426P E2000-2200 T3 400 220.0 440A 535x1340x380 185.00 

423427P E2000-2500 T3 400 250.0 480A 600x1465x380 186.00 

423428P E2000-2800 T3 400 280.0 530A 600x1465x380 225.00 

423429P E2000-3150 T3 400 315.0 580A 600x1465x380 230.00 

423430P E2000-3550 T3 400 355.0 640A 600x1600x388 233.00 

423431P E2000-4000 T3 400 400.0 690A 600x1600x388 234.00 

ACCESSORIES FOR FREQUENCY INVERTERS ELM2000 & ELM600 

LCD REMOTE FRAME SIZE 

KEYPAD FOR CABINET IP66 

423432P 

CABLE FOR REMOTE KEYPAD 

IP66 - 1.5meter 

423433P 

PARAMETER 

COPY STICK 

423434P 

96 

ELMARK 





functions. 

FREQUENCY INVERTERS ELM 600, SERIES 

FEATURES 

• Best performance/cost ratio, without compromise in reliability and quality. 

• Compact design, easy to integrate in your environment: DIN rail mounting, contactor-style I/O. 

• Easy to setup: Simple set of optimized parameters for all basic functions and applications. 

• PID and HVAC functions - safety integrated - MODBUS - open for networking. 

• Internal EMC filter as standard. 

• Economical mass production on high automated and dedicated SMT lines. 

• General purpose drive - made for the worldwide market. 


• Power range: 

‣ Single phase: from 0.75 to 2.2kW 

‣ Three phase: from 1.5 to 5.5kW 

• Rated voltage: 

‣ Single phase: 200…240V +/- 15% 

‣ Three phase: 3-phase 380…460V +/- 15% 

• Input frequency: 47 - 57Hz 

• EMC filter: Integrated (for 2.environment) 

• Output voltage: 0 - V input 

• Output frequency: 0.5 - 650Hz 

• Resolution of output frequency: 0.01 Hz 

• Overload capability: 150% - 60 sec. / 10 Min 

• PWM control-modes: V/Hz - Mode 

• PWM frequency: 0.8 - 6kHz 

• V/Hz characteristic: Linear, quadratic, and 

user-programmable curve 

• Starting torque: 100% rated torque at 1 Hz 

• DC-Brake: Freq. threshold, duration and 

intensity programmable – DC injection 

• Brake chopper: Integrated chopper transistor 

• LED display: 7 Segment, 4- digit for programming 

and visualization of different operating 

parameters 

• Inverter control - Start/Stop: To configure: 

terminals / operation panel / serial link 

• Digital control inputs: 4 digital inputs (HIGH/ 

LOW configurable) 

• Speed reference signal: Potentiometer, 

analogue input (terminals 0-10V, (0)4-20 mA), 

operating panel keys, serial link 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Input 

voltage (V) 

• Reference analogue channels: 1 Analogue 

channels 0-10V, (0)4-20 mA 

• Analogue outputs: 1 analogue output channel 

programmable in gain, different functions 

to assign (0-10V) 

• Digitale outputs: 1 digital output (OC, different 

functions to assign) 

• Relays output: 1 switchover contact 3 A 230 V 

(programmable for different functions) 

• Interface: Serial link (MODBUS – ASCI/RTU) 

• Special function - control options: Jog 

mode, 12V / 50 mA auxiliary power supply on 

terminals PI-control Fixed frequency control, 

programmable cycling frequency sequence 

AUTORESET/RESTART function 

• Electrical protection functions: Overvoltage, 

Undervoltage Overcurrent, Overload, Motor-Overload, 

Output-short Analogue reference 

interruption 

• Thermal protection functions: Heatsink 

overtemperature 


• Operating temperature: from -10 to +40°C 

• Humidity: Max. 90 % not condensing, no 

corrosion 

• Elavation: 1000 m - 1% derating / 100m above 

Maximum 

output 

power (kW) 

Maximum 

current 

output (A) 

Dimensions 

WxDxH 

(mm) 

Weights 

(kg) 

423440 ЕLM600- 0.75kW 1P/230V 230 0.75 4.5 88х140.5х149 0.48 

423441 ЕLM600- 1.5kW 1P/230V 230 1.5 7 88х140.5х149 0.49 

423442 ЕLM600- 2.2kW 1P/230V 230 2.2 10 106х161х170 0.75 

423443 ЕLM600- 1.5kW 3P/400V 400 1.5 4 106х161х170 1.2 

423444 ЕLM600- 2.2kW 3P/400V 400 2.2 6.5 106х161х170 1.3 

423445 ЕLM600- 3.0kW 3P/400V 400 3.0 7.6 106х161х170 1.3 

423446 ЕLM600- 4.0kW 3P/400V 400 4.0 9 106х161х170 1.45 

423447 ЕLM600- 5.5kW 3P/400V 400 5.5 12 106х161х170 1.45 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

97

AUTOMATION | SOFT STARTERS 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

SOFT STARTERS ELM 2500 


product: 

Standard EN60947-4-2 


Soft starters are designed to control the start of three-phase induction motors with short-circuited 

rotor. A number of motor control issues are avoided through them, and namely: prolonged start 

moments, auto-ignition of motor, there is no need of star-delta switching, auto-transformer 

switching, resistant switching, etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains to the AC53b type of starters 

as per the standard requirements and it provides rotation of motor and once the operation mode 

is set, a shunt contactor of the LT 1 D/F series is switched to control motor operation as the soft 

starter is not designed to control motors in a set mode. Under a stop command in accordance 

with the selected control scheme, the soft starter can or can not be included in shutting the motor 

down. 

FUNCTIONS 

• System functions: 

‣ Over-voltage protection – motor will switch 

off when power supply exceeds the preset 

limits. 

‣ Overload protection – protects the motor 

from overloading. 

‣ Phase loss protection. 

‣ Temperature overload protection. 

• Control functions: 

‣ Output faults. 

‣ Motor faults diagnostics. 

‣ Keyboard or outward control. 

‣ Delayed start option. 

‣ Faults memory. 


• Rated working voltage: 230/400V AC; 50 Hz 

• Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10% 

• Unbalance of phases: < 3% 

• Frequency fluctuation: < 5% 

• Obligatory bypass contactor installation. 

MOUNTING 

• Mounting to a flat surface through bolts. 

• Mounting position – vertical gradient 

maximum ± 5°. 

NOTE 

When more than one soft starter is mounted in 

a board, it is recommendable to mount them 

side by side and when this is not possible, 

the appropriate cooling conditions should be 

provided. 

• Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant 


• Altitude : up to 2000 m 


Type A B C E F d 

EL M25015 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6 

EL M25022 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6 

EL M25037 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6 

EL M25045 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6 

EL M25055 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6 

EL M25075 510 260 194 389 232 Ø8 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Power of 

motor (kW) 

Rated 

current (A) 

Type of 

bypass 

contactor 

Section 

of power 

supply conductors 

42225015 EL M25015 15 30 LT 1-D 50 10 1/1 

42225022 EL M25022 22 45 LT 1-D 50 10 1/1 

42225037 EL M25037 37 76 LT 1-D 80 16 1/1 

42225045 EL M25045 45 90 LT 1-D 95 25 1/1 

42225055 EL M25055 55 110 LT 1-F 115 25 1/1 

42225075 EL M25075 75 150 LT 1-F 150 35 1/1 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

98 

ELMARK 


TIMERS AND RELAYS 

QUARZ TIME SWITCH WITH POWER RESERVE TM 180 MINI 

The mechanic relay for time is supposed to be used for managing chains with maximum capacity 

of 3500W.After the setting ,the timer executes the functions we required in 24 hours regime. The 

minimum period for setting is 15 minutes as it is executed within 96 pcs segments which the 

timing of the work and rest of the consumer is being set. The timer is accomplished with a battery 

which assures the work by 70 hours after power failure. 


• Rated voltage: 230-240V AC 50/60Hz 

• Time range: 24 hours 

• Min. programmable interval: 15 minutes 

• Time adjustment: manual 

• Battery power reserve: 70 hours 

• Time deviation: ± 1s (at 20°C) 

• Consumption: 2.5VA 

• Contact: 1NO 

MOUNTING 

• DIN-rail 

Catalogue 

number 

• Contact capacity: 

• 16A/250V (COSФ=1) 

• 4A/250V (COSФ=0.6) 

• Electrical endurance: 10⁵ times 

• Mechanical endurance: 10⁷ times 

• Section of the conductor: rigid conductors up 

to 6mm² 

Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

H L D 

50137 TМ 180 90 18 60 1 / 200 

AUTOMATION | TIME RELAYS 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

QUARZ TIME SWITCH WITH POWER RESERVE TM 180 

The mechanic relay for time is supposed to be used for managing chains with maximum capacity 

of 3500W.After the setting ,the timer executes the functions we required in 24 hours regime. The 

minimum period for setting is 30 minutes as it is executed within 48 pcs segments which the 

timing of the work and rest of the consumer is being set. The timer is accomplished with a battery 

which assures the work by 150 hours after power failure. 


• Rated voltage: 110-240V AC 50/60Hz 

• Time range: 24 hours 

• Min. programmable interval: 30 minutes 

• Time adjustment: manual 

• Battery power reserve: 150 hours 

• Time deviation: ± 1s (at 20°C) 

• Consumption: 2.5VA 

• Contact: 1NO 

MOUNTING 

• DIN-rail 

Catalogue 

number 

• Contact capacity: 16A 

• Electrical endurance: 10⁵ times 

• Mechanical endurance: 10⁷ times 

• Section of the conductor: rigid conductors up 

to 6mm² 


(pcs) 

H L D 

50138 TМ 181 90 53.5 65.5 1/100 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

99

AUTOMATION | PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS 

24 HOURS PLUG-IN MECHANICAL TIMER 

Mechanical German type plug-in timer with 

children protector. Two position switch for 

permanent and time control. 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

L W H 

50140 EL-PMT-1 82 84 56 1/24/48 

PROGRAMMABLE WEEKLY TIMER 

The product according to the time set by the 

user, automatically turn On/Off the variety of 

electrical equipment. 

Included LI-ion battery 

MOUNTING 



• Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz 

• Min. setting time: 15 min 

• Max. setting time: 24 hours 

• Active load: up to 16A 

• IP20 

YEARS TOTAL 

2WARRANTY 

+ 

2 standard 

0 extended 


• Power supply voltage: 220-250V; 50/60Hz 

• Adjustment range: 1 min 


• Operations: 17 switching ON/OFF per day, up 

to 119 ON/OFF per week 

• Operating temperature: 0 ÷ +55°C 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) 

L W H 

50139 EL-PWT-1 60 32.5 60 1/200 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

WEEKLY PLUG-IN DIGITAL TIMER 

Digital German type plug-in timer with children 

protector and rechargeable NI-MH battery. 

Two outlets for permanent and time control. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Size (mm) Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

50142 EL-WDT-3 130x75x70 1/24/48 



• Min. setting time: 1 min or 1 sec 

• Max. setting time: 7 days 

• Program per day: 8 or 20 ON/OFF 


• IP20 

WEEKLY PLUG-IN DIGITAL TIMER 

Digital German type plug-in timer with 

countdown function and rechargeable NI-MH 

battery. Two outlets for permanent and time 

control. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Size (mm) Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

50141 EL-WDT-2 68.4x73x77.2 1/24/48 



• Min. setting time: 1 min 

• Max. setting time: 7 days 

• Program per day: 16 ON/OFF 


• IP20 

100 

ELMARK 


SINGLE- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-2A 2C- ON DELAY 

Single function time relays are suitable for applications where there is a clear function requirement 

in advance and are suitable for universal use in automation, control and regulation or in house 

installations. 

ELR-2A is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. Time setting 

is available from front panel. 

APPLICATION 

• Control of electrical appliances 

• Control of lights, heating, motors, pump, fan 

and etc. 


• Voltage range: 24-240V; 50/60Hz 

• Output current: 2x5A 

• Function: 2C-On delay 

• Output type: 2xSPDT 

• Time ranges: 1s-3m 

• Time setting: via 1 potentiometer 

• Time deviation: < ±5% 

• Repeat accuracy: < ±5% 

• Ingress protection: IP20 

• Mechanical life: 1x10⁷ 

• Electrical life (AC1): 1x10⁵ 

• Max. cable size: solid wire max. 2.5 mm2 and 

flexible wire 1.5 mm2 

• Size: 90x18x64 mm 

w 

D 

H 


Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

W H D 

50151 ELR-2A 18 90 64 1/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

101


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

SINGLE- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-2B 1C-ON DELAY & 

1C INSTANTANEOUS 




ELR-2B is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. Time setting 


APPLICATION 



and etc. 



• Output current: 2x5A 

• Function: 1C-On delay and 1C-Instantaneous 


• Time ranges: 3s-10m 

• Time setting: via 1 potentiometer 

• Time deviation:

SINGLE- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-3A 2C-ON DELAY 




ELR-3A is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 12 till 240V AC/DC. Time setting 


APPLICATION 



and etc. 



• Output current: 2x16A (AC1) 

• Function: 2C-On delay 


• Time ranges: 0.1s-240h 

• Time setting: via 2 potentiometers 

• Time deviation: 10% mechanical setting 

• Repeat accuracy: 0.2% set value stability 

• Min. breaking capacity DC: 500mW 

• Reset time: max. 200ms 

• Over voltage category: III 

• Output indication: red LED 







TIME RANGE 

W 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

W H D 

50153 ELR-3A 18 90 64 1/100 

D 

H 


SINGLE- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-3B 2C-OFF DELAY 




ELR-3B is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 12 till 240V AC/DC. Time setting 


APPLICATION 



and etc. 




• Function: 2C-Off delay 



• Time setting: via 2 potentiometers 













TIME RANGE 

W 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Box pcs) 

W H D 

50154 ELR-3B 18 90 64 1/100 

D 

H 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

103


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

MULTI- FUNCTION TIME RELAY, ELR-4 

Multi function time relays are suitable for applications where there is need more additional 

functions requirement and are suitable for universal use in automation, control and regulation or 

in house installations. ELR-4 is easy for operation and has range of input voltage - up 12 to 240V 

AC/DC. This relay increase 10 functions: 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage, 4 functions 

controlled by control input and 1 function of latching relay. 

APPLICATION 

• Control of industrial and home electrical 

appliances 


and etc. 




• Function: 10 


• Time ranges: 0.1s-240h, ON, OFF 

• Function setting: via 3 potentiometers on 

front panel 













TIME RANGE 

W 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Box (pcs) 

W H D 

50155 ELR-4 18 90 64 1/100 

D 

H 


Multi function time relays are suitable for applications where there is need more additional 

functions requirement and are suitable for universal use in automation, control and regulation or 

in house installations. ELR-5 is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V 

AC/DC. This relay have 6 time delay functions. 

APPLICATION 


appliances 


and etc. 



• Output current: 5A 


• Output type: 1C-On delay and 1C- 

Instantaneous 



front panel 

• Time deviation:

ELR-A/ ELR-B 

ASYMMETRIC CYCLER TIMER, ELR-6 

Asymmetric cycle timer can be used for cycle delay control, providing periodic energizing, lighting 

control, regular room ventilation, pumps, heating control for electric circuit and etc.. 

ELR-6 is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. This relay have 

2 time functions- Cycle beginning with pulse and cycle beginning with pause. 

APPLICATION 


appliances. 


and etc. 




• Function: 2 time functions 




front panel 






• Output indication: LED 







Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Box (pcs) 

W H D 

50157 ELR-5 18 90 64 1/100 

INTERMEDIATE RELAYS, ELR-7 SERIES 

Intermediate Relays are used for switching larger load output, strengthen or multiplying contacts 

of the existing device or send signals to the relevant control elements concurrently. 

Relays from ELR-7 series are easy for operation and has different input voltages- from 12V DC, 24V 

AC/DC and 240V AC. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Instead of small contactors. 

• Increase the number of contacts. 

• Increase contact capacity. 

• Switch contact type. 

• Used as a switch. 

• Eliminate interference in the circuit. 


• Voltage range: 24V AC/DC and 230V AC 

• Output current: 16A (AC1) 

• Output type: 1xSPDT and 3xSPDT 

• Supply voltage tolerance: -15% +10% 

• Max. change over time: 40ms 




• Protection degree: IP20 





• Size (HxWxD): 90x18x64 mm 

W 

W 

D 

D 

H 

H 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

ELR-C/ ELR-D 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of contact 

Voltage 

Packing/ 

Box 

(pcs) 

50158 ELR-A 1xSPDT 24V AC/DC 1/100 

50159 ELR-B 1xSPDT 230V AC 1/100 

50160 ELR-C 3xSPDT 24V AC/DC 1/100 

50161 ELR-D 3xSPDT 230V AC 1/100 

ELR-C/ ELR-D 

ELR-A/ ELR-B 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

105


WI-FI SMART CONTROL RELAY WITH BUILD-IN ANTENNA, 

ELR-1W 

ELR-1W is widely used in smart homes and industrial intelligent control. It adopts the most 

popular Wi-Fi 2.4GHz control chip, and cooperates with powerful APP and mainstream voice 

assistants. Realize WLAN local control (even if the network is disconnected, you can also use APP 

local control and remote control, allowing users to fully experience the convenient life brought by 

modern intelligent technology. Using mobile phone APP or voice control device to control ON and 

OFF of the output of this product to realize the purpose of remotely starting or turning off the load 

electrical appliances. 

The product cooperates with the corresponding APP to realize the following functions: 

Support Smart Config for fast networking. 

Support multiple control types: switch, timing start and stop, cycle control, etc. 

EKR8-10SeriesWiFiIntelligentControlRelay 

Support WLAN local control and remote control. 

Access to mainstream voice assistants such as Tmall Genie, DuerOS, Xiao Ai (Xiao Mi), Alexa, Google, 

etc., voice control. 

WiFi 智能控制继电器 


Intranet device sharing and cloud account device sharing function. 

APP supports Android and iOS systems. 


StructureBlockDiagramofIntelligentControlSystem: 

Download Seetime Smart Application. 

Full info for the products, instructions can be found at www.elmarkholding.eu 

StructureBlockDiagramofIntelligentControlSystem: 

Build-in antenna 

Clouds 

WiFiRouter 

Clouds 

WiFi/4G 

WiFiRouter 

WiFi/4G 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

EKR8-1010 

APP 

VoiceControl 

EKR8-1010 

APP 

VoiceControl 

DistributionNetworkBlockDiagramofStandardConfiguration: 

Structure block diagram of Intelligent control system 

DistributionNetworkBlockDiagramofStandardConfiguration: 

Clouds 

3Theproductsendsarequesttotherouter 

Clouds 

toconnecttoit 

WiFiRouter 

3Theproductsendsarequesttotherouter 

toconnecttoit 

WiFiRouter 

1MobilephoneandWiFiconnection 

2SendWi-Finameandpassword 

toproduct APP 

1MobilephoneandWiFiconnection 

2SendWi-Finameandpassword 

toproduct APP 

“SeetimeSmart”APP 

106 

Distribution network block diagram of standard configuration 

“SeetimeSmart”APP 

04 

ELMARK 

Download BUSINESS APP 

04 from www.elmarkholding.eu or for mobile from or

function • Voltage Range: 85-240V AC/DC 

APPsupportsAndroidandiOSsystems 

• Rated Current: 10A 

22 

产品 

EKR8-1011H22 

配合相应 • 的 Standard: APP 可实现 IEEE 以下功 802.11b/g/n 

能 : 

⽀持 SmartConfig 实现快速连⽹ 

b/g/n 

• Working mode: STA/AP/STA+AP 

⽀持多种控制 • 类 Wireless 型 : 开关、 Security 定时启停、循 Support: 环控制等控 WPA/WPA2 

制⽅式 

+AP 

⽀持 WLAN 本 • 地 Encryption 控制和远程控 Type: 制 WEP/TKIP/AES 

接⼊天猫精灵 

• 

、DuerOS、⼩ 

Working Frequency: 

爱同学 (⼩⽶)、Alexa、Google 

2.4GHz-2.5GHz 

等 

主流语⾳助⼿, 语⾳控制 

(2400M-2483.5M) 

局域⽹内设备共享和云端账号设备分享功能 

ES 

• Transmit Power: 

APP⽀持 Android 和 iOS 系统 

‣ 802.11b (CCK): 19+/-1dBm 

Hz(2400M-2483.5M) 

Application 应⽤领域 : 

Homecontrolsystem 

‣ 802.11g 

家居 

(OFDM): 

控制系统 

14+/-1dBm 

K):19+/-1dBm 

Buildingautomation 建筑⾃动化 

rams 接线图 

Un 



WiFiIntelligentControlRelay 


Theproductcooperateswiththecorresponding 

APPLICATION 

APPtorealizethefollowingfunctions: 

• Home control system 

SupportSmartConfigforfastnetworking 

• Building automation 

• Industrial control systems 

cyclecontrol,etc. • Industrial automation 

SupportWLANlocalcontrolandremotecontrol 

• Mechanical and electrical equipment 

Supportmultiplecontroltypes:switch,timingstartandstop, 

AccesstomainstreamvoiceassistantssuchasTmallGenie, 

DuerOS,XiaoAi(XiaoMi),Alexa,Google,etc.,voicecontrol 


Intranetdevicesharingandcloudaccountdevicesharing 

Physical 

Parameter N/A 

物理参数 

ControlMethod 控制⽅式 /WorkingMode⼯作模式 WiFiControl 控制 NoWiFiControl⽆WiFi 连接 

Yes 

APPLocalControl 本地控制 Yes Yes 

ProductWiringDiagram 产品接线图 Dimensions (mm) 

APPRemoteControl 远程控制 Yes N/A 

L 

N 

EKR8-10Series 

Industrialcontrolsystem⼯业控制系统 

DM):14+/-1dBm 

Industrialautomation⼯ 

Catalogue 

业⾃动 

Type 

化 

Dimensions (mm) Packing/Box 

Mechanicalandelectricalequipment number 

机电设备 W H D 

(pcs) 

20@MCS7):13+/-1dBm 

50150 ELR-1W 18 90 65 1/100 

oor:45M,Outdoor:150M(Note:Itdependsontheenvironment.) 

TechnicalData 技术数据 EKR8-1010H22 EKR8-1011H22 

m, 室外 :150m( 注 : 具体因环境⽽定 ) 


Standard 标准 

IEEE802.11b/g/n 

.5W⼩于 0.5W 

detailed video WiFi 

WorkingMode⼯作模式 

STA/AP/STA+AP 

with all product Characteristic 

WiFi 特性 

WirelessSecuritySupport⽆线安全⽀持 WPA/WPA2 

functions. 

perature 常温 

EncryptionType 加密类型 

WEP/TKIP/AES 

WorkingFrequency⼯作频率 

2.4GHz-2.5GHz(2400M-2483.5M) 

n-condensing)( 不凝结 ) 

WiFiRF 

802.11b(CCK):19+/-1dBm 

Parameters 

enna 内置天线 

TransmitPower 发射功率 

802.11g(OFDM):14+/-1dBm 

(Typical 

802.11n(HT20@MCS7):13+/-1dBm 

tenna 外置天线 

Values) 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

WiFi 射频参数 WirelessTransmissionDistance 

GeneralIndoor:45M,Outdoor:150M(Note:Itdependsontheenvironment. 

( 典型值 ) ⽆线传输距离 

⼀般室内 :45m, 室外 :150m( 注 : 具体因环境⽽定 ) 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

l 控制 

NoWiFiControl⽆WiFi StandbyPowerConsumption 连接待机功耗 Lessthan0.5W⼩于 0.5W 

Working Yes 

WorkingTemperature⼯作温度 

-10ºC-60ºC 

Condition StorageTemperature 储存温度 

NormalTemperature 常温 

⼯作 N/A 条件 WorkingHumidity⼯作湿度 5%-95%(Non-condensing)( 不凝结 ) 

AntennaType 天线类型 

RatedCurrent 额定电流 

Alexa/GoogleHome/TmallGenie 天猫精灵 

/DuerOS/XiaoAi(XiaoMi)VoiceplatformSupport 

⼩爱同学 (⼩⽶) 语⾳平台⽀持 

‣ 802.11n(HT20@MCS7): 13+/-1dBm 

• Wireless Transmission Distance: General 

Indoor: 45M, Outdoor: 150M (Note: It depends 

on the environment.) 

• Application: Seetime Smart 

• Standby Power Consumption: Less than 0.5W 

• Working Temperature: -10-60ºC 

• Working Humidity: 5%-95% (Non-condensing) 

• Size WxHxD: 18x90x65 mm 

Built-inAntenna 内置天线 

ExternalAntenna 外置天线 

A1 A2 

SCCPControl 信令连接控制 Yes Yes 

10A 

Yes 

Dimensions 外形尺⼨图 :in 英⼨(mm 毫⽶) WiringDiagrams 接线图 ProductWiringDiagram 产 

N/A 


A1 

R 

A2 

0.6 3 

(16 ) 

1.4 3 

(36.2 ) 

2.6MA X 

(65 ) 

0.1 2 

(3) 

0.6 

(14.2 ) 

0.7 

(18 ) 

Un 

L 

N 

A1 

A2 

15 16 18 

EKR8-1010H22 

EKR8-1011H22 

3.5 

(90 ) 

2.7 

(67.5 ) 

1.8 

(45 ) 

15 16 18 

1.4 

(35 ) 

Product wiring diagram 

0.3 

0.2 

(5) 

0.7 

(16.71 ) 

03 

A1 A2 

R 

15 16 18 

EKR8-1010H22 

EKR8-1011H22 

Wiring diagram 

15 16 18 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

107



Multi function time relays are suitable for applications where there is need more additional functions 

requirement and are suitable for universal use in automation, control and regulation or in 

house installations. 

ELR-8 is easy for operation and has range of input voltage- from 24 till 240V AC/DC. This relay 

increase 6 time delay functions. 

APPLICATION 


appliances 


and etc. 



• Output current: 5A (AC1) 


• Output type: DPDT 


• Time deviation:

PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL ONE-CHANNEL TIMER TE 15A 

The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz mini controller which makes 

it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It can memorize up to eight 

ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. 

Programming starts with selection of the days of the week (you can choose among a whole 

week cycle, workdays cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the week); then the cycle start 

time and end time are set. If you have selected workdays cycle, then the program will start and 

stop at the set times each workday of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, 

other programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue 

setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle 

programming is 1 minute. 


• Display: LCD 


• Operations: 16 switching ON/OFF 

• Minimum setting unit: 1 min 

• Time setting range: 1 min- 168 hours 

• Time deviation:


TIME RELAY “STAR/DELTA” TE 19 

The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable 

materials. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time 

hold at “star/delta” starters and it is used for setting fixed time intervals. Programming is done 

through selection of the time unit (seconds or minutes) and rate (x 0.1 or x1) by the slide switches, 

and then selection of a value from the timer knob (from 0 to 10). Whenever timer circuit receives a 

signal, it executes the set cycle and then stops until a new signal is available. It gives possibility for 

time adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to delta according to the 

consumer’s need. 



• Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to 

600 seconds 

• Repetition accuracy: ±5% from the whole 

scale 

• Adjustment accuracy: ±5% from the whole 

scale 

• Zeroing time:

Required to reduce Required temperature to reduce rise temperature of modular rise devices of modular devices 

re the mechanical Ensure the mechanical 

installed side by installed side. side by side. 

or electrical and/or link electrical link 

Recommended Recommended to separate electronic to separate devices electronic (thermostat, devices (thermostat, 

een impulse between relays impulse and relays and 

programmable programmable clock, etc.) from clock, electromechanical etc.) from electromechanical devices devices 

auxiliaries their auxiliaries 

(relays, contactors). (relays, contactors). 

dules - 1 

1 

mension(mm) 

m) 

18 

18 

86 

4 

5.5 

81 

23.55.5 

86 

4 

71 

67 

49 

81 

23.5 

71 

67 

49 

45 

IMPULSE RELAYS (REMOTE-CONTROL SWITCHES)- 2P & 4P 

Impulse relays, also known as bi-stable relays, Impulse relays are a form of latching relay that 

transfers the contacts with each pulse. 

ELMARK impulse relays are made up of a magnetic latch relay and a solid-state steering circuit that, 

upon application of power, determines which position the relay is in and energizes the opposite 

coil. 

APPLICATION 

• The impulse relays are used to control, by 

means of pushbuttons, lighting circuits 

consisting of: 

• Incandescent lamps, low-voltage halogen 

lamps, etc. (Resistive loads) 

• Fluorescent lamps, discharge lamps, etc. 

(Inductive loads) 

• Closing of the impulse relay pole(s) is 

triggered by an impulse on the coil. 

03 03 


45 

• Rating: 16A 

• Frequency: 50 оr 60Hz 

• Insulation voltage (Ui): 440V AC 

• Pollution degree: 3 

• Rated impulse withstands voltage (Uimp): 6kV 

• Dissipated power (during the impulse): 19VA 

• Illuminated PB control: Max. current 3mA 

(if>use an ATLz) 

• Operating threshold: Min.85% of Un in 

conformance with IEC/EN60669-2-2 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of poles 

Contact 

type 

• Having two stable mechanical positions, the 

pole(s) will be opened by the next impulse. 

Each impulse received by the coil reverses the 

position of the pole(s). 

• Can be controlled by an unlimited number of 

pushbuttons. 

• Zero energy consumption. 

• Duration of the control order: 50 ms to 1s 

(200ms recommended) 

• Over voltage category: IV 


• Electrical life: 200,000 cycles (AC21); 100 000 

cycles (AC22) 

• Max. cable size: solid wire 0.5-4 mm2 and 

flexible wire 1-4 mm2 

• Tightening torque: 1 N.m 


Voltage Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

W H D 

50301 ELR-1620 2P/ 1 mod 2NO 230VAC/110VDC 18 86 67 1/180 

50302 ELR-1610 2P/ 1 mod 1NO+1NC 230VAC/110VDC 18 86 67 1/180 

50303 ELR-1621 2P/ 1 mod 2NO 24VDC/48VAC 18 86 67 1/180 

50304 ELR-1611 2P/ 1 mod 1NO+1NC 24VDC/48VAC 18 86 67 1/180 



50307 ELR-1640 4P/ 2 mod 4NO 230VAC/110VDC 36 86 67 1/90 

50308 ELR-1630 4P/ 2 mod 2NO+2NC 230VAC/110VDC 36 86 67 1/90 






YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

111


TIMER TE8A – 1A, TE8A – 2A 

The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz mini controller 

which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation 

of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. 

Timer programming is done through selection of the operational day(s) of the week, followed by 

selection of the start time and end time. You may choose out of ten modes (one for each day of 

the week, one for the work days, one for the weekends and one for the whole week). When setting 

the time, you should start first with the hours and then continue with the minutes. TЕ8A - 1a - Up 

to eight programs can be memorized. The on/off time resolution is 1 minute. TЕ8A - 2a - It has two 

operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a day or a week with minimal 

interval of 1 minute for switching on and off. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and 

showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. 



• Power consumption:

TIMER TE48S-S 

The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz mini controller 

which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the 

front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted – direct or reverse. It represents 

two separate operating channels, each of which can operate independently with time range 

adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes. Possibility for correction of the set values during 

operation. First, select the time unit (seconds or minutes) and then set the time. Depending on 

the timer coupling, it can be used as a cyclic timer relay, i.e. it initially counts the first time set, then 

counts the second time set, then starts counting over the first time again, etc. until a stop signal is 

received. In another mode, the timer can count the set time and stop until a new signal is received 

to count the next cycle. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in 

hours, minutes and seconds. 


Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz 

• Admissible variation of the input voltage: 

85-110%U 

• Possibility for choice of operating range: 

‣ from 1 to 99 seconds 

‣ from 1 minute to 99 minutes 

• Error:

AUTOMATION | DIGITAL COUNTERS 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

COUNTERS 




UNIVERSAL DIGITAL COUNTER CE2J 

The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of 

counting and high counting reliability. It has a built-in battery which allows data storing for more 

than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display with black lighting digits, providing excellent 

visibility at different lighting. The counter is to be mounted on the front panel of the boards. It is 

used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay 

outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and a possibility for changing the position of 

the decimal point. 




• Counting range: 0 - 99999 

• Counting speed: 30/3k cps 

• Zeroing: outside impulse 

• Battery for programmer storing: up to 10 

years 






COMBINED DIGITAL COUNTER/TIMER CE10J 

The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a 

definite combination from keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which 

allows high speed of counting, precision at operation as a timer and high reliability. It has a builtin 

battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display 

providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with 

accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand 

set value, and a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point. 




• Counting range: 0 – 999 

• Timer range: 0.01 – 99h99min 

• Counting speed: 30/500 cps 

• Zeroing: outside impulse 

• Battery for programmer storing: up to 10 

years 






TOTAL DIGITAL COUNTER CE15J 

The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power 

supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and 

operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility 

at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation. 



• Power supply voltage: built in battery 

• Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC 

• Counting accuracy:




PHASE SEQUENCE INDICATOR EK - RSTB 

The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence, 

sequence and quality of the phases. The device indicates the following fault: lack of one or 

several phases; change in the sequence of the phases; lowering of the power supplying voltage: 

under 10%; increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%; phase asymmetry of the power 

supplying voltage: ±10%. In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay starts operating 

in the device which breaks the controlling circuit. The time between fault indication and outlet 

relay switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling stops at very short breaks. When 

the voltage is back to normal limits, the device receives energy (indication lights) according to the 

hysteresis values. At phase sequence fault the device operates immediately. 



• Possibility for operation range adjustment: 

0.1 – 10 seconds 

• Possibility for working range adjustment: from 

300 to 480 V 

• Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles 

• Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles 

• Indication: green LED – indication for a 

change in the condition; red LED - failure 

• Operating temperature: -5 ÷ +65°C 

• Humidity: 35 – 85%RH 

• Weight: 120g 

MOUNTING 

• DIN-rail 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

h w d1 d2 l1 l2 

50103 EK - RSTB 85 24 45 60 34 66 1/200 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

117

AUTOMATION | MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS 

CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS 






CURRENT MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS MES - XX/X5 TYPE 

The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems 

for current characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signalling, etc. 

They are with x/5 gear ratio as X is the inlet range of the transformer. 


• Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz 

• Admissible deviation of the operating current: 

1.2x In 

• Inlet current: 50 – 1200A 

• Outlet current: 5A 

• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz 

(1min) 



• Precision class: 0.5 

• Weight kg: 0.60 kg 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Range Capacity 

VA 

MOUNTING 

• Current transformers can be DIN rail mounted; 

• Vertically or horizontally to the power 

supplying rails according to the opening of the 

transformer 

• Current transformers can be mounted on flat 

surfaces by use of fixing clamps. 


A B C D E F G 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

45050A MES - 75/30 50/5 1 88 52 52 41 77 31 31 1/40 

45075A MES - 75/30 75/5 1.5 88 52 52 41 77 31 31 1/40 

45103A MES - 75/30 100/5 1.5 88 52 52 41 77 31 31 1/40 

45153A MES - 75/30 150/5 2.5 88 52 52 41 77 31 31 1/40 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


VA 


A B C D E F G 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

45204A MES - 75/40 200/5 3.75 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40 

45254A MES - 75/40 250/5 3.75 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40 

45304A MES - 75/40 300/5 5 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40 

45404A MES - 75/40 400/5 5 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40 

45504A MES - 75/40 500/5 5 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40 

45604A MES - 75/40 600/5 5 88 52 52 41 77 41 41 1/40 

Catalogue 

number 


VA 


A B C D E F G 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

45406A MES - 86/60 400/5 3.75 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/40 

45506A MES - 86/60 500/5 5 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/40 

45606A MES - 86/60 600/5 10 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/40 

45806A MES - 86/60 800/5 10 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/40 

45906A MES - 86/60 1000/5 10 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/32 

45916A MES - 86/60 1200/5 10 117 57 57 184 77 61 61 1/32 

118 

ELMARK 





CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, TYPE CР 

Current measuring transformers of duct type. Specially designed to be installed in measuring 

circuits without removing cables in current measuring circuit. CP Transformers save installation 

time and decrease installation costs. 


• Small size table: 

• Secondary coil rated current 5A 

• Rated voltage 720V 

• Frequency 50Hz 

• Rated load: up to 30VA 

• Safety coefficient: fs≤5 

• Secondary coil connection: cable shoe 

terminal 


Type A B C D E F G 

CР 23 20 30 51 89 111 34 47 

CР 58 50 80 78 114 145 32 32 

CР 88 80 80 108 144 145 32 32 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Range Precision class Capacity VA Weight kg Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

452320 CР 23 200/5 1 1.5 0.74 1/45 

452325 CР 23 250/5 1 2.5 0.74 1/45 

452330 CР 23 300/5 0.5 2.5 0.74 1/45 

AUTOMATION | MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

455825 CР 58 250/5 0.5 1.5 0.87 1/36 

455830 CР 58 300/5 0.5 2.5 0.87 1/36 

455840 CР 58 400/5 0.5 2.5 0.87 1/36 

455850 CР 58 500/5 0.5 5 0.87 1/36 

455860 CР 58 600/5 0.5 5 0.87 1/36 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

458850 CР 88 500/5 0.5 2.5 1 1 / 20 

458860 CР 88 600/5 0.5 5 1 1 / 20 

458875 CР 88 750/5 0.5 2,5 1 1 / 20 

458880 CР 88 800/5 0.5 3.75 1 1 / 20 

458890 CР 88 1000/5 0.5 5 1 1 / 20 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

119

AUTOMATION | INDUSTRIAL RELAYS 

INDUSTRIAL RELAYS AND BASES 



EN 60947-5-1; 

EN 61810 

Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for 

command transfer towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values 

enabling the direct control of industrial executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively 

small sizes. The contact surfaces are made from silver-coated electrolytic copper. The entire 

contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof plastic with a test-button installed to it. 

The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the electric installation and the 

relays and is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar. 


• Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V AC, 50 Нz and 

from 12 to 110V DC 

• Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 

-110% Un 

• Rated current of the sockets: 10A AC 

• Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles 

• Isolation resistance: 500 mΩ /min (500V) 

• Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50Нz 

• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC/1 min 

• Turn-out time: 25ms 

MOUNTING 

• on a DIN rail by means of a socket 

• Working temperature: -5 ÷ + 65°C 

• Humidity: 35 - 85% RH indicator 

• possibility for mounting of additional contacts 




YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Relay type 

Voltage of the Socket type 

coil (V) 

Resistance of 

the coil ( Ω ) 

Number of 

contacts 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

57141 ELM - 14FC 12 VDC ELM-RT624-B 260 NO+NC 100/1000 



Type ELM-90.2 

Catalogue 

number 

Relay type 

Voltage of the Socket type 

coil (V) 

Resistance of 


Number of 

contacts 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

57601N ELM-90.2 12VDC ELM-90.22 90 2NO+2NC 10/200 

57602N ELM - 90.2 24 VDC ELM - 90.22 360 2NO+2NC 10/200 


57605N ELM - 90.2 230 VAC ELM - 90.22 6800 2NO+2NC 10/200 

57606N ELM-90.2 24VAC ELM-90.22 72 2NO+2NC 10/200 

57611N ELM-90.3 12VDC ELM-90.23 90 3NO+3NC 10/200 



57614N ELM - 90.03 110 VAC ELM - 90.23 1650 3NO+3NC 10/200 

57615N ELM-90.3 230 VAC ELM-90.23 6800 3NO+3NC 10/200 

57616N ELM-90.3 24VAC ELM-90.23 72 3NO+3NC 10/200 

Type ELM-90.3 

120 

ELMARK 


Type ELM-36.02 

Type ELM-36.04 

Catalogue 

number 

Relay type 

Voltage of 

the coil (V) 

Socket type 

Resistance of 


Number of 

contacts 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

57521N ELM-36.02 12VDC ELM-RT702-B 60 2NO+2NC 20/500 


57523N ELM-36.02 48 VDC ELM-RT702-B 2560 2NO+2NC 20/500 

57525N ELM-36.02 230VAC ELM-RT702-B 15000 2NO+2NC 20/500 




57543N ELM-36.04 48 VDC ELM-RT704-B 2560 4NO+4NC 20/500 

57544N ELM-36.04 110 VAC ELM-RT704-B 4000 4NO+4NC 20/500 

57545N ELM-36.04 230 VAC ELM-RT704-B 15000 4NO+4NC 20/500 



Catalogue 

number 

Socket type Dimensions (mm) Number of terminals 

(pcs.) 

57901 ELM - RT624-B 76 x 15 5 20 / 600 

57902 ELM - RT702-B 76 x 27 11 10 / 240 

57912 ELM - RT704-B 76 x 27 14 10 / 240 

57904 ELM - 90.22 68 x 38 8 10 / 400 

57905 ELM - 90.23 68 x 38 11 10 / 400 

Packing/Box (pcs) 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

57901 57902 

57912 

57904 

57905 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

121

AUTOMATION | INTERFACE RELAYS 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

INTERFACE RELAYS EL-14F-LS SERIES 

INTERFACE RELAYS EL-14F-LS SERIES 

ELMARK interface relays provide reliable voltage conversion in control systems. Our relays ensure 

reliable signal switching and provide electrical isolation for sensitive electronics in all kinds of 

machinery in industry. 

FEATURES 

• Good response control 

• Slim size 

• With LED indicator 

• With lockable test button and inspection 

window 

• High rated load 


• Rated load: 1Z-12A; 2Z-8A 

• Rated voltage: 12V DC; 24V DC; 230V AC 

• Insulation resistance: ≤500MΩ 

• Operating power: 0.53W/0.9VA 

• Dielectric strength 

‣ Between open contacts: ≥1000V AC/1 min 

‣ Between poles: ≥1500V AC/1 min 

‣ Between contact and coil: ≥4000V AC/1 min 

• Operate/ release time: ≤15ms/15ms 

• Terminal type: Plug-in 

• Contact material: AgSnO2 

• Electrical life: 10⁵ times 

• Mechanical life: 10⁷ times 

• Size LxHxD: 28.8 x 34.2 x 12.6 mm 

Catalogue 

number 

Relay 

type 

Voltage of 

the coil (V) 

Drop out 

voltage 

Resistance of 


Socket 

type 

Contact 

form 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

57100 EL-14F-LS 12V DC 1.2 270 EL05A-E 1Z 20/300 


57102 EL-14F-LS 230V AC 69.0 23000 EL05A-E 1Z 20/300 

Type EL-14F-LS/ 1Z 

122 

ELMARK 


Type EL-14F-LS/ 2Z 

Catalogue 

number 

Relay type 

Voltage of 

the coil (V) 

Drop out 

voltage 

Resistance of 


Socket 

type 

Contact 

form 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



57105 EL-14F-LS 230V AC 69.0 23000 EL08A-E 2Z 20/300 

AUTOMATION | INTERFACE RELAYS 

BASES FOR INTERFACE RELAYS EL-14F-LS SERIES 


• Rated load: 

‣ EL05A-E: 10A 

‣ EL08A-E: 16A 


• Wire size: 0.5-2.5mm2 

• Tightening torque: 0.8Nm 

Catalogue 

number 

Socket type 

Dimensions 

(mm) 

Number of 

terminals (pcs.) 

Number of 

contacts 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

57106 EL05A-E 15.8x73x29 1NO+1NC 5 10/240 

57107 EL08A-E 15.8x73x29 2NO+2NC 8 10/240 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Type EL05A-E/ 5 Type EL05A-E/ 8 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

123

AUTOMATION | POWER RELAYS 

POWER RELAYS 

EL-40F 

POWER RELAY TYPE EL-40FN, 40A 

Power relays are reliable problem solvers when it comes to switching high currents. They have an 

electromagnet to open or close a circuit when the input (coil) is correctly excited. 

FEATURES 

• Slim size. 

• With LED indicator. 

• Two type mounting: On DIN rail or quick 

screw connection. 

Catalogue 

number 

Relay 

type 

Voltage of 

the coil (V) 

Rated 

load (A) 

Drop out 

voltage 


• Rated load: 40A. 










• Size LxHxD: 40A: 48.8 x 68 x 48.8mm 

Resistance 

of the coil (Ω) 

Contact 

form 

Number of 

contacts 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

57120 EL-40F 12V DC 40 1.2 72 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300 

57121 EL-40F 24V DC 40 2.4 288 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300 

57122 EL-40F 250V DC 40 72.0 19400 at 220V 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

124 

ELMARK 


EL-60F 

POWER RELAY TYPE EL-60F, 60A 


• Rated load: 60A. 










• Size LxHxD: 45.8 x 64 x 45mm 

Catalogue 

number 

Relay 

type 

Voltage of 

the coil (V) 

Rated 

load (A) 

Drop out 

voltage 

Resistance 

of the coil (Ω) 

Contact 

form 

Number of 

contacts 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

57123 EL-60F 12V DC 60 1.2 72 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300 

57124 EL-60F 24V DC 60 2.4 288 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300 

57125 EL-60F 250V DC 60 72.0 19400 at 220V 1Z 1NO+1NC 20/300 

AUTOMATION | POWER RELAYS 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

125


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

INDUSTRIAL SOLID STATE RELAYS (SSR) 



EN 60947-5-1; 


Industrial SSR are intended for mounting in power and control cabinets as an output switch 

devices with reliable ON/OFF performance. The SSR are based on the CMOS technology. The noncontact 

electronic switch is optically separated from the input signal by a photoelectric coupler. 

This allows use of switch currents of up to 50A despite of the devices small overall size. Another 

important feature of the relay is that output load can be regulated depending on the input signal 

value. The relay is mainly used to transmit control signals to actuating mechanisms since it can 

work at comparatively high currents making it possible to directly control actuators. SSR have 

transparent plastic covers to additionally improve their safety level. The SSR use is connected 

with considerable heat emissions, so measures must be taken to dispense the excessive thermal 

energy in the atmosphere. This is achieved through application of specially deigned radiators. The 

correct definition of radiator parameters is of critical importance. It is made by calculating the heat 

generation capacity with the formula: Heat generation = active load current x 3.0 W/A. The heat 

removal surface is estimated with the help of the graphic: 


• Load/output voltage: 30/400V 50 Hz or the 

solid state 

voltage regulators 

• Rated output current: from 10A to 60A 

• Insulating voltage: 1000 MΩ /min (500V) 

• Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz 

• Dielectric Strength: < 2500VAC / 1 min 

• Leakage current:

MEASUREMENT DEVICES 




YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

DIGITAL VOLTMETER/AMPEREMETER EKDP 15 A/V 

Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types: 

• Ampere meter 

• Voltmeter 

It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers 

with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and 

electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement 

range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure constant current (AD,DV) and 

alternating current (AA,VA) quantities. 


• Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz 

• Inlet signal: 

‣ Operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range 

is adjusted from inside) 

‣ Operating as ampere meter: 5 – 2000A (the 

range is adjusted from inside) 

• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz 

(1min) 

Note: At current range over 5A a current measurement transformer should be used 

Catalogue 

number 

DIN-RAIL SINGLE PHASE DIGITAL VOLTAGE METER, EL-V1/500R 

Digital Voltmeter abbreviated as DVM is an instrument used to measure the electrical potential 

difference between two points in a circuit. 

It measures the input voltage after converting the analog voltage to digital voltage and displays it 

in number format using a converter. 

FEATURES 

• You do not have to figure out the readings 

manually to get the voltage, ohm or ampere 

reading unlike the analogue voltmeters. 

• Digital voltmeters provide a precise and 

computer-generated reading on the screen 

which eliminates the errors that might occur in 

the case of human reading. 

• They provide accurate and fast readings 

when compared to the readings extracted from 

an analogue voltmeter. 

• Digital voltmeters do not require you to make 

calculations and are more stable, dependable 

and reliable. 

• Digital voltmeters provide accurate results 

and do not depend on the competency of 

the readers as in the case of reading analogue 

voltmeter. 

• Digital voltmeters are cost-effective and 

smaller in size, which makes them easy to 

handle and use. 

Catalogue 

number 

• Consumption: 200MS/time 

• IP Code: IP20 

• Electrical Life: ≥15000 hours 

• Digital colour: Red 

• Working temperature: from -5° to 40°C 

• Air relative humidity: 10-80% (no condensation) 

• Work pressure: 80-160 kPa 

• Terminal for wiring: 1.5mm2 

• Mounting: On DIN rail EN60715(35mm) by 

means of fast clip device 

• Dimensions (LxWxH): 18x66x81mm 

Type Range Phase Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

50143 Voltmeter 80-500V AC Single 1/100 

AUTOMATION | MEASUREMENT DEVICES 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

127


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 




DIGITAL VOLTMETER/ AMPERE METER AND 

FREQUENCY METER EKDP7 

Digital device adjusted for mounting on the 

front panel of electrical boards and offered in 

the following types: 

• Ampere meter: 

EKDP7 – AA – ampere meter for alternating 

current 

EKDP7 – DA – ampere meter for direct current 

• Voltmeter: 

EKDP7 – AV – voltmeter for alternating current 

EKDP7 – DV – voltmeter for direct current 

• Frequency meter: 

EKDP7 – Hz – frequency meter 


• Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz 

• Inlet signal: 

‣ Operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the 

range is adjusted from inside) 

‣ Operating as ampere meter: 5 – 2000A 

(the range is adjusted from inside(the range is 

adjusted from inside) 

• Consumption:

DIGITAL ROUND VOLTMETER/ AMPERE METER AND FREQUENCY 

METER EL-ED16R 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Range Diameter (mm) Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

401553 Voltmeter 12-500V AC 22 10/500 

401554 Ampere meter 0-100A 22 10/500 

401555 Frequency meter 35-99 HZ 22 10/500 

DIGITAL SQUARE VOLTMETER/ AMPERE METER AND 

FREQUENCY METER EL-ED16S 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Range Diameter (mm) Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

401556 Voltmeter 12-500V AC 22 10/500 

401557 Ampere meter 0-100A 22 10/500 

401558 Frequency meter 35-99 HZ 22 10/500 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

129


DIN RAIL MOUNTED KWH METERS 



Standard IEC 62052-11; IEC 

62053-21; IEC 62056-21 

Electronic single and three phase kWh meters intended for DIN rail mounting and active energy 

measurement. Meters are suitable for home and commercial applications. They perform direct 

measurement of the real consumption of electric power and the results are shown on the LCD 

display. The system doesn’t need any additional adjustment or calibration. The range includes 

single and multi-tariff models. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Measuring 

range 

Number of 

Tariffs 

Meter 

constant 

(imp/kWh) 

Voltage 

( V ) 

Overall Packing/Box 

dimensions (pcs) 

H/W/D 

(mm) 

50213 EL-45SA 5A(40A) 1 2000 230 116 /18/ 59 1/10 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Measuring 

range 

Number of 

Tariffs 

Meter 

constant 

(imp/kWh) 

Voltage 

( V ) 



H/W/D 

(mm) 

50216 EL-100SA-U 10A(100A) 1 1600 230 100 /76/ 65 1/60 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Measuring 

range 

Number of 

Tariffs 

Meter 

constant 

(imp/kWh) 

Voltage 

( V ) 



H/W/D 

(mm) 

50217 EL-024 3x20A (100A) 1 400 3x220/380 100/76/65 1/60 

130 

ELMARK 


SINGLE PHASE MULTI TARIFF ELECTRIC/ENERGY METER 10(80)A, ADL200 

MID 

Certified 

ADL200 single-phase electric meter is designed for single-phase energy measurement on low 

voltage system.The meter meet the related technical requirements of electronic meter in the 

IEC62053-21, IEC62053-22 standards. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Measurement: 

‣ kWh, 

‣ Voltage, 

‣ Current; 

‣ Active power; 

‣ Reactive power; 

‣ Apparent power; 

‣ Power factor; 

‣ Frequency 

• LED display: 8 bits section 

• Communication interface: RS485 

• Communication protocol: MODBUS-RTU 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Measuring 

range 

Voltage 

( V ) 


• Rated voltage: 220-264 V AC / 50Hz 

• Nominal input current: 10A 

• Maximum current: 80A 


ication 

ess 

rate 

ing 

rature 

umidity 

awings 


n 

envir 

on 

me 

nt 

1200bps~19200bps 

-25℃~+55℃ 

≤95℅(No condensation) 

communication 

address 

Baud rate 

working 

temperature 

Relative humidity 

5 Dimension drawings 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Fig1 direct connect 

Fig2 

1200bps~19200bps 

-25℃~+55℃ 

≤95℅(No condensation) 

Fig1 

Fig2 

direct connect 

connect via CT 

Note:The torque of direct connect should not be greater than 3-4N·m,and the torque of 

via CT should not be greater than 1.5-2N·m。 

6 Wiring and installing 

6.1 Wiring sample of voltage and current 

connect via CT 

direct connect should not be greater than 3-4N·m,and the torque of 

greater than 1.5-2N·m。 

THREE PHASE MULTI TARIFF ELECTRIC ENERGY METER 10(80)A, ADL400 

connect 

ADL400 is a smart meter designed for power supply system, industrial and mining enterprises and 

utilities to calculate the electricity consumption and manage the electric demand. It features the 

high precision, small size and simple installation. It integrates the measurement of all electrical parameters 

with the comprehensive electricity metering and management provides various data on 

previous 48 months, checks the 31st harmonic content and the total harmonic content. It is fitted 

with RS485 communication port and adapted to MODBUS-RTU .ADL400 can be used in all kinds of 

control systems, SCADA systems and energy management systems. 

FUNCTIONS 

• Measurement of electrical parameters: 

kWh; voltage; current; active power ( positive 

and negative); reactive power ( positive and 

negative); apparent power; power factor and 

frequency 

• Measurement of harmonics: 2-31st voltage 

and current harmonic 

• Number of tariffs: 4 


• Key programing: 3keys to communication 

and set parameters 

• Multi-tariff and functions: adapt 4 time zones, 

2 time interval list, 14 time interval by day and 

4 tariff rates 

• Max. demand and occurrence time 

• Frozen data on last 48 months, last 90 days 




• Rated voltage: 3×100V; 3×380V; 3×57.7/100V; 

3×220/380V 

• Frequency: 45-65Hz, error±0.2% 

• Nominal input current: 3×1(6)A; 3×10(80)A 

• Power consumption: < 1VA Single phase rated 

current 

• Energy pulse output: 1 active photocoupler 

output 

connect 

• kWh Class: 0.5 

• Accuracy class: Error±0.2% 

• Time error: ≤0.5s/d 

• Width of pulse: 80±20ms 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Measuring 

range 

50212 ADL400 3×1(6)A / 

3×10(80)A 

• Pulse constant: 400imp/kWh,10000imp/ 

kWh(Correspond with the basic current) 

• Range of communication address: 

Modbus-RTU: 1~247 

• Baud rate: 1200~19200bps 

• Size LxWxH: 72x65x90 mm 

• Working temperature: -25 o C~55 oC 

• Relative humidity: ≤95% ( No condensation) 


• Brand: Acrel 

Voltage Overall dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

(V) 

L W H Box (pcs) 

3×220/380V 72 65 90 1/36 

stalling 

e of voltage and current 

-3- 

-3- 

MID 

Certified 

132 

ELMARK 


MULTI FUNCTIONAL/ TARIFF PROGRAMMABLE METER AMC96L-E4/KC 

FOR BUILD-IN MOUNTING 

AMC series AC multi-function meter is commonly found in larger homes and businesses, our 

Three Phase Panel Meter is a three-phase power meter with a data logger function for real-time 

and long-term three-phase power measurement of currents. It integrates the measurement of 

power parameters as well as power monitoring and evaluation management in one unit. When it 

is installed in your home, the power consumed in your home remains the same and it can be used 

with smaller and cheaper wiring systems for stable monitoring in environments with lower voltages. 

It is therefore widely used in power systems, industrial and mining enterprises, intelligent 

buildings, and other areas with power monitoring needs. 

Programmable meter AMC96L-E4/KC also have a wide range of peripheral interface functions, 

allowing you to choose your own according to your needs. They are also designed with switching 

inputs and relay outputs for easy remote control of circuit breakers, making them very easy to use. 

The product meets the related technical requirements of electronic power meter in the 

IEC62053-21, IEC62053-22 standards. 

FUNCTIONS 


kWh, voltage, current; active power ( positive 



frequency 

• Measurement of harmonics: 2-31st voltage 

and current harmonic 

• Number of tariffs: 4 

• True RMS Measurements 

• Max/Min Log with Timestamp 

• 12 bits section LSD display 

• Internal Optional 4DI&2DO or 2DI&2DO&2AO 

• Standard one Energy Pulse Output 




• Rated input voltage: 

‣ Single phase AC 100V; 400V AC 

‣ Three phases: AC 3×57.7V/100V(100V); 

3×220V/380V(400V); 3×380V/660V(660V) 

(96 size only) 

‣ 72 profile not suitable for high voltage 

applications 

• Connection: 

‣ Single phase: 2-wire 

‣ Three phases: 3 and 4-wire 

• Input Frequency: 45-65Hz 

• Switching input: Dry contact input, built-in 

power supply 

• Nominal input current: 1A; 5A 

• Power consumption: < 0.5VA 

• Insulation resistance: Input, output end to 

machine enclosure >100MΩ 

• kWh Class: 0.5 

• Accuracy: Class 0.5 

• Analog output: 1-5V, 4-20mA 

• Pulse constant: 10000imp/kWh(settable) 

• Communication: R S485port, Modbus -RTU 

protocol, DLT645 protocol (versions 07 and 97) 

• Baud rate: 1200 ~ 38400 bps 

• Housing size WxHxD: 90x90x77.8mm 

• Faceplate size WxHxD: 96x96x90mm 

• Cut-out size WxH: 92x92mm 

• Working temperature: -25 o C~65 o C 

• Relative humidity: ≤93% (No condensation) 


• Brand: Acrel 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Input 

current (A) 

Input 

voltage (V) 

Housing size (mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

W H D 

50218 AMC96L-E4/KC 5 100/400/660 90 90 77.8 1/74 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

133


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Structure 




functions. 

SINGLE PHASE PREPAID AND POST-PAID ENERGY METER 

10(60)A, ADL100-EYZ/F 

ADL100-EYZ/F is single phase pre-paid meters with intro-control is used for calculating the single 

phase active energy. 

The multi-tariff meter has functions of pre-paid, load controlling and RS485 communication meet 

the related technical requirements of electronic power meter in the IEC62053-21, IEC62053-22 

standards. 

CONTROL: with ACREL-RFMS 

FUNCTIONS 





frequency 

• Pre-paid mode: Through RS485 communication 

prepaid recharge, data encryption. 

• Power input type: IC card 

• Number of tariffs: 4 tariff rates, 14 time interval 

by day 


• Control: Built-in high-capacity sub-holding 

relay to achieve load on-off control 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Input 

current 

Input voltage 

(V) 



• Frequency: 45-65Hz 

• Nominal input current: 10(60)A 

• Power consumption: < 4VA 

• kWh Class: 1 

• Clock accuracy: Error ≤ 0.5s/d 


• Pulse constant: 1600imp/kWh 

• Communication interface: RS485(A+, B-) 

• Pre-paid system application: ACREL-RFMS 


• Working temperature: from -25 to 55°C 

• Relative humidity: ≤95% 

OPERATE DETAILS 

The power is input into the meter through RF card. When the available power in the meter decreases 

to zero, the meter will automatically cut off the power supply. 

Only after the new available power is input through the RF card, the meter can resume power 

supply. After the user pays each time, the computer system of the power supply management 

department can calculate the value of the available electricity that should be recharged to the 

electricity meter this time according to the user's zero-crossing electricity and the remaining available 

electricity in the current electricity meter. 

• Each end user will have an RF card, that RF card will be used for charging and depositing. 

• After finishing the re-charging, the end-user or managers need to use an RF card to touch KWH 

meter. 

• Prepaid meter electricity price can be set by RF card. Officer can record the electricity price and 

multi-tariff price inside the RF card. Once the RF card touches the KWH meter itself, this information 

will be recorded into the prepaid meter. 

RF CARD FUNCTIONS 

RF cards will not only be used for end-user but also will be used for managers. Managers can use 

one blank RF card and give that card a specified function by the Acrel-RFMS system. The most 

common functions are: 

• Charging & Deposit 

• Replacement for the Lost card 

• Energy Consumption Reset 

• Forced opening and closing circuit 


L W H 

50222 ADL100-EYZ/F 10A(60A) 154-264V AC 72 70 88 1/84 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

ACCESSORIES: 

RF CARD READER FOR PREPAID AND 

POST-PAID KWH METERS 

RF CARD 

Catalogue number: 

50225 

NOTE: Comes with 1.5m length USB cable 


50224 

134 

ELMARK 


Structure 




functions. 

THREE PHASE PREPAID AND POST-PAID ENERGY METER 10(80) 

A, ADL300-EYZ/F 

ADL300-EYZ/F is thre phase pre-paid meters with intro-control is used for calculating the three 

phase active energy. 

The multi-tariff meter has functions of pre-paid, load controlling and RS485 communication meet 

the related technical requirements of electronic power meter in the IEC62053-21, IEC62053-22 

standards. 

CONTROL: with ACREL-RFMS 

FUNCTIONS 





frequency 

• Pre-paid mode: Through RS485 communication 

prepaid recharge, data encryption. 

• Power input type: IC card 

• Number of tariffs: 4 tariff rates, 14 time interval 

by day 


• Control: Built-in high-capacity sub-holding 

relay to achieve load on-off control 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Input 

current 

Input voltage 

(V) 


• Rated voltage: 3×220/380V- 465V AC 

• Frequency: 45-65Hz 

• Nominal input current: 10(80)A 

• Power consumption: < 4VA 

• kWh Class: 1 

• Clock accuracy: Error ≤ 0.5s/d 


• Pulse constant: 6400imp/kWh, 400 imp/kWh 

• Communication interface: RS485(A+, B-) 

• Pre-paid system application: ACREL-RFMS 


• Working temperature: from -25 to 55°C 

• Relative humidity: ≤95% 

OPERATE DETAILS 

The power is input into the meter through RF card. When the available power in the meter decreases 

to zero, the meter will automatically cut off the power supply. 

Only after the new available power is input through the RF card, the meter can resume power 

supply. 

After the user pays each time, the computer system of the power supply management department 

can calculate the value of the available electricity that should be recharged to the electricity 

meter this time according to the user's zero-crossing electricity and the remaining available 

electricity in the current electricity meter. 

• Each end user will have an RF card, that RF card will be used for charging and depositing. 

• After finishing the re-charging, the end-user or managers need to use an RF card to touch KWH 

meter. 

• Prepaid meter electricity price can be set by RF card. Officer can record the electricity price and 

multi-tariff price inside the RF card. Once the RF card touches the KWH meter itself, this information 

will be recorded into the prepaid meter. 

RF CARD FUNCTIONS 

RF cards will not only be used for end-user but also will be used for managers. Managers can use 

one blank RF card and give that card a specified function by the Acrel-RFMS system. The most 

common functions are: 

• Charging & Deposit 

• Replacement for the Lost card 

• Energy Consumption Reset 

• Forced opening and closing circuit 


L W H 

50223 ADL300-EYZ/F 10A(80A) 3×220/380V 144 70 88 1/84 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

ACCESSORIES: 

RF CARD READER FOR PREPAID AND 

POST-PAID KWH METERS 

RF CARD 


50225 


50224 

NOTE: Comes with 1.5m length USB cable 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

135


ANALOGUE (POINTER) PANEL METERS SD72 TYPE FOR BUILD-IN 




Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed for 

frequency measurement, capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power supply 

grid, with overall dimensions 72x72mm. They are manufactured based on bridge measurement 

schemes. There is possibility for display change for the higher scopes of measuring. 

ANALOGUE AMPERE METER 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of the 

measurement 

system 

Precision 

class 

Range Note Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

654010 Ampere meter AC MEMSI 1.5 0-100A Current transfer 100/5 1/100 






50128 Ampere meter DC MEMC 1.5 0-5A - 1/50 

50129 Ampere meter DC MEMC 1.5 0-50A Outer resistor 60mV 1/50 

Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument; 

MEMC - magnetic-electrical movable coil 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

ANALOGUE VOLTMETER 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Type of the measurement system Precision 

class 

Range 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

50125 Voltmeter AC* MEMSI 1.5 0-500V 1/50 

50130 Voltmeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-50V 1/50 

50131 Voltmeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-100V 1/20 

* Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding 



136 

ELMARK 


ANALOGUE FREQUENCY METER 

Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of the measurement system Precision 

class 

Type Type of the measurement system Precision 

class 

Range 

Range 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

50127 Cosφ meter MEMSI 1.5 3P 400V 1/50 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

50126 Frequency meter** МЕ 0.5 45-65Hz 1/50 

** Possibility for voltage 110V, 230V , 400V 



ANALOGUE COSΦ METER 


MEMC- magnetic-electrical movable coil 


ANALOGUE WATT METER 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of the measurement Precision 

system 

class 

Range 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

50132 Watt meter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 1P240V 1/25 

50133 Watt meter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 3P 3 line 1/25 

50134 Watt meter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 3P 4 line 1/25 




page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

137

AUTOMATION | LIMIT SWITCHES 

ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CSA-XXX 

Product conformity 

documentation: 

Standard: EN 60947-1; 


Catalogue 

number 

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for 

setting of gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion 

machines. They feature a vibration-resistant metal shell. 


• Dielectric strength: 1000V AC 

• Rated current: 10A active; 4A inductive 

• Insulating resistance: 100mΩ 


500 000 with active load 


1 000 000 

Type Type of the head Power of starting 

(g) 

Power of release 

(g) 

• Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s 


• Rated current: up to 10A 


• Cable input: cable glandPG11 

• Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm² 

• Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm 

Switching 

position 

General 

movement 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

46A001 CSA - 001 Metal cylinder 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10/90 

46A003 CSA - 003 Cylinder with metal roll 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10/90 

46A012 CSA - 012 Horizontal lever with metal roll 800 400 2.0mm 5.8mm 10/90 

46A031 CSA - 031 Adjustable lever with metal roll 400 100 22.5° 95° 10/80 

46A021 CSA - 021 Lever with metal roll 400 100 22.5° 95° 10/80 

46A081 CSA - 081 Spring lever 150 50 22.5° 50mm 10/80 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

46A001 

46A031 

46A003 

46A021 

46A012 

46A081 

138 

ELMARK 


ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES TZ-6XXX 





Catalogue 

number 

The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion 

machines. The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminium shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and 

water. 





• Contact resistance: 15mΩ 




10 000 000 

Type Type of the head Power of 

starting (g) 

• Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s 



• Cable input: cable gland PG11 

• Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm² 

Power of 

release (g) 

Switching 

position 

General 

movement 

466001 TZ-6001 Metal cylinder 350 115 0.5mm 5.5mm 1/50 

466101 TZ -6101 Oil-resistant metal cylinder 800 240 2mm 5mm 1/50 

466102 TZ -6102 Oil-resistant cylinder with metal roll 500 100 1mm 3.5mm 1/50 

466104 TZ -6104 Oil-resistant horizontal lever with metal roll 640 230 5mm 6mm 1/50 

466143 TZ -6143 Oil-resistant vertical lever with metal roll 640 230 5mm 6mm 1/50 

466106 TZ -6106 Spring lever 150 - 20° - 1/50 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

466001 

466104 

466101 

466143 

466102 

466106 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

139


UNIVERSAL LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CM-1XXX 





Catalogue 

number 

Limit switches of the CM series are used mainly as replacement of the limit switches of the TZ series or 

for setting the movement limits of some types of equipment. The switches are supplied with screw cable 

terminals. They can work at resistance loads as high as 15A, and are of single circuit type. Limit switches have 

high accuracy and can operate at wide variety of speeds. 


• Dielectric Strength: 1000V AC 


• Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 500VDC) 

• Contact Resistance: 5mΩ 

• Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 500 000 with non-inductive 

load 

• Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 5 000 000 

• Operating frequency: 20 electrical operations/ 


(g) 


(g) 

minute 

• Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 1.0m/s 




Switching 

position 

General 

movement 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

468105 CM -1307 Metal cylinder 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1/480 

468106 CM -1309 Cylinder and transverse metal roll 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1/480 

468109 CМ -1308 Cylinder longitudinal metal roll 350 114 0.4mm 5.5mm 1/480 

468110 CМ -1305 Metal cylinder 350 114 0.4mm 1.6mm 1/480 

468113 CM -1703 Extended metal roll 160 22 7.1mm 1.02mm 1/480 

468117 CM -1705 Spring lever 10 3 20mm 5.6mm 1/480 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

468105 

468110 

468106 

468113 

468109 

468117 

140 

ELMARK 


ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES TZ-8XXX 





Catalogue 

number 

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport 

lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibrationresistant 

metal shell with plastic lid, resistant to oil and water. 




• Insulating resistance: 100MΩ 





5 000 000 


(g) 


(g) 

• Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s 



• Cable input: cable gland PG11 

• Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm 


Switching 

position 

General 

movement 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

468104 TZ -8104 Lever with metal roll 750 100 20° 50° 10/100 

468108 TZ -8108 Adjustable lever with metal roll 750 100 20° 50° 10/100 

468112 TZ -8112 Cylinder with metal roll 900 150 1.5mm 4.0mm 10/100 

468111 TZ -8111 Metal cylinder 900 150 1.5mm 4.0mm 10/100 

468107 TZ -8107 Metal rod 750 100 20° 50° 10/100 

468167 TZ -8167 Spring lever 150 - 30mm - 10/100 


YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

468104 468108 468112 

468111 468107 468167 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

141


ALL-PURPOSE LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CWL-XXX 





Catalogue 

number 

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport 

lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic 

strength and resistance to oil, water and pressure. 





• Contact resistance: 15mΩ 

• Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 

with active load 


10 000 000 

Type Type of the head Power of 

starting (g) 

• Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s 



• Cable input: cable gland 

• Metal shell 

• Vibration-resistant 

Power of 

release (g) 

Switching 

position 

General 

movement 

46LD CWLD Metal cylinder 2720 910 2.0mm 6.4mm 1 / 50 

46LD2 CWLD2 Cylinder with metal roll 2720 910 2.0mm 5.6mm 1 / 50 

46LCA2-2 CWLCA2-2 Lever with metal roll 1360 227 20° 50° 1 / 50 

46LCA12-2Q CWLCA12-2-Q Adjustable lever with metal roll 2720 910 20° 50° 1 / 50 

46LCA32-41 CWCA32-41 Fork 1200 - 55° 90±10° 1 / 50 

46LNJ CWLNJ Oil-resistant spring lever 150 - 28mm 90±10° 1 / 50 

46LCL CWLCL Metal rod 142 28 20° 50° 1 / 50 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

46LD 

46LD2 

46LCA12-2Q 

46LCL 

46LCA2-2 

46LCA32-41 

46LNJ 

142 

ELMARK 


UNIVERSAL LIMIT SWITCH – SERIES CZ93-XX 





Type of the contact system 

Limit switches of the CZ 93 series are Safety Key Interlock Switches. They are used in object control systems 

with high safety requirements. The limit switch body is mounted to the fixed system component, while 

the safety key is mounted to the movable system component. System operation cannot start, unless a full 

interlocking is achieved. Safety key interlock switches can operate at up to 10A non-inductive resistance load, 

3A lamp load and 5A inductive load. They have high operating accuracy at wide variety of speeds. These limit 

switches are available in two versions depending on the operating contacts number: 2NC and NO+NC 


• Dielectric Strength: 2500V AC 


• Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 

500VDC) 


• Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 50 000 with non-inductive 

load 

• Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 2 000 000 

• Operating frequency: 30 electrical operations/ 

minute 

• Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5m/s 




Catalogue 

number 

Type Key type Power of 

starting (g) 

Power of 

release (g) 

Switching 

position 

General 

movement 

Key Actuating 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

46CZ08 CZ-93BPG01 CZ93-K1 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Horizontal 10 / 100 

46CZ09 CZ-93CPG01 CZ93-K1 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Horizontal 10 / 100 

46CZ10 CZ-93BPG02 CZ93-K2 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Vertical 10 / 100 

46CZ11 CZ-93CPG02 CZ93-K2 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Vertical 10 / 100 

46CZ12 CZ-93BPG03 CZ93-K3 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Adjustable 10 / 100 

46CZ13 CZ-93CPG03 CZ93-K3 147N 29.4N 6 mm 28mm Adjustable 10 / 100 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Key Actuating Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

46CZ931 CZ93-K1 Horizontal 1/100 

46CZ932 CZ93-K2 Vertical 1/100 

46CZ933 CZ93-K3 Adjustable 1/100 

46CZ08 / Key type CZ93-K1 

46CZ09/ Key type CZ93-K1 






page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

143

AUTOMATION | PROXIMITY SENSOR 

ALL-PURPOSE PROXIMITY SWITCH – SERIES LM XX 

Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance of metal elements 

motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact control sensors for level of liquids, control sensors for the 

speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature 

a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


• Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω 

• Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm 

• Precision of repetition: 0.01 

• Ambient temperature: -25˚C to +65˚C 

• Gearing speed: 5mm/s 

• Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC 


Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 

Type of Type of 

transition contact 

Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46LM 8-32NA EL-LM8-3002NA 2 15~30 VDC NPN NO 130 mA 2 / 200 

46LM 8-32NB EL-LM8-3002NB 2 15~30 VDC NPN NC 130 mA 2 / 200 

46LM 8-32PA EL-LM8-3002PA 2 15~30 VDC PNP NO 130 mA 2 / 200 

46LM 8-32PB EL-LM8-3002PB 2 15~30 VDC PNP NC 130 mA 2 / 200 

46LM 8-22A EL-LM8-2002A 2 90~230VAC SCR NO 150 mA 2 / 200 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

EL-LM8 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 



Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 






EL-LM12 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 



Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46LM 12-44A EL-LM12-4002A 2 230VAC Inductive NO 100 mA 2 / 200 


EL-LM12 

144 

ELMARK 


EL-LM18 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 



Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 






Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 



Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 




YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

EL-LM18 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 



Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 






EL-LM22 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

145


CAPACITIVE SENSORS – SERIES CM XX 

Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist of two coaxial electrodes, a 

condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal objects, as the gearing distance for non-metal objects 

depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing distance adjustment for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on 

the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid 

which is oil and water resistant. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 









Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46CM 12-32NA EL-CM12-3004NA 0~4 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 12-32NB EL-CM12-3004NB 0~4 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 12-32PA EL-CM12-3004PA 0~4 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 12-32PB EL-CM12-3004PB 0~4 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

EL-CM12 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46CM 18-38NA EL-CM18-3008NA 0~8 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 18-38NB EL-CM18-3008NB 0~8 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 18-38PA EL-CM18-3008PA 0~8 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 18-38PB EL-CM18-3008PB 0~8 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 18-28A EL-CM18-2008A 0~8 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 1/100 

EL-CM18 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46CM 24-12NA EL-CM24-3012NA 8 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 24-12NB EL-CM24-3012NB 8 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 24-12PA EL-CM24-3012PA 8 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 24-12PB EL-CM24-3012PB 8 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100 

46CM 24-12A EL-CM24-2012A 8 90~230VAC SCR NO 300 mA 1/100 

EL-CM24 

146 

ELMARK 


EL-SM12 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46SM 12-31NA EL-SM12-3110NA 10 15~30 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 2/200 

46SM 12-31NB EL-SM12-3110NB 10 15~30 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 2/200 

46SM 18-31PA EL-SM18-3110PA 10 15~30 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 1/100 

46SM 18-31PB EL-SM18-3110PB 10 15~30 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 1/100 

46XM 18-35A EL-XM18-305PMI 5 15~30 VDC Inductive NO 100 mA 1/100 

46XM 18-35B EL-XM18-305PMU 5 15~30 VDC Inductive NC 100 mA 1/100 

Note: Sensor of Hall 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

(mm) 

Power 

supply 

voltage 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Output 

load 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46XM 24-38A EL-XM24-308PMI 8 15~30 VDC Inductive NO 300 mA 1/100 

46XM 24-38B EL-XM24-308PMU 8 15~30 VDC Inductive NC 300 mA 1/100 

Note: MI - current type; MU - voltage type 


EL-XM24 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

147

AUTOMATION | PHOTO-ELECTRICAL SENSOR 

PHOTO-ELECTRICAL SENSOR 

Photo-electrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance 

of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation – inside the sensor there is a photo signal emitter and 

receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse sensors, reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types 

of sensors differ in the way of returning the signal. They allow for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and 

NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a cylindrical metal shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water 

resistant. 

EL-G12 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


• Power supply voltage: 15~30 VDC 








Start 

distance 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Type of 

sensor 

46G12A071 EL-G12-3A07NA 70 mm NPN Ø12; l=50 Diffuse 1/100 

46G12A072 EL-G12-3A07PA 70 mm PNP Ø12; l=50 Diffuse 1/100 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

EL-G18 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Type of 

sensor 



46G183B11 EL-G18-3B2NA 2 m NPN Ø18; l=70 Reflector 1/100 

46G183B12 EL-G18-3B2PA 2 m PNP Ø18; l=70 Reflector 1/100 

46G185C11 EL-G18-3C5NA 5 m NPN Ø18; l=70 Truth beam 1/100 

46G185C12 EL-G18-3C5PA 5 m PNP Ø18; l=70 Truth beam 1/100 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

EL-G30 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Type of 

sensor 



46G305C11 EL-G30-3C101NA 10 m NPN Ø22; l=70 Truth beam 1/52 

46G305C12 EL-G30-3C101PA 10 m PNP Ø22; l=70 Truth beam 1/52 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

148 

ELMARK 


EL-G35 

EL-G50 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Type of 

sensor 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

46G35A102 EL-G35-3A50PA 500 mm PNP NO Diffuse 1/100 

46G353B11 EL-G35-3B3NA 3 m NPN NO Reflector 1/100 

46G353B12 EL-G35-3B3PA 3 m PNP NO Reflector 1/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Type of 

sensor 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

46G50A101 EL-G50-3A30NA 500 mm NPN NO Diffuse 1/100 

46G50A102 EL-G50-3A30PA 500 mm PNP NO Diffuse 1/100 

46G503B11 EL-G50-3B4NA 4 m NPN NO Reflector 1/100 

46G503B12 EL-G50-3B4PA 4 m PNP NO Reflector 1/100 

46G505C11 EL-G50-3C5NA 5 m NPN NO Truth beam 1/50 

46G505C12 EL-G50-3C5PA 5 m PNP NO Truth beam 1/50 

AUTOMATION | PHOTO-ELECTRICAL SENSOR 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Start 

distance 

Type of 

transition 

Type of 

contact 

Type of 

sensor 

46BZJ211 EL-BZJ-211 10 mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1/50 

46BZJ311 EL-BZJ-311 9mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1/50 

46BZJ411 EL-BZJ-411 9mm Reflector NO Colour detector 1/50 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

EL-BZJ 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

149

AUTOMATION | POWE SUPPLIES 

POWER SUPPLIES 

The DRP-xx-xx series of power supplies are voltage reduction and rectification units ideally suited 

to provide stable power supply of systems and equipment for contact-free movement monitoring 

elements (such as inductive, capacity and photo sensors, logic elements and systems, etc.). They 

have small overall dimensions and can be installed on a DIN rail. The power units have metal or 

plastic cases resistant to vibrations and plastic oil and waterproof covers. They can provide stable 

output voltage at comparatively fluctuating input voltage. Devices have built-in overload and 

short circuit protection, allowing short time overload of up to 130%. Power supplies are available 

with various output voltages (5, 12, 15 and 24 V DC) and different output power rates. 


• Input voltage: 80 ~ 230V AC 

• Over-voltage: 115 ~ 135% of the rated output 

voltage 

• Overload: 120 ~ 120% of the rated output 

power 

• Terminals: Input – 2 screw terminals; Output: 4 

screw terminals; 


• Power indicator 

• Installation: DIN rail 

• Cooling: Free air-cooling convection 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

DR - 45 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Output 

Voltage 

(V) 

Output 

Load 

(A) 

Tolerance 

Power 

(W) 

Dimensions W/H/L 

(mm) 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46DR455 DR - 45 -5 5 5 ±2% 25 78 / 93 / 56 1/50 

46DR4512 DR - 45 - 12 12 3.5 ±1% 42 78 / 93 / 56 1/50 

46DR4515 DR - 45 - 15 15 2.8 ±1% 42 78 / 93 / 56 1/50 

46DR4524 DR - 45 - 24 24 2 ±1% 48 78 / 93 / 56 1/16 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Output 

Voltage 

(V) 

Output 

Load 

(A) 

Tolerance 

Power 

(W) 

Dimensions W/H/L 

(mm) 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

46DR7512 DR - 75 -12 12 6.3 ±2% 75 55.5 / 125.3 / 100 1/18 

46DR7524 DR - 75 - 24 24 3.2 ±1% 75 55.5 / 125.3 / 100 1/18 

46DR2424 DRP - 240 - 24 24 10 ±1% 240 125.5 / 125.3 / 100 1/12 

DRP-240-24 

150 

ELMARK 


FLOAT SWITCHES 

DHC1Y 

The automatic level control units of the DHC1Y-xx series are intended for mounting on pumping 

control panels. They do not use any additional sensors, but conductive probes to contact the 

liquid. The unit sends low (harmless) voltage signals to the probes and once a contact between a 

probe and liquid is established, the unit changes its contactors’ state. Units are available in three 

variants with different number of control contacts suitable for different applications. Each contact 

can transfer current of up to 5A, which is enough to ensure control over the powerful pumps’ 

contactors or to directly control pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. The automatic level control 

units can be installed on a DIN rail. 

Float switches of the type QW-xx-xx are sealed units for direct pump control. They are intended 

for continuous liquid level maintenance in pools, tanks or ponds exercised through direct control 

of the pumping in or out process in the respective reservoir. They are pre-wired and depending 

on the chosen configuration can control either the pumping in or pumping out of the reservoir. 

They allow direct control of single-phase pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. Float switches are 

waterproof. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of Output 

probes (No. of Load (A) 

levels) 

Accuracy 

Operating 

Voltage (V) 

46DW001 DHC1Y - S 1 5 ±1% 230 1/100 

46DW002 DHC1Y - SD 3 5 ±1% 230 1/100 

46DW003 DHC1Y - T* 1 5 ±1% 230 1/100 

*Note: 2 pumps control 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

AUTOMATION | FLOAT SWATCHES 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of Output 

probes (No. of Load (A) 

levels) 

Accuracy 

Operating 

Voltage (V) 

46DW004 QW - M 15 - 3 2 6 ±1% 230 1 / 30 

46DW005 QW - 70AB 2 4 ±1% 230 1 / 20 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

QW - M 15 - 3 

QW - 70AB 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

151

AUTOMATION | ROTARY SWITCHES 

ROTARY SWITCHES LW26 SERIES 





The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for switching on/off electrical circuits with 

commutated current from 20 to 160A. They are designed on the bases of the rotor-eccentric 

switching on which is realized through turning of the handle to 60 or 90 degrees. The normal 

operation is used for commutation of two, three or four conductor systems. There are special 

rotary switches that switch on under given connection schemes and are used to control motors, 

electric welding machines and other consumers. 


• Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz 


• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V 

• Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commutation 

cycles 


• Humidity: 35 – 85% RH 

• Commuting capacity: up to 160A according 

to the tables 


MOUNTING 

• directly to the control panel 

• thickness of the surface to which it is 

mounted: max 

5mm 

• IP code: 

‣ IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in 

a panel 

‣ IP65 for the breakers offered in a box 

• Cable connection: screw joining 

• Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N 

• Maximum section of the power supply conductors: 

according to the dimensions table 

• Weight: according to the number of the 

contacts 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Type Front panel Joining 

conductor 

(mm²) 

* n - number of modules 


Mounting dimensions 

(mm) 

A B C L a b d1 d2 

LW26-20 M1 panel 1x2.5 48 48 43 22 + 9.6n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5 

M1 panel with 

48 60 43 22 + 9.6n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5 

inscription field 

LW26-25 M1 panel 1x4.0 48 48 45.2 23+12.8n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5 

LW26-32 M2 panel 1x6.0 64 64 58 29.2 + 12.8n 48 48 Ø10 Ø4.5 

LW26-63 M2 panel 1x16 64 64 66 29.2 + 21.5n 48 48 Ø10 Ø4.5 

LW26-125 M3 panel 1x35 88 88 84 35 + 26.5n 68 68 Ø13 Ø6 

LW26-160 M3 panel 1x50 88 88 88 35 + 32.5n 68 68 Ø13 Ø6 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

492101 LW26 - 10Q Q10 

10 2 1/100 

492161 LW26 - 16Q three-poles switching on; 16 2 1/100 

motor starting and stopping; 

492201 LW26 - 20Q 

voltage turning on/off to the 

20 2 1/100 

492251 LW26 - 25Q consumers 

25 2 1/100 

492321 LW26 - 32Q 32 2 1/72 

492631 LW26 - 63Q 63 2 1/30 

492951 LW26 - 125Q 125 2 1/24 

492961 LW26 - 160Q 160 2 1/27 

152 

ELMARK 


Catalogue number Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

492207 LW26GS - 20/04 Q11 

20 2 1/100 

492257 LW26GS - 25/04 three-poles switching over; motor 25 2 1/100 

starting and stopping; voltage 

492327 LW26GS - 32/04 

turning on/off to the consumers; 

32 2 1/72 

492637 LW26GS - 63/04 possibility for access control 63 2 1/30 

Catalogue number Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

492202 LW26 - 20N N11 

20 3 1/100 

492252 LW26 - 25N 3-position – 2 start positions and 1 25 3 1/100 

stop;for motor reversing 

492322 LW26 - 32N 32 3 1/64 

492632 LW26 - 63N 63 3 1/48 

492952 LW26 - 125N 125 3 1/24 

492962 LW26 - 160N 160 3 1/18 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue number Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

492253 LW26 - 25S S19 

25 4 1 / 100 

492633 LW26 - 63S 3-position – 2 start positions and 63 4 1 / 30 

1 stop; for two speed motor control; 

492953 LW26 - 125S 

switching over between charging* 

125 4 1 / 24 

492963 LW26 - 160S 160 4 1 / 18 

Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed at switching over between charging 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

153


Catalogue 

number 

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

492025 LW26 - 25 SD S21 

25 4 1/100 

492063 LW26 - 63 SD 3-position switching on star/delta 63 4 1/30 

Catalogue 

number 

492324 LW26 - 32H 

5881/3 

492634 LW26 - 63H 

5881/3 


Box (pcs) 

H5881/3 – 85 

for welding transformer windings 

switching over 

32 3 1/64 

63 3 1/48 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

492205 LW26 - 20 YH5/3 YH5/3 - 66 for voltage switching 

over 

20 3 1/72 

154 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

492206 LW26 - 20 LH3/3 LH3/3 - 58 for ampere meter 

switching on to current 

transformers 

20 3 1/100 

Catalogue number Type Scheme IP code: Packing/ Box (pcs) 

492037 LW26 - 20-25-Q Box for LW26-20/25 IP 42 1/68 

492038 LW26 - 32-Q Box for LW26-32 IP 42 1/30 

492039 LW26 - 20-25-DIN Adaptor for DIN-rail 

for LW26-20/25 

15/1500 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

492028 LW26 4.I7168/7 4.I7168/7 20 7 1/100 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

155


Catalogue 

number 

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

492029 LW26 4.H6518/5 4.H6518/5 25 5 1/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Scheme In (A) Levels Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

492030 LW30-20 LW30-20 20 3 1 / 32 

492031 LW30-32 LW30-32 32 3 1 / 32 

492033 LW30-40 LW30-40 40 3 1 / 32 

492034 LW30-63 LW30-63 63 3 1 / 32 

* Note: Possibility for access control 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Scheme IP code: In (A) Levels Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

492032 LW30-32 LW30-32 IP54 32 3 1 / 30 

* Note: Possibility for access control 

156 

ELMARK 


BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS 





These are devices used in control and indication systems, command boards and panels in 

industrial automation systems. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to 

control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal 

lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short time 

current overload up to 10A, and normally they can commutate thermal current up to 6A in their 

contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which 

operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm² can be joined. 


• Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz 

• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; 

• Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC) 

• Short circuit protection: safety device 

10A gG outside in the circuit 

• Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commutation 

cycles 

• Power of mechanical compression: 

MOUNTING 

• to a flat metal or plastic surface with thickness: 

max 4mm 

• opening with size: Ø 22.5mm5mm 

‣ at closing: 20N 

‣ at opening: 8N 

• Operating temperature: -20 - +65°C 


• Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 

0.15Nm 

• Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 

1x1.5; 1x2.5mm² 

AUTOMATION | BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS 

BUTTON ROUND WITH SPRING REVERSE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of contacts Rated current (A) Colour 

at 400V 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401025 EL-EA25 NO+NC 6 Black 10/500 

401030 EL-EA31 NO 6 Green 10/500 

401040 EL-EA42 NC 6 Red 10/500 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

BUTTON ROUND WITH SPRING REVERSE AND SILICON LID- IP44 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of contacts Rated current 

(A) at 400V 

Colour 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401026 EL-EA25 NO+NC 6 Black 10/500 

401033 EL-EA31 NO 6 Green 10/500 

401041 EL-EA42 NC 6 Red 10/500 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

157


SWITCH WITH ARREST 

Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Type of 

contacts 

Type of contacts Rated 

current (A) 

at 400V 

BUTTON WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE 

Rated current 

(A) at 230V 

Colour 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

401546 EL-2211T 1NO+1NC 5 Red 22 20/800 

Material: Stainless steel | Chromium plated brass | IP65 

* Note: release with spinning 

Colour 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401425 EL-ED25 NO+NC 6 Black 10/500 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

ROUND BUTTONS WITH LED INDICATOR- LATCHING 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of 

contacts 

Rated current 

(A) at 230V 


Colour 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

401547 EL-2211DZR 1NO+1NC 5 Red 22 20/800 

401548 EL-2211DZG 1NO+1NC 5 Green 22 20/800 

ROUND MOMENTARY BUTTON 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


(A) at 230V 


Diameter (mm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

401549 EL-2211F 1NO+1NC 5 22 20/800 

158 

ELMARK 


TWO POSITION SWITCH WITH ARREST 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of 

contacts 

Rated current 

(A) at 230V 

Colour 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

401550 EL-22X2 1NO+1NC 5 Red 22 20/800 


* Note: release with spinning 

TWO POSITION KEY SWITCHES WITH ARREST 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of 

contacts 

Rated current 

(A) at 230V 


Colour 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401551 EL-22Y2 1NO+1NC 5 Red 22 20/800 

401552 EL-22Y3 2NO+2NC 5 Green 22 20/800 


TOGGLE SWITCH ON-OFF SPST 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Voltage (V) Rated current LED colour 

(A) 

• Function: ON/OF 

• Leads: 3 

• Mounting hole diameter - 12 mm 

• Toggle height - 27 mm 

• Operating temperature: up - 25 ºC to + 85 ºC 

Dimensions 

(mm) 

M519114 ASW-13 12 VDC 20 Red 30.5х13.5x22 1 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

*Warranty: 2 years 

SWITCH ON-OFF 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Voltage (V) Rated current Colour 

(A) 


Dimensions 

(mm) 

M300001 V 144/B 250 VAC 5 White 26.2x12x14.5 1 

• Function: ON/OFF 

• Leads: 3 

• Mounting hole: 29x11 mm 

• Operating temperature: up to 105°C 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

159


LED INDICATORS 

Catalogue number Type Voltage (V) Colour Packing / Box (pcs) 

401123 AD56-22-W-230 230V AC White 10 / 500 

401111 AD56-22-W-110 110V AC White 10 / 500 

401124 AD56-22-W-24 24V AC/DC White 10 / 500 

401211 AD56-22-A-110 110V AC Amber 10 / 500 

401224 AD56-22-A-24 24V AC/DC Amber 10 / 500 

401223 AD56-22-A-230 230V AC Amber 10 / 500 

401323 AD56-22-РG-230 230V AC Green 10 / 500 

401311 AD56-22-РG-110 110V AC Green 10 / 500 

401324 AD56-22-РG-24 24V AC/DC Green 10 / 500 

401523 AD56-22-B-230 230V AC Blue 10 / 500 

401511 AD56-22-B-110 110V AC Blue 10 / 500 

401524 AD56-22-B-24 24V AC/DC Blue 10 / 500 

401723 AD56-22-Y-230 230V AC Yellow 10 / 500 

401711 AD56-22-Y-110 110V AC Yellow 10 / 500 

401724 AD56-22-Y-24 24V AC/DC Yellow 10 / 500 

401423 AD56-22-R-230 230V AC Red 10 / 500 

401411 AD56-22-R-110 110V AC Red 10 / 500 

401424 AD56-22-R-24 24V AC/DC Red 10 / 500 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

ROUND BUTTONS WITH SPRING REVERSE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


(A) at 400V 

Colour 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401021 EL 2- BA 21 NO 6 Black 20 / 300 

401031 EL 2- BA 31 NO 6 Green 20 / 300 

401051 EL 2- BA 51 NO 6 Yellow 20 / 300 

401061 EL 2- BA 61 NO 6 Blue 20 / 300 

401042 EL 2- BA 42 NC 6 Red 20 / 300 

ROUND BUTTONS SWITH SPRING REVERSE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

*Note: IP65 - Provided from silicon lid 


(A) at 400V 

Colour 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401032 EL 2- BР 31 NO 6 Green 20 / 300 

401043 EL 2- BР 42 NC 6 Red 20 / 300 

160 

ELMARK 


ROUND BUTTONS WITH SPRING REVERSE AND LED INDICATOR 

Catalogue 

number 

SWITCHES WITH ARREST 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type Voltage (V) Rated current 

(A) at 400V 

Type of 

contacts 

Rated current 

(A) at 400V 

Colour 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401474 EL 2- BW3471 24V 6 Red 20 / 200 

401374 EL 2- BW3371 24V 6 Green 20 / 200 

401574 EL 2- BW3571 24V 6 Yellow 20 / 200 

401674 EL 2- BW3671 24V 6 Blue 20 / 200 

401473 EL 2- BW3471 110V 6 Red 20 / 200 

401373 EL 2- BW3371 110V 6 Green 20 / 200 

401573 EL 2- BW3571 110V 6 Yellow 20 / 200 

401673 EL 2- BW3671 110V 6 Blue 20 / 200 

401471 EL 2- BW3471 230V 6 Red 20 / 200 

401371 EL 2- BW3371 230V 6 Green 20 / 200 

401571 EL 2- BW3571 230V 6 Yellow 20 / 200 

401671 EL 2- BW3671 230V 6 Blue 20 / 200 

Colour Note Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401421 EL 2- BD 21 1NO 6 Black Two-positions 20 / 200 

401433 EL 2- BD 33 2NО 6 Black Three-positions 20 / 200 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

BUTTONS WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE AND WITH KEY 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of 

contacts 

Rated current 

(A) at 400V 


(pcs) 

401142 EL2-BS 142 NC 6 Red Release with 

spinning 

15/150 

BUTTONS WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of 

contacts 

Rated current 

(A) at 400V 


(pcs) 

401642 EL 2- BC 42 1NC 6 Red Spring reverse 15 / 150 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

161


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

BUTTON WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

*Note: release with spinning 

Type of 

contacts 

Rated current 

(A) at 400V 

Colour 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

401545 EL 2- BS 545 1NC + 1NO 6 Red 15 /150 

CHANGE-OVER SWITCH WITH KEY 

Catalogue number Type 

*Note: two-position with switch 

Type of 

contacts 

Rated current (A) 

at 400V 

401121 EL 2- BG 21 1NO 6 20/200 

DOUBLE BUTTONS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of 

contacts 

*Note: Green and red button + LED indicator 

Rated current 

(A) at 400V 

Voltage (V) 


Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

401844 EL 2- BW8475 1NO+1NC 6 24 AC 20/200 

401845 EL 2-BW8475 1NO+1NC 6 230 AC 20/200 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type of 

contacts 

Colour 


401001 EL02 - BЕ101 1 NO Green 100/1000 

401002 EL02 - BЕ102 1 NC Red 100/1000 

GLIM INDICATOR LAMP 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Voltage (V) Dimensions 

(mm) 


Base diameter 

(mm) 

M030015 EL-1035 220 VAC 10x30 10 1 

• Shape and color of the indicator - oval, red 

• Case colour: red 

• Conductor length: 20mm 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

162 

ELMARK 


DIN-RAIL BUTTONS AND LED INDICATORS 




EN 60 947-5-1 t 

These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command 

boards and panels directly on DIN-rail. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits 

and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The 

signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short 

time current overload up to 20A, and normally they can commutate current up to 10A with their 

contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which 

operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm² can be joined. There are also designed buttons 

combined with lamps. 


• Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz 

• Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; 

• Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC) 

• Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG 

outside in the circuit 

• Rated consumed current (for indicators and 

buttons combined with indicators): 2000h 

• Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 

commutation cycles 

• Power of mechanical compression: 

‣ At closing: 20N 

‣ At opening: 8N 

• Operating temperature: -20 - +65°C 


• Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 

0.15Nm 


1x1.5; 1x2.5mm² 

• Plastic: UV rays wear resistance conductors: 

0.15Nm 


1x1.5; 1x2.5mm² 

MOUNTING 

• To a DIN-rail 



Catalogue 

number 

Type Description Voltage (V) Rated current 

(A) at 400V 

Colour 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

401559 ELD-RG-DIN Lamp 230V


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

BUTTONS AND SWITCHES WITH BOX 

SWITCHING ON 0-1 

Catalogue 

number 

Type IP code Overall dimensions (mm) Type 

L H W of the 

contact 

1 BUTTON WITH SPRING RETURN 

2 BUTTONS WITH SPRING RETURN 

Colour 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

401134 EL1-B134 IP44 68 68 50 1 NO Black 1/100 

Catalogue 

number 


L H W of the 

contact 

Colour 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

401102 EL1-B102 IP44 68 68 50 1 NO Green 1/100 

401132 EL1-BP102 IP65 68 68 50 1 NO Green 1/100 

Catalogue 

number 


L H W of the 

contact 

401213 EL1-B213 IP44 104 68 50 1 NC 

1 NO 

401233 EL1-BP213 IP65 104 68 50 1 NC 

1 NO 

Colour 

1 - Red 

1 - Green 

1 - Red 

1 - Green 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

1/100 

1/100 

3 BUTTONS WITH SPRING RETURN 

Catalogue 

number 

Type IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type 

L H W of the 

contact 

401339 EL1-B339 IP44 134 68 50 1 NO 

1 NC 

1 NO 

401349 EL1-BP339 IP65 134 68 50 1 NO 

1 NC 

1 NO 

Colour 

1 - Green 

1 - Red 

1 - Green 

1 - Green 

1 - Red 

1 - Green 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

1/50 

1/50 

EMERGENCY BUTTON WITH HEAD “MUSHROOM” TYPE Ø40 

Catalogue 

number 

Type IP code: Overall dimensions (mm) Type 

L H W of the 

contact 

• Release through turning 

Colour Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

401174 EL1-B174 IP44 68 68 50 1 NC Red 1 / 100 

164 

ELMARK 


DEVICES FOR TELPHER CONTROL MBP TYPE 

МBР-Aхххх 

stop button type 

button type: 

one-speed (x81) 

or two-speed (x91) 

number of buttons 

They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in 

different sizes. They are connected to the operating circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as 

a remote control of their movement. They are connected directly to the operating cable of the 

telpher and send commands directly to the executive mechanisms. They are designed to provide 

protection from dust and moisture IP65. 


• Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz 

• Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles 

• Operating temperature: -10 +65°C 


• Number of contacts: according to the 

number of the buttons 

MOUNTING 

• directly to the control cable of the telpher 

(crane) 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

• Commuting capacity: up to 6A 



• Weight: according to the number of the 

contacts 

Number of Contact block and scheme Packing / 

buttons Emergency For the 

directions 

Box (pcs) 

46281 MBP-A281 2 - NO+NC 1/20 

46291 MBP-A291 two speed 2 - NO+NC 1/20 

46283 MBP-A2813 2+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20 

46283K MBP-A2813К 2+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20 

with switch 

46294 MBP-A2913 two speed 2+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20 

46294K МBР-A2913К two speed 2+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20 

with switch 

46481 MBP-A481 4 - NO+NC 1/20 



46483K MBP-A4813К 4+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20 

with switch 



with switch 

46681 MBP-A681 6 - NO+NC 1/20 



46683K MBP-A6813K 6+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20 

with switch 



with switch 

46881 MBP-A881 8 - NO+NC 1/20 



46883K MBP-A8813K 8+1 Emergency button NO+NC 1/20 

with switch 


46893K МBР-8913К two speed 8+1 Emergency button 

with switch 

NO+NC 1/20 

AUTOMATION | DEVICES FOR TELPHER CONTROL 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

165

AUTOMATION | DEVICES FOR TELPHER CONTROL 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS 

The revolving warning lights and towers are devices intended for use as status indicators in 

the human-machine control systems. They are suitable for installation on control cabinets and 

panels or directly on machines. They are manufactured in different colour combinations to attract 

attention of operators working in a given production sector. Warning lights and towers are widely 

used in almost any industrial branch. They can be mounted on movable components or such, 

creating potential danger and can warn all workers for a critical situation with their blinking light 

and siren. These devices are electrically connected through cables, protruding out of the lamp 

casing. 


• Rated voltage: 12 VAC/230VAC; 50/60 Hz; 

• Isolation voltage: 660V; 50/60 Hz; 

• Impulse voltage stability: 6000V 

• Rated power: see the tables below 

• Short circuit protection: 1A gG external fuse 

• Operating Temperature: - 20°C + 65°C 

INSTALLATION 

• Warning lights are fixed to the respective 

machine body with the studs protruding from 

the light plastic casing. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Description Voltage 

(VAC) 


• Plastic cover: UV resistant polycarbonate not 

considered as being harmful to human health 

Rated 

Power 

(W) 

Colour Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

401525R LTE1101 - R Warning light 12 10 Red 1 / 30 

401525G LTE1101 - G Warning light 12 10 Green 1 / 30 

401525Y LTE1101 - Y Warning light 12 10 Yellow 1 / 30 

401526R LTE1101J - R Warning light + siren 12 11 Red 1 / 30 

401526G LTE1101J - G Warning light + siren 12 11 Green 1 / 30 

401526Y LTE1101J - Y Warning light + siren 12 11 Yellow 1 / 30 




402526R LTE1101J - R Warning light + siren 230 9 Red 1 / 30 

402526G LTE1101J - G Warning light + siren 230 9 Green 1 / 30 

402526Y LTE1101J - Y Warning light + siren 230 9 Yellow 1 / 30 







401528 LTA205 - 1 Tower / flashing 12 4 1 - Red 1 / 20 

401529 LTA205 - 2 Tower / flashing 12 8 2 - Red/Green 1 / 20 

401530 LTA205 - 3 Tower / flashing 12 12 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20 

401531 LTA205 - 3J Tower / flashing + 12 12 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20 

siren 

401532 LTA205 - 5 Tower / flashing 12 18 5 - Red/Yellow/Green/ 1 / 20 

Blue/Transparent 

402528 LTA205 - 1 Tower / flashing 230 6 1 - Red 1 / 20 

402529 LTA205 - 2 Tower / flashing 230 8 2 - Red/Green 1 / 20 

402530 LTA205 - 3 Tower / flashing 230 10 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20 

402531 LTA205 - 3J Tower / flashing + 230 11 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 1 / 20 

siren 

402532 LTA205 - 5 Tower / flashing 230 14 5 - Red/Yellow/Green/ 

Blue/Transparent 

1 / 20 

166 

ELMARK 


METAL/PLASTIC SIREN 

Catalogue 

number 

SIREN 

Type Voltage (V) Rated Power 

(W) 

Sound level 

(dB) 

Material 

401533 MS-290A 230 60 100 Metal 1/24 

401541 MS-290B 230 60 100 Plastic 1/24 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Voltage (V) Rated Power 

(W) 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

Sound level (dB) Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

401534 MS-390 230 160 120 1 / 10 

AUTOMATION | WARNING LIGHTS AND TOWERS 

ALARM BELLS 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue number Type Voltage (V) Sound level (dB) Packing / Box (pcs) 

401535 CB-4 12 85 1 / 50 

401536 CB-4 24 85 1 / 50 

401537 CB-4 110 85 1 / 50 

401538 CB-4 230 85 1 / 50 

FIRE ALARM 

Catalogue number Type Voltage (V) Sound level (dB) Packing / Box (pcs) 

401540 FA-01 230 120 1 / 100 


page 168: 

BG 

BA 


Sl 

SK 

167

AUTOMATION CATEGORY 

Select a language and scan the code with any code scanner to read the catalog in: 

AUTOMATION 

BG 

BA 

CR 

DE 

EL 

FR 

HU IT RO 

RS 

SI 

SK 

168

INSTALLATION 

• Industrial plugs and sockets 

• Industrial boards 

• Modular distribution enclosures 

• Distribution boards 

• Cable insulation systems 

• Cable trunking 

• Insulating conduits & Cable support systems 

• Lighting protection 

• Distribution boxes 

• Cable terminals & Cable accessories 

• Ex-proof installation systems 

• Reels, multi-plugs & accessories 

• Cables

INSTALLATION | PLUGS AND SOCKETS 

INDUSTRIAL PLUGS HT/HTN TYPE 


product: 

Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2 

Made of special high quality plastic with alloys against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing 

the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard EN 60309 and 

provide reliable connection 

and high protection level against electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 

44/67. They are 

designed for surface or flush mounting, movable or fixed type. 




mounted protection in the boards 



• IP code: IP 44/67 




• Plugs and sockets: 6h 

Catalogue 

number 

Model In (A) Poles Un (V) Dimensions 

(mm) 

IP code Packing/ 

Box 

A B C 

37013 HT-013 16 1P+N+E 230 121 84 53 44 2/10/100 

37023 HT-023 32 1P+N+E 230 138 92 63 44 2/10/60 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 


Box 

A B C 

37014 HT-014 16 3P+E 400 121 84 51 44 2/10/100 

37024 HT-024 32 3P+E 400 138 92 63 44 2/10/60 

37034 HT-034 63 3P+E 400 230 109 36 44 2/10 

37044 HT-044 125 3P+E 400 295 124 50 44 2/10 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 


Box 

A B C 

37015 HT-015 16 3P+N+E 400 129 92 62 44 2/10/60 

37025 HT-025 32 3P+N+E 400 149 97 70 44 2/10/60 

37035 HT-035 63 3P+N+E 400 230 109 36 44 2/10 

37045 HT-045 125 3P+N+E 400 295 124 50 44 2/10 

170 

ELMARK 

Download BUSINESS APP from www.elmarkholdimg.eu or for mobile from or

MOVABLE INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS HT TYPE IP44 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37213 HT-213 16 1P+N+E 230 130 96 44 2/10/100 

37223 HT-223 32 1P+N+E 230 149 90 44 2/10/60 


Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37214 HT-214 16 3P+E 400 131 96 44 2/10/100 

37224 HT-224 32 3P+E 400 149 90 44 2/10/60 

37234 HT-234 63 3P+E 400 230 109 44 2/10 

37244 HT-244 125 3P+E 400 290 124 44 2/10 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37215 HT-215 16 3P+N+E 400 139 90 44 2 / 10 / 60 

37225 HT-225 32 3P+N+E 400 154 100 44 2 / 10 / 60 

37235 HT-235 63 3P+N+E 400 230 100 44 2 / 10 

37245 HT-245 125 3P+N+E 400 290 124 44 2 / 10 

ELMARK 

Download BUSINESS APP from www.elmarkholdimg.eu or for mobile from or 

171


FIXED INDUSTRIAL PLUGS HT TYPE IP44 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37513 HT-513 16 1P+N+E 230 121 79 44 2/10/60 

37523 HT-523 32 1P+N+E 230 131 83 44 2/10/60 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37514 HT 514 16 3P+E 400 121 76 44 2/10/60 

37524 HT 524 32 3P+E 400 131 83 44 2/10/60 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37515 HT 515 16 3P+N+E 400 123 79 44 2/10/60 

37525 HT 525 32 3P+N+E 400 132 84 44 2/10/60 

172 

ELMARK 


FIXED INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS HT TYPE IP44 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37113 HT-113 16 1P+N+E 230 126 86 44 2/10/60 

37123 HT-123 32 1P+N+E 230 141 97 44 2/10/60 


Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37114 HT-114 16 3P+E 400 132 91 44 2/10/60 

37124 HT-124 32 3P+E 400 141 96 44 2/10/60 

37134 HT-134 63 3P+E 400 193 122 44 2/10 

37144 HT-144 125 3P+E 400 220 140 44 2/10 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37115 HT-115 16 3P+N+E 400 129 96 44 2/10/60 

37125 HT-125 32 3P+N+E 400 141 98 44 2/10/60 

37135 HT-135 63 3P+N+E 400 193 122 44 2/10 

37145 HT-145 125 3P+N+E 400 220 140 44 2/10 

ELMARK 


173


MOVABLE INDUSTRIAL PLUGS HTN TYPE IP67 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

A B C 

37131 HTN 0131 16 1P+N+E 230 120 71 12 67 1 / 60 

37231 HTN 0231 32 1P+N+E 230 150 93 17 67 1 / 40 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A B C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37141 HTN 0141 16 3P+E 400 125 79 12 67 2/60 

37241 HTN 0241 32 3P+E 400 150 93 17 67 2/40 

37341 HTN 0341 63 3P+E 400 230 109 36 67 10 

37441 HTN 0441 125 3P+E 400 230 109 36 67 10 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A B C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37151 HTN 0151 16 3P+N+E 400 133 87 12 67 2/60 

37251 HTN 0251 32 3P+N+E 400 155 99.5 17 67 2/40 

37351 HTN 0351 63 3P+N+E 400 230 109 36 67 10 

37451 HTN 0451 125 3P+N+E 400 295 124 50 67 10 

174 

ELMARK 


MOVABLE INDUSTRIAL SOCKET HTN TYPE IP67 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37831 HTN 2131 16 1P+N+E 230 131 90 67 2/60 

37931 HTN 2231 32 1P+N+E 230 149 90 67 2/40 


Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37841 HTN 2141 16 3P+E 400 131 76 67 2/60 

37941 HTN 2241 32 3P+E 400 149 90 67 2/40 

37942 HTN 2341 63 3P+E 400 271 115 67 10 

37943 HTN 2441 125 3P+E 400 295 137 67 6 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

A C 

IP code 

Packing/ 

Box 

37851 HTN 2151 16 3P+N+E 400 139 90 67 2/60 

37951 HTN 2251 32 3P+N+E 400 154 100 67 2/40 

37952 HTN 2351 63 3P+N+E 400 240 112 67 10 

37953 HTN 2451 125 3P+N+E 400 300 126 67 6 

ELMARK 


175


FIXED INDUSTRIAL SOCKET HTN TYPE IP67 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 


Box 

A B C 

37731 HTN 1131 16 1P+N+E 230 101 150 93.5 67 2/40 

37631 HTN 1231 32 1P+N+E 230 114 162 93.5 67 2/40 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 


Box 

A B C 

37741 HTN 1141 16 3P+E 400 104 150 93.5 67 2/40 

37641 HTN 1241 32 3P+E 400 116 162 93.5 67 2/40 

37842 HTN 1341 63 3P+E 400 171 170 230 67 1/10 

37844 HTN 1441 125 3P+E 400 171 170 230 67 1/6 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 


Box 

A B C 

37751 HTN 1151 16 3P+N+E 400 107 150 93.5 67 2/40 

37651 HTN 1251 32 3P+N+E 400 116 162 93.5 67 2/40 

37852 HTN 1351 63 3P+N+E 400 171 170 230 67 10 

37854 HTN 1451 125 3P+N+E 400 171 170 230 67 6 

176 

ELMARK 


INDUSTRIAL SOCKETS FOR FLUSH MOUNTING HT TYPE IP44 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 


Box 

A B C 

37413 HT-413 16 1P+N+E 230 70 60 67 44 2/10/60 

37423 HT-423 32 1P+N+E 230 80 95 79 44 2/10/60 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 


Box 

A B C 

37414 HT-414 16 3P+E 400 75 86 75 44 2/10/60 

37424 HT-424 32 3P+E 400 80 95 79 44 2/10/60 


Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 


Box 

A B C 

37415 HT-415 16 3P+N+E 400 75 85 70 44 2/10/60 

37425 HT-425 32 3P+N+E 400 98 98 83 44 2/10/60 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm) 

IP code 

A B C 

230 50 63 42 44 500 

37105 HT-105SR 16 German 

type 

Packing/ 

Box 

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET FOR DIN RAIL MOUNTING 

It provides plug presence in electric boards and 

easy cabling. 

• Supply voltage: 230V 

• Computing option: up to 16А 

• Operation temperature: from -10 up to +65°С 

• Humidity: up to 85%RH 

Mounting method: 

• DIN rail 

Catalogue Type Poles Packing / Box 

number 

(pcs) 

37004 German type socket for DIN rail German type 5/100 

ELMARK 


177

INSTALLATION | INDUSTRIAL BOARDS 

INDUSTRIAL BOARD SYSTEM EC690 SERIES 


product: 

Standard IEC60670; CEI 23-48; CEI 23-49; 


Distribution boards 690 series can be safely used for temporary installation such as construction 

sites, markets, fairs, etc. They are entirely made up of UV-resistant halogen free technopolymer on 

ABS- base. They are suitable for outdoor use, thanks to the high impact resistance. The distribution 

boards are fit to use in different options- movable with handle or fixed on the wall. The distribution 

boards are suitable with sockets with mounting flange with screw hole center distance 60x60mm. 


• Material: shock resistant, halogen free technopolymer on ABS base with resistance to UV rays. 

• Colour: grey RAL 7035 


• Resistance to mechanical shock: IK08-IK10(shocks up to 6-20j) 

• Resistance to abnormal heat: up to 650°C( Glow Wire Test, Reference Standard IEC 695-2-1 

• Installation temperature range: min-15°C, max+60°C 

• DIN rail material: galvanized steel 

• Pre-cuts for conduit or cable inlet of different sizes. 

• Standards: IEC60670; CEI 23-48; CEI 23-49; EN 50102 

• RoHS 2002/95/CE 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

178 

ELMARK 


EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES 2 VERTICAL SOCKETS 

Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Number of 

modules 

Number of 

modules 

IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing 

pcs/box 

W H D 

53EC69021 EC69021 4 65 105 337 95 1/15 

EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES 3 VERTICAL SOCKETS 


pcs/box 

W H D 

53EC69022 EC69022 4 65 105 430 95 1/13 


EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES 4 SOCKETS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

modules 


pcs/box 

W H D 

53EC69023 EC69023 8 65 200 430 95 1/10 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

EMPTY DISTRIBUTION BOARD EC690 SERIES 6 SOCKETS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

modules 


pcs/box 

W H D 

53EC69025 EC69025 12 65 320 510 135 1 

* All boards are not compatible with all industrial plugs and sockets we offer. Some of the equipment 

requires additional adaptation, for this we recommend ordering an equipped panel, according to your 

needs, published on the next two pages of the catalog. 

For sockets with 60x60mm hole center distance. 

ELMARK 


179


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES 2 VERTICAL SOCKETS, 

4 MODULES 

Catalogue 

number 

Empty board 

type 

German type 1P+N+E 3P+N 3P+N+E 

53EC690212A1 EC69021 1x16A+1x32A 44 

53EC690212A2 EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 44 

53EC690212A3 EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 44 

53EC690212A4 EC69021 2x16A 44 

53EC690212B1 EC69021 1x16A+1x32A 67 

53EC690212B2 EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 67 

53EC690212B3 EC69021 1x16A 1x16A 67 

• Dimensions W x H x D: 105 x 337 x 95mm 

Catalogue 

number 

Empty board 

type 

IP code 

ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES 3 VERTICAL SOCKETS, 

4 MODULES 

German 

type 

1P+N+E 3P+N 3P+N+E 

53EC690223A1 EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 44 

53EC690223A2 EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44 

53EC690223A3 EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 44 

53EC690223A4 EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44 

53EC690223A5 EC69022 2x16A 1x16A 44 

53EC690223B1 EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 67 

53EC690223B2 EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67 

53EC690223B3 EC69022 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A 67 

53EC690223B4 EC69022 1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67 


IP code 

ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES 4 SOCKETS, 

8 MODULES 

Catalogue 

number 

Empty board 

type 

German 

type 


53EC690234A1 EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 44 

53EC690234A2 EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 44 


53EC690234A4 EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 44 

53EC690234A5 EC69023 2x16A 1x16A+1x32A 44 

53EC690234A6 EC69023 2x16A 1x16A+1x32A 44 

53EC690234B1 EC69023 1x16A+1x32A 1x16A+1x32A 67 

53EC690234B2 EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 67 


53EC690234B4 EC69023 2x32A 2x16A 67 


IP code 

* If you need equipment with items other than those listed in the kits, please contact your sales 

representative or send an inquiry on info@elmarkholding.eu, to prepare an individual offer, according 

to your needs. 

180 

ELMARK 


ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTION BOARD 690 SERIES 6 SOCKETS, 

12 MODULES 

Catalogue 

number 

Empty board 

type 

German 

type 






53EC690256A5 EC69025 3x16A 2x16A+1x32A 44 

53EC690256A6 EC69025 2x16A 1x16A 2x16A+1x32A 44 





Dimensions W x H x D: 320 x 510 x 135mm 

IP code 

* If you need equipment with items other than those listed in the kits, please contact 

your sales representative or send an inquiry on info@elmarkholding.eu, to prepare an 

individual offer, according to your needs. 


SPARE FLANGE WITH SCREWS AND GASKETS 

Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing pcs/ 

number 

W 

H 

box 

53EC690F1 EC690F1 85 74 1/10 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

The flange mounted is used for closing of the factory maid openings,in case there is no switch for 

it at the moment,and assures the necessary IP of the board. Another function is assuring the possibility 

for mounting of great number of additional appliances within assembling the board when 

making a suitable opening in the flange. 

Spare flange with 

mounted limit switch 

Limit switch 

page 153 

Spare flange with 

mounted stop button 

Stop button 

page 161 

HANDLE WITH SCREWS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Dimensions (mm) Packing pcs/ 

box 

W H D 

53EC690MA EC690MA 134 42 25.6 1/10 

It assures a convenience when carrying the board. 

ELMARK 


181

INSTALLATION | DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 

ASSEMBLED MODULAR DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES MATRIX, SERIES 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Enclosure connection system 

(with Nails). 

Helps easier cable entrance 

from under plinth. 

Corner, 4mm thickness for 

much stronger and 

useful for all sizes. 

Vertical profiles set - Top 

stopper for much higher 

sealing. 

182 

ELMARK 


ASSEMBLED MODULAR DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES WITHOUT 

MOUNTING PLATES SET MATRIX, SERIES 

FEATURES 

• Latest moduler system 

• Possibility to dismantled after initial 

assembling 

• Easy montage. Installation in 8 - 10 minute. 

• Base covers can be removed from 4 corners. 

This feature provides ease of transportation 

and assembly. 

• Mounting plate with adjustable depth, 

specially designed for automation 

Catalogue 

number 

MAIN INFORMATION 

• Series: MATRIX 

• Application: Multi-purpose 

• Mounting: Floor-standing 

• Items included in the set 

‣ Vertical profiles, SET 

‣ Tor cover panel 

‣ Front door 

‣ Back panel 

‣ Enclosure ground plint 

‣ Housing for ground mounting 

• Dimensions WxHxD: 

‣ 600x2000x600mm 

‣ 800x2000x600mm 

Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

W H D 

53SET6060 Matrix-600 600 2000 600 1 

53SET8060 Matrix-800 800 2000 600 1 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ASSEMBLED MODULAR DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES WITHOUT 

MOUNTING PLATES, INCLUDED IN THE SET: 

53SET6060 

‣ 53DPT200: DPT-Vertical profiles 2000 (mm): 1 set 

‣ 53UKT6060: UKT- top panel set for 600x2000x600 (mm): 1 set 

‣ 53OKT60200: OKT- Front door for 600x2000x600 (mm): 1 set 

‣ 53SKT60200: SKT- Side/back panel SET for 600X2000 (mm)- 1 set 

‣ 53BTZ6060: BZT- Housing for ground mounting 600X2000X600: 1 set 

53SET8060 

‣ 53DPT200: DPT-Vertical profiles 2000 (mm): 1 set 

‣ 53UKT8060: UKT- top panel set for 800x2000x600 (mm): 1 set 

‣ 53OKT80200: OKT- Front door for 800x2000x600 (mm): 1 set 

‣ 53SKT80200: SKT- Back panel SET for 800X2000 (mm)- 1 set 

‣ 53BTZ8060: BZT- Housing for ground mounting 800X2000X600: 1 set 

ELMARK 

Download BUSINESS APP from www.elmarkholding.eu or for mobile from or 

183


DPT- VERTICAL PROFILES, SET 

Catalogue Type Length (mm) QTY in the SET Packing/SET 

number 

53DPT200 DPT-2000 2000 4 1 

UKT- TOP PANELS, SET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ SET 

W 

D 

53UKT6060 UKT-600 600 600 1 

53UKT8060 UKT-800 800 600 1 

• The set includes: Panel and all fixing elements 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

SKT- SIDE AND BACK PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 


H 

W 

53SKT60200 SKT-600 2000 600 1 

53SKT80200 SKT-800 2000 800 1 

• Panel with dimensions 600x2000mm is suitable for side and 

back cover for enclosures with width of 600mm 

• Panel with dimensions 800x2000mm is suitable only for back 

cover for enclosures with width of 800mm 

• The set includes: Panel and all fixing elements 

APPLICABLE 

AREA 

W/D-100 

W/D-4 

SIDE PANEL 

184 

ELMARK 


BZT- HOUSING (PLINTH) FOR GROUND MOUNTING 

Catalogue 

number 


W 

H 

53BTZ6060 BZT-600 600 600 1 

53BTZ8060 BZT-800 800 600 1 


AOT- BOTTOM PLATE SET 

Catalogue 

number 


W 

D 

53AOT6060 АОT-600 600 600 1 

53AOT8060 АОT-800 800 600 1 

• The set includes all needed elements and fixing accessories: 

‣ Bottom plate rail; 

‣ Bottom plate corner; 

‣ Bottom plate brushes. 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Bottom plate rail and Itself can 

be put on enclosure anytime. 

Bottom Plate Corner Plastic can be 

attached after assembly. 

Bottom Plate Brushes can be 

added after assembly. 

ELMARK 


185


MPT- MOUNTING PLATE SET 

Catalogue 


Packing/ 

number 

Type W H SET 

53MPT60200 MPT-600 600 2000 1 

53MPT80200 MPT-800 800 2000 1 

• The set includes: 

‣ Mounting plate; 

‣ Fixing accessories. 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

1 

MPR- MOUNTING PLATE RAIL SET 

Catalogue 

Type Depth (mm) Packing/ SET 

number 

53MPR60 MPR-600 600 1 

2 

MPR - Mounting Plate Fixings 

3 

1 

2 3 

Rail and wheel system makes mounting plate 

installation easier. 

186 

ELMARK 


MAT- MIDDLE CONNECTION PLATE 

Catalogue 

Type Height (mm) Packing/ SET 

number 

53MAT200 MAT-2000 2000 1 


‣ Middle connection plate; 

‣ Fixing accessories for fastening. 

MAT- Middle Connection Plate Fixings 


1 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

1 

2 

2 

ELMARK 


187


ОТT- AUTOMATION MOUNTING PLATES 

Catalogue 

number 


W 

H 

53OTT60200 OTT-600 600 2000 1 

53OTT80200 OTT-800 800 2000 1 


‣ Automation mounting plate; 

‣ Fixing accessories for fastening. 

OTT- Automation Plate Fixings 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

YBT- HORIZONTAL SPLITTING SET 

Catalogue 

Type Width (mm) Packing/ SET 

number 

53YBT60 YBT-600 600 1 

53YBT80 YBT-800 800 1 


‣ Horizontal splitting element; 


YBT- Horizontal Splitting Fixings 

Side Gaskets for higher protection at the point of connect. 

188 

ELMARK 


DBT- VERTICAL SPLITTING SET 

Catalogue 


number 

53DBT200 DBT-2000 2000 1 


‣ Vertical splitting element; 


DBT- Vertical Splitting Fixing Sets 


Gaskets for higher protection and tightness at the point of connect. 

PPT- COVER PLATE MOUNTING SET 

Catalogue 

number 


W 

H 

53PPT60200 PPT-600 600 2000 1 

53PPT80200 PPT-800 800 2000 1 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 


‣ Cover plate; 


PPT - Cover Plate Mounting Set 

ELMARK 


189


PWT- Cover plate for MCB’s 

PWT- COVER PLATES FOR 24/36 MODULES, SET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

modules 

W 


H 

53PWT6020 PWT-600 24 600 200 1 

53PWT8020 PWT-800 36 800 200 1 




Special design locking system for cover plates. 

Packing/ SET 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

PRT- Blank cover plate set 

PRT- COVER PLATES, SET 

Catalogue 

number 


W 

H 

53PRT6020 PRT-600/200 600 200 1 

53PRT8020 PRT-800/200 800 200 1 

53PRT6050 PRT-600/500 600 500 1 

53PRT8050 PRT-800/500 800 500 1 




Special design locking system for cover plates. 

190 

ELMARK 


Rail Fixing Set 

RAT- DIN RAIL FIXING, SET 

Catalogue 


number 

53RAT60 RAT-600 600 1 

53RAT80 RAT-800 800 1 


‣ DIN rail; 



DAT- DEPTH ADJUSTMENT, SET 

Catalogue 

Type Length (mm) Packing/ SET 

number 

53DAT12 DAT-12 149 1 

53DAT22 DAT-22 249 1 


‣ Depth adjustment element; 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

DAT- Depth Adjustment Set 

ELMARK 


191


TDT- INTERNAL VERTICAL CARRIER PROFILE, SET 

Catalogue 


number 

53TDT200 TDT-2000 2000 1 


‣ Internal profile; 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

AET- HEAVY EQUIPMENT, SET 

Catalogue 


number 

53AET60 AET-600 600 1 

53AET80 AET-800 800 1 


‣ Internal profile; 


KTT- CABLE FIXING, SET 

Catalogue number Type Width (mm) Packing/ SET 

53KTT60 KTT-600 600 1 

53KTT80 KTT-800 800 1 


‣ Cable fixing element; 


192 

ELMARK 


ATT-1 SINGLE LIFTING LUG, SET 

Catalogue 

number 


W H D 

53ATT001 ATT-1 75 65 50 1 


‣ Single lifting lug; 


ATT-2 DOUBLE LIFTING LUG, SET 

Catalogue 

number 


W H D 

53ATT002 ATT-2 160 65 50 1 


‣ Double lifting lug; 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

CMT- DRAWER MODULE, SET 

Catalogue number Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ SET 

W 

D 

53CMT6060 CMT-600 600 600 1 

53CMT8060 CMT-800 800 600 1 


‣ Drawer module; 


ELMARK 


193


LPT- LAPTOP TABLES, SET 

Catalogue 

Type 

Dimensions (mm) Packing/ SET 

number 

W 

53LPT60 LPT-600 600 1 

53LPT80 LPT-800 800 1 


‣ Laptop table; 

‣ Additional accessories. 

LPT - Laptop table set 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

194 

ELMARK 


UHT- ROOF VENTILATION, SET 

Catalogue number Type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ SET 

W 

D 

53UHT6060 UHT-600 600 600 1 

53UHT8060 UHT-800 800 600 1 


‣ Ventilation roof; 

‣ Additional accessories. 

OKT- BLANK FRONT DOORS 

Catalogue 

number 


W 

H 

53OKT60200 OKT-600 600 2000 1 

53OKT80200 OKT-800 800 2000 1 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

ELMARK 


195


ACCESSORIES FOR MODULAR DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURES 

MECHANICAL THERMOSTAT FOR HEATERS 




• Temperature setting range: 0-60°C 

• Type of switch function: NC 

• Contact type: Snap action 

• Colour of potentiometer: Red 

• Sensor type: Bi-metal 

• Electrical connection: 2-Pole terminal 

• Material: UL94 V0 ABS flame retardant 



• Mounting: On DIN rail 

• Installation position: Variable 

• Sizes (HxWxD): 61x34x38 mm 

Catalogue Rated 

Contact Temperature Potentiometer Packing/ 

number current (A) function range (C°) colour Box 

53300 10 NC 0-60° Red 1 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

2 standard 

1 extended 

MECHANICAL THERMOSTAT FOR FANS 





• Type of switch function: NO 


• Colour of potentiometer: Blue 

• Sensor type: Bimetal 











53301 10 NO 0-60° Blue 1 

196 

ELMARK 


DUAL THERMOSTAT FOR FANS 





• Type of switch function: NC+NO 


• Colour of potentiometer: Red + Blue 

• Sensor type: Bi-metal 











53302 10 NC+NO 0-60° Red+Blue 1 


MECHANICAL HYGROSTAT 


• Setting range: 10-90% RH 

• Colour of potentiometer: Black 

• Sensor type: Polyamide ribbon 

• Differential: 5% 






YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

2 standard 

1 extended 


Humidity 

Potentiometer Packing/ 

number 

current (A) range (% RH) colour 

Box 

53303 5 10-90 Black 1 

ELMARK 


197


PTC SLIM HEATERS 


• Rated voltage: 100-250V AC/DC 

• Heating element type: PTC resistor, self regulating 

• Over current protection: Electronic thermal overload 


• Protection class: II 



• Radiator: Aluminum profile, anodized 


• Installation position: Best efficiency in vertical position 

Catalogue 

number 

Power 

(W) 

Rated 

current (A) 


H W D 

53318 30 2 148 80 27 1 

53319 50 2 148 80 27 1 

53320 100 4 166 80 27 1 

Packing/ 

Box 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

2 standard 

1 extended 

FANS WITH FILTERS 


• Rated voltage: 250V AC, 50/60Hz 

• Over current protection: Impedance 

• Electrical connection: Lead wire 

• IP Degree: IP54 


• Flow direction: Outside-in 

• Plastic material: UL94 V0 ABS flame retardant 

• RAL: 7035 

• Mounting: via clips (fast clip on) 

Catalogue 

number 

Power 

(W) 

Air flow 

rate (m³/h) 

Current 

consumption 

(A) 

Noise 

level (bB) 


H W D 

53314 14 30 0.08 28 120 120 58.5 1 

53315 26 100 0.14 42 160 160 69 1 

53316 26 125 0.14 42 210 210 98 1 

53317 37 240 0.23 52 260 260 103 1 

Packing/ 

Box 

198 

ELMARK 


FILTERS 


• IP Degree: IP54 


• Plastic material: UL94 V0 ABS flame retardant 

• RAL: 7035 

• Mounting: via clips (fast clip on) 

Catalogue 

number 


H W D 

53310 120 120 20.5 1 

53311 160 160 31 1 

53312 210 210 31 1 

53313 260 260 31 1 

Packing/ 

Box 


YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

2 standard 

1 extended 

ELMARK 


199


COMMUNICATION CABINET RACKS - DATA SERIES 

WALL MOUNT CABINET RACKS, DATA SERIES 

Premium rack enclosure cabinet, DATA series is suitable for quick and easy deployment in secure, 

high-density server, telecommunication and IT networking environments. 


• Material: High quality cold rolled steel 

• Steel thickness: 1.5mm of profiles and 1.0mm 

of others 

• Front door material: tempered glass 

• Door thickness: 5.0mm 

• Colour: Black RAL 9004 

Catalogue 

number 

Wall mounted rack cabinet includes: 

• 1 cabinet 

• 1 layer board 

• 1 bag of nuts and bolts 

• 1 set of universal keys 

NOTE: All cabinets are delivered disassembled. 

Type Layer QTY Dimensions (mm) 

L H W 

53350 Wall mount cabinet rack 4U 1 300 226 95 




YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

2 standard 

1 extended 

FREE STANDING CABINET RACK, DATA SERIES 

Premium rack enclosure cabinet, DATA series is suitable for quick and easy deployment in secure, 

high-density server, telecommunication and IT networking environments. 


• Material: SPCC high quality cold rolled steel 

• Steel thickness: 1.5mm of profiles and 1.0mm 

of others 

• Front door material: tempered glass 

• Door thickness: 5.0mm 

• Colour: Black RAL 9004 

• Static load: 800kg 


Free standing rack cabinet includes: 

• 1 cabinet 

• 1-3 layer board 

• 1 bag of nuts and bolts 

• 1 set of universal keys 

NOTE: All cabinets are delivered disassembled. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Layer QTY Dimensions (mm) 

L H W 

53354 Free standing cabinet rack 22U 1 600 600 1200 




200 

ELMARK 


LAYERS FOR CABINET RACK, DATA SERIES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

WHEELS FOR CABINET RACK, DATA SERIES 


H 

53358 4U / 9U / 12U 600 450 

53359 15U / 22U / 32U / 42U with cat. number 53356 600 600 

53360 42U with cat. number 53357 600 800 

Bolts and nuts are not included 

Compatible bolt and nut SET: 53362 (1 SET included 1 bolt and 1 nut. For mounting of 1 layer, 

must be used 4 SET’s) 

Catalogue number: 53361 

* Catalogue number included 1 wheel. 

For 1 cabinet must be used 4 PCS 

L 


BOLTS AND NUTS, SET 

Catalogue number: 53362 

THE SET INCLUDES: 

• Bolt - 1 pc. 

• Nut - 1 pc. 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

2 standard 

1 extended 

ELMARK 


201

METAL DISTRIBUTION 

BOARDS AND BOXES

METAL DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING- DELTA SERIES 


product: 


The metal distribution boxes have wide range of application for mounting in buildings under 

construction or new communal objects, offices, shops, house facilities. Inside the box, could be 

mounted circuit elements for protection in the electrical installation. They are made of high quality 

electro-galvanized steel sheet and provide proper prevention from fire. They are shock-proof as 

well. The box is also equipped with zero and ground terminals. 


• Material: High quality electro-galvanized steel 

sheet 

• Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz 

• Single phase: 4; 8; 12; 16 modules 

• Triple phase: 4; 6; 8; 10; 12 modules 

• Steel thickness: 1,0mm 

• MCB mounting design: Din-rail 

• Main switch rated current: MCB125A 

• Mounting type: Surface 

• Colour of body: grey 


• Fire resistance: 960°C/30s 

• Humidity: Max.95% 

• Storage temperature: -40+75°C 

• Specification: CE, ROHS, BS, EN,EIC60439-3 

SINGLE PHASE METAL DISTRIBUTION BOXES, DELTA SERIES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of poles 

Module 

capacity 

Material Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H W 

600104N Delta 1/4 1 4 Metal 226 226 95 1/10 

600108N Delta 1/8 1 8 Metal 298 226 95 1/10 

600112N Delta 1/12 1 12 Metal 370 226 95 1/10 

600116N Delta 1/16 1 16 Metal 442 226 95 1/10 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

THREE PHASE METAL DISTRIBUTION BOXES, DELTA SERIES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of poles 

Module 

capacity 

Material Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H W 

600304N Delta 3/4 3 4 Metal 506 350 105 1/10 

600306N Delta 3/6 3 6 Metal 560 350 105 1/10 

600308N Delta 3/8 3 8 Metal 614 350 105 1/10 

600310N Delta 3/10 3 10 Metal 668 350 105 1/10 

600312N Delta 3/12 3 12 Metal 722 350 105 1/10 

ELMARK 


203


METAL CONSUMER UNITS - ZETA SERIES 


product: 


The metal distribution boxes have wide range of application for mounting in buildings under 

construction or new communal objects, offices, shops, house facilities. Inside the box, could be 

mounted circuit elements for protection in the electrical installation. They are made of high quality 

electro-galvanized steel sheet and provide proper prevention from fire. They are shock-proof as 

well. The box is also equipped with zero and ground terminals. 


• Material: High quality electro-galvanized steel 

sheet 

• Modules: 30; 36; 45; 60; 72 

• Steel thickness: 1,2mm 

• Rated voltage In (A): 100A 


• Colour of body: White RAL7035 

• Colour of door: White RAL7035 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

ways 

Number of 

rows 



• Humidity: Max.95% 

• Storage temperature: -40+75°C 

• Specification: CE, ROHS, EIC60439-3 

METAL CONSUMER UNIT ENCLOSURES, ZETA SERIES 

Material 


L H W 

55030 Zeta 30 30 2 Metal 428 428 110 

55036 Zeta 36 36 2 Metal 482 428 110 

55045 Zeta 45 45 3 Metal 428 578 110 

55060 Zeta 60 60 4 Metal 428 728 110 

55072 Zeta 72 72 4 Metal 482 728 110 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Zero and ground terminals included 

204 

ELMARK 


METAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS JXF SERIES, IP65 


product: 

Standard EN 62208; 

EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3 

Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output 

conductors, grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of 

single steel sheet, treated with decorative powder coating. 


• Rated voltage: up to 1000V 

• Maximum current: up to 1250A 

• Material: steel 

• Mounting plate: Galvanized 

• RAL 7032 

• Coating: powder style painting 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Thickness of 

metal sheet 

(mm) 

MOUNTING 

Nominal 

working 


• Vertically on flat surface 


L H W 

53025 JXF 25/25/15 1.0 80 250 250 150 1 

53026 JXF 25/30/15 1.0 100 300 250 150 1 

53030 JXF 30/25/15 1.0 100 250 300 150 1 

53031 JXF 30/40/20 1.0 160 400 300 200 1 

53040 JXF 40/30/20 1.0 160 300 400 200 1 

53041 JXF 40/50/20 1.2 250 500 400 200 1 

53044 JXF 40/40/20 1.2 250 400 400 200 1 

53050 JXF 50/40/20 1.2 250 400 500 200 1 

53051 JXF 40/60/20 1.2 250 600 400 200 1 

53060 JXF 60/40/20 1.2 250 400 600 200 1 

53066 JXF 60/60/20 1.2 250 600 600 200 1 

53070 JXF 70/50/20 1.2 350 500 700 200 1 

53080 JXF 80/60/25 1.5 400 600 800 250 1 

53100 JXF 100/80/30 1.5 630 800 1000 300 1 

53120 JXF 120/80/30 1.5 630 800 1200 300 1 

53140 JXF 140/80/30 1.5 800 800 1400 300 1 

53188 JXF 180/80/30 1.5 1000 800 1800 300 1 

53180 JXF 180/100/30* 1.5 1250 1000 1800 300 1 

Packing/ 

Box 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Note: *Metal boxes with double door 

ELMARK 


205


STAINLESS STEEL METAL BOARDS SXF SERIES 


product: 

Standard EN 62 208; 


Supplied with a special lock, metal plate for fixing of electrical devices, lid for the input-output 

conductors, grounded dowel pin, gaskets, etc. Option to change the opening direction. Made of 

single stainless steel sheet. 

The mounting plate is treated with anti-corrosion and decorative powder coating. They are used in 

case of special requirements regarding the exposure of corrosion. 



• Maximum current: up to 800A 

• Material: stainless steel 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Thickness of metal 

sheet 

(mm) 

MOUNTING 



L H W 

54025 SXF 25/25/15 1.0 250 250 150 1 

54030 SXF 30/25/15 1.0 250 300 150 1 

54040 SXF 40/30/20 1.0 300 400 200 1 

54050 SXF 50/40/20 1.2 400 500 200 1 

54060 SXF 60/40/20 1.2 400 600 200 1 

54070 SXF 70/50/20 1.2 500 700 200 1 

54080 SXF 80/60/25 1.5 600 800 250 1 

54100 SXF 100/80/30 1.5 800 1000 300 1 

54120 SXF 120/80/30 1.5 800 1200 300 1 

Packing 

/ Box 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

206 

ELMARK 


ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS WITH TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATES 


product: 


EN 60 439-3 

Low Voltage Meter Box Type TEPO 

The company has produced and successfully passed the type-approval procedures for the following 

metal and plastic electric control boxes and boards with ELMARK automation: 

• Tower Mounted Switchgear 

• Low Voltage Meter Box 

• Low Voltage Main Switchboard 

• Distribution Switchboard 

• Power Compensation System 

Low Voltage Main 

Switchboard Type GRT 


Tower Mounted Switchgear Type MTT 

Power Compensation System 

Type CCU 

Distribution Switchboard Type KRSH 

ELMARK 


207

INSTALLATION | DISTRIBUTION BOXES 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE AND FLUSH MOUNTING, IP40 


product: 



product: 


PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING 

MINI SERIES, IP40 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

rows 

Module capacity 

(number of 

devices) 


L H W 

Packing/ 

Box 

60106 Mini 1 1 1 40 150 65 1/120 

60107 Mini 2 1 2 55 150 65 1/84 

60108 Mini 4 1 4 95 150 65 1/48 

PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR FLUSH MOUNTING 

ATTIS SERIES, IP40 

The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in 

reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats 

electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening 

upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature 

with IP code: IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the 

current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for 

the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. 



• Door colour: Transparent 

• Mounting type: Surface;Flush 

• Number of modules: 6; 9; 12; 16; 24; 36 


• Number of rows: 

‣ Single row for 6, 9, 12 and 16 modules 

‣ Double rows for 16; 24 and 36 modules 

• Material: ABS for body and PC for door 


OPEN 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

rows 


(number of 

devices) 


L H W 

Packing/ 

Box 

60026 Attis 6 1 6 185 140 90 1/30 

60096 Attis 9 1 9 220 164 90 1/20 

60126 Attis 12 1 12 305 205 90 1/16 

60166 Attis 16 1 16 355 220 90 1/16 

60176 Attis 16 2 16 231 285 90 1/16 

60246 Attis 24 2 24 313 345 96 1/8 

60366 Attis 36 3 36 315 440 96 1/5 

208 

ELMARK 


PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE AND FLUSH MOUNTING PDB1 SERIES, IP40 

The distribution boxes are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. 

They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical 

current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 

90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with 

IP rate IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the current leading 

parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and 

earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. 



• fire resistance rate: UL 94 



BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING, PDB1 SERIES, IP40 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of rows 

Module 

capacity 

(number of 

devices) 


L H W 

Packing/ 

Box 

60040 PDB1 4 1 4 110 205 75 1/20 

60060 PDB1 6 1 6 150 205 75 1/20 

60080 PDB1 8 1 8 190 205 75 1/20 

60120 PDB1 12 1 12 260 205 75 1/10 

60180 PDB1 18 1 18 365 220 75 1/10 

60240 PDB1 24 2 24 270 330 75 1/10 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

BOXES FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, PDB1 SERIES, IP40 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

rows 

Module 

capacity 

(number of 

devices) 

Dimensions (mm) Packing / 

Box 

L H W 

60041 PDB1 4 1 4 110 205 75 1/20 

60061 PDB1 6 1 6 150 205 75 1/20 

60081 PDB1 8 1 8 190 205 75 1/20 

60121 PDB1 12 1 12 260 205 75 1/10 

60181 PDB1 18 1 18 365 220 75 1/10 

60241 PDB1 24 2 24 270 330 75 1/10 

ELMARK 


209


PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE AND FLUSH MOUNTING IP40, 

BLUE SERIES 


product: 





current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 

90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with 

IP rate IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the current leading 

parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and 

earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. 


• Door colour: Transparent blue 

• Mounting type: Surface;Flush 

• Number of modules: 12; 18; 24; 28; 36 


• Number of rows: 

‣ Single row for 12 and 18 modules 

‣ Double rows for 24; 28 and 36 modules 

BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING, BLUE SERIES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

rows 


(number of 

devices) 

• Material: ABS for body and PC for door 


• Ambient temperature(°C): -5 +65°C, max. 95% 

humidity 

• Colour: White RAL 9003 

• Storage temperature(°C): -40 +75°C 


L H W 

Packing/ 

Box 

60122 Blue 12 1 12 300 204 102 1/10 

60182 Blue 18 1 18 410 204 102 1/10 

60242 Blue 24 2 24 300 294 109 1/5 

60282 Blue 28 2 28 310 354 109 1/5 

60362 Blue 36 2 36 410 294 109 1/5 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

BOXES FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, BLUE SERIES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number of 

rows 


(number of 

devices) 


L H W 

Packing/ 

Box 

60123 Blue 12 1 12 317 220 102 1/10 

60183 Blue 18 1 18 426 220 102 1/10 

60243 Blue 24 2 24 317 310 109 1/5 

60283 Blue 28 2 28 294 338 109 1/5 

60363 Blue 36 2 36 426 310 109 1/5 

210 

ELMARK 


MOISTURE-PROOF DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING HK SERIES, IP65 


product: 





installation current circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards 

to 90°. They are made of white non self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature. 

The special design of the lids and gaskets provides IP code: IP65. The mounted device in the 

box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail 

for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. For direct 

wall mounting with screws. 


• Rated voltage: 690V; 50Hz 

• Cover material: PC 

• Body material: ABS 


• Colour: RAL7035 


• Supplied with removable earth/neutral bar 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Number 

of rows 


(number of 

devices) 

IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H W 

60001 ELM-HK05 1 5 65 140 100 140 1 

60002 ELM-HK08 1 8 65 195 103 195 1 

60003 ELM-HK12 1 12 65 270 103 195 1 

60005 ELM-HK18 1 18 65 375 103 195 1 


L 

W 

H 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

ELMARK 


211


PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, IP65 

H 

L 

W 

Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines. 

Boards are made of ABS and polyester. They are resistant to chemical agents, thermal and UV rays. 


• Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, alkali, 

oils, salts, etc. 

• Rated Voltage: up to 690V 

• Maximum Current: up to 800A 

• Thermal Deformation: over 240°C 

• Operating Temperature: -35°C + 65°C 

MOUNTING 


• Material: ABS & Polyester 


• Colour: RAL7035 grey 

• Recyclable 

• Adjustable mounting plate position 

ABS DISTRIBUTION BOARDS CP SERIES ECONOMIC - GRAY DOOR 

Catalogue 

number 

Board Type Material IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H W 

5312821130 CP5001 ABS IP65 210 280 130 1 

5313525150 CP5002D ABS IP65 250 330 150 1 

5313040165 CP5003 ABS IP65 300 400 165 1 

5313040195 CP5003D ABS IP65 300 400 195 1 

5313550195 CP5007 ABS IP65 350 500 195 1 

5314050245 CP5004D ABS IP65 400 500 245 1 

5314060200 CP5005 ABS IP65 400 600 200 1 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

ABS DISTRIBUTION BOARDS CP SERIES- TRANSPARENT DOOR 

Catalogue 

number 

Board Type Material IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H W 

5312128130T CP5011 ABS IP65 210 280 130 1 

5312535150T CP5012D ABS IP65 250 330 150 1 

5313040165T CP5013 ABS IP65 300 400 165 1 

5313040195T CP5013D ABS IP65 300 400 195 1 

5313550195T CP5017 ABS IP65 350 500 195 1 

5314050245T CP5014D ABS IP65 400 500 245 1 

5314060200T CP5015 ABS IP65 400 600 200 1 

POLYESTER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS CP SERIES - GRAY DOOR 

Catalogue 

number 

Board Type Material IP code Dimensions (mm) Packing / 

Box 

L H W 

5333020150 CP501 Polyester IP65 200 300 150 1 





212 

ELMARK 


PLASTIC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ABS - PP SERIES, IP65 


product: 

Standard EN 60439 -1 

EN 60439 -5 

H 

L 

W 

Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines. 

They can also be used as meter boxes. They are resistant to chemical agents, thermal and UV rays. 


• Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, 

alkali, oils,salts, etc. 

• Rated Voltage: up to 690V 

• Maximum Current: up to 800A 

• Thermal Deformation: over 240°C 

MOUNTING 


Catalogue 

number 

• Operating Temperature: -35°C + 65°C 

• Colour: RAL7035 grey 

• Recyclable 

• Adjustable mounting plate position 

ABS DISTRIBUTION BOARDS PP SERIES- GRAY DOOR 


Box 

L H W 

5312030130 PP 3001 ABS IP65 200 300 130 1 

5312535150 PP 3002 ABS IP65 250 350 150 1 

5313040170 PP 3004 ABS IP65 300 400 170 1 

5313040220 PP 3005 ABS IP65 300 400 220 1 

5313550190 PP 3006 ABS IP65 350 500 190 1 

5314050240 PP 3007 ABS IP65 400 500 240 1 

5314060190 PP 3008 ABS IP65 400 600 200 1 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

2 extended 

Note: Open door angle 180° 

ABS DISTRIBUTION MODULE BOARDS PP SERIES- 

TRANSPARENT DOOR 

Catalogue 

number 


Box 

L H W 

5322535150 PP 3112-18modules ABS IP65 250 350 150 1 




Note: Transparent door 

ELMARK 


213

INSTALLATION | CONNECTION TUBES 

NON-ISOLATED CONNECTION TUBES 

CONNECTION TUBES - GTY TYPE 

Copper pipes with galvanic tin coating, used for 

joining of copper rigid or multicore conductors 

with different sections. The assembling is made 

by mechanical pressing with crimping tool. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Length 

L (mm) 

Outer 

diameter 

D (mm) 


• Material: copper alloy 

• Coating: tin 

• Application: general 

Inner 

diameter 

d (mm) (mm²) 

Cable cross 

section 


59213 GTY-4 20 5 3 4 1000/16000 

59201 GTY-6 25 5.3 3.7 6 500/1500/12000 

59202 GTY-10 30 6.3 4.5 10 500/1500/12000 

59203 GTY-16 35 7.5 5.7 16 100/200/4800 

59204 GTY-25 40 9 7.2 25 100/500/2000 

59205 GTY-35 45 10.8 8.5 35 100/200/1600 

59206 GTY-50 50 12.5 9.8 50 20/200/1600 

59207 GTY-70 55 14.5 11.5 70 10/100/800 

59208 GTY-95 60 17 13.7 95 10/80/640 

59209 GTY-120 65 19 15 120 10/60/480 

59210 GTY-150 70 21 16.7 150 10/50/400 

59211 GTY-185 75 23 18.5 185 10/40/320 

59212 GTY-240 80 26 21 240 10/30/240 

BIMETALLIC CONNECTION TUBE - GTL TYPE 

Pipes made of two metals – copper and alumnum without galvanic coating. They are designed for 

joining copper and alumnum conductors – rigid or multicore conductors with different section. 

The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt 

terminals and the conductor. They are used for protection against electrochemical corrosion got at 

two metals contact with different chemical properties and conductivity at electrical current feed. 

They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation 

period. 


• Material: copper aluminum alloy 

• Coating: none 

• Application: general for joining of two 

types of conductors 

Catalogue Type D1 d2 D2 L Packing/Box(pcs) 

number 

59214 GTL-16 9 6 10 69 20/200/1200 

59215 GTL-25 10 6.8 11 71 20/400/1500 

59216 GTL-35 11 8 13 79 20/300/1000 

59217 GTL-50 12 8.5 15 83 20/800 

59218 GTL-70 14 10 18 93 10/600 

59219 GTL-95 16 12 20 102 10/500 

59220 GTL-120 19 14 23 113 10/400 

59221 GTL-150 21 15 24 117 10/350 

59222 GTL-185 23 17 27 123 10/300 

59223 GTL-240 25 19 30 129 10/200 

214 

ELMARK 


NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS 

CABLE TERMINALS NON-ISOLATED - SC TYPE 

They are used for joining copper conductors - multicore conductors with different section to 

electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection 

at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection 

stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are 

made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, 

through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. Two types are offered with standard 

length SC and extended base SC . They are manufactured under modern technology and have 

high quality and long exploitation period. 



• Coating: tin 

• Application: general for joining conductors 

to electrical devices. 

Catalogue Type d1 (mm) D (mm) d2 (mm) L (mm) Packing / Box (pcs) 

number 

59240 SC - 2.5/6 2.2 4.5 6 24 1000/3000/24000 

59241 SC - 4/6 3.0 4.8 6 24 1000/2000/16000 

59060 SC - 6/5 3.8 5.5 5 24 500/2000/16000 

59035 SC - 6/6 3.8 5.5 6 24 500/2000/16000 

59059 SC - 6/8 3.8 5.5 8 2 4 500/2000/16000 

59066 SC - 6/10 3.8 5.5 10 24 500/2000/16000 

59061 SC - 10/5 4.8 6.8 5 25.5 500/1500/12000 

59036 SC - 10/6 4.8 6.8 6 25.5 100/1500/12000 

59067 SC - 10/10 4.8 6.8 10 25.5 100/1500/12000 

59037 SC - 10/8 4.8 6.8 8 25.5 500/1500/12000 

59038 SC - 16/6 5.5 7.5 6 30.5 400/800/6400 

59039 SC - 16/8 5.5 7.5 8 30.5 400/800/6400 

59040 SC - 16/10 5.5 7.5 10 30.5 400/800/6400 

59068 SC - 16/12 5.5 7.5 12 30.5 400/800/6400 

59062 SC - 25/6 7 9 6 34 100/500/4000 

59041 SC - 25/8 7 9 8 34 100/500/4000 

59042 SC - 25/10 7 9 10 34 250/500/4000 

59069 SC - 25/12 7 9 12 34 100/500/4000 

59063 SC - 35/6 8.2 10.5 6 38 200/400/3200 

59043 SC - 35/8 8.2 10.5 8 38 200/400/3200 

59044 SC - 35/10 8.2 10.5 10 38 200/400/3200 

59045 SC - 35/12 8.2 10.5 12 38 200/400/3200 

59064 SC - 50/6 9.8 12.5 6 45 100/200/1600 

59046 SC - 50/8 9.8 12.5 8 45 100/200/1600 

59047 SC - 50/10 9.8 12.5 10 45 100/100/1600 

59048 SC - 50/12 9.8 12.5 12 45 100/200/1600 

59065 SC - 70/6 44.5 14.5 6 50 80/100/1280 

59049 SC - 70/10 11.5 14.5 10 50 80/100/1280 

59050 SC - 70/12 11.5 14.5 12 50 80/100/1280 

59051 SC - 95/10 13.8 17.5 10 55.5 50/200/800 

59052 SC - 95/12 13.8 17.5 12 55.5 50/200/800 

59053 SC - 120/10 15.5 19.5 10 63 30/60/480 

59054 SC - 120/12 15.5 19.5 12 63 30/60/480 

59055 SC - 150/12 16.5 21 12 71 10/50/400 

59056 SC - 185/12 18.8 23.5 12 78 10/40/320 

59057 SC - 185/16 18.8 23.5 16 78 10/40/320 

59058 SC - 240/16 21.3 26.5 16 92 10/30/240 

INSTALLATION | CABLE TERMINALS 

ELMARK 


215


NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS 

BIMETALIC NON-ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS FOR CRIMPING DTL 

They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multicore conductors with different section to 

electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection 

at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection 

stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are 

made of copper and aluminum alloys as in the aluminum billet is made under special technology 

the copper terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, 

through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. 


• Material: copper aluminum; 

• Application: general for joining conductors 

to electrical devices. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

d1 

(mm) 

D 

(mm) 

d2 

(mm) 

L 

(mm) 

l 

(mm) 

B 

(mm) 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

59224 DTL - 1 - 16 6 11 8 70 30 16 20 /200 /1440 

59225 DTL - 1 - 25 7 12 8 75 34 18 20 /180 /1080 

59226 DTL - 1 - 35 8.5 14 10 85 38 20.5 20 /100 /600 

59227 DTL - 1 - 50 9.8 16 10 90 40 23 20 /70 /420 

59228 DTL - 1 - 70 11.5 18 12 102 48 26 10 /60 /360 

59229 DTL - 1 - 95 13.5 21 12 112 50 28 10 /40 /180 

59230 DTL - 1 - 120 15 23 14 120 53 30 10 /30 /120 

59231 DTL - 1 - 150 16.5 25 14 126 56 34 5 /25 /120 

59232 DTL - 1 - 185 18.5 27 16 133 58 37 5 /20 /120 

59233 DTL - 1 - 240 21 30 16 140 60 40 4 /12 /72 

216 

ELMARK 


ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS 

COPPER CABLE WIRE FORK TERMINAL CONNECTOR 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Length (mm) Colour Conductor 

(mm²) 

Packing (pcs.) Packing / Box 

(pcs.) 

59080 SVS1.25-4 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 10/240 

59081 SVS1.25-5 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15/180 

59082 SVS1.25-6 21.2 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15/180 

59083 SVS 2-4 21.0 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15/180 

59084 SVS 2-5 22.5 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15/180 

59085 SVS 2-6 27.6 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10/120 

59086 SVS 5.5-4 24.5 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60 

59087 SVS 5.5-5 27.9 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60 

59088 SVS 5.5-6 27.9 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60 


ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - CHS TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Length (mm) Conductor 

(mm²) 

Packing / Box 

(pcs.) 

Packing / Box 

(pcs.) 

59115 CHS3 18.1 0.25-1.5 100 250 

59116 CHS4 20.1 1.5-2.5 100 200 

59117 CHS5 25.5 4.0-6.0 100 200 

59118 CHS6 27.3 8.0 100 100 

ISOLATED CABLE JOINTS 

Metal pipes with outside PVC insulation. They are used for joining/extending multicore conductors 

with section up to 6mm². It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the 

possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic 

pressing of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different 

conductor sections. 



• Coating: polyvinylchloride 

• Application: general for joining of copper conductors 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Length (mm) Colour Conductor 

(mm²) 


(pcs.) 

59015 PVT 1.25 16 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15/300 

59001 BV 1.25 25 Red 0.5-1.0 100 10/120 

59034 PVT 2 16 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15/300 

59002 BV 2 25 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10/60 

59014 PVT 5.5 20 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60 

59003 BV 5.5 25 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 5/60 

ELMARK 


217


ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MDD/FDD TYPES 

They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with 

polyvinyl chloride. They are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the 

cores from bending and breaking in the joining point and at the same time it protects the staff 

from direct contact to the current - carrying parts. They are used for conductors with section up 

to 6 mm. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the 

terminal and cable. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. 

They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation 

period. All insulated cable terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing 



• Coating: polyvinyl chloride 

• Application: general for joining copper 

conductors 


Catalogue 

number 

Type Shape Colour Conductor 

(mm²) 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

Packing / 

Box (pcs.) 

59012 MDD 1.25 - 187 Male Red 0.5-1.0 100 10 / 240 

59009 MDD 1.25 - 250 Male Red 0.5-1.0 100 10 / 240 

59013 MDD 2 - 187 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10 / 240 

59011 MDD 2 - 250 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10 / 180 

59010 MDD 5.5 - 250 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 10 / 120 

59008 FDD 1.25 - 187 Female Red 0.5-1.0 100 20 / 240 

59006 FDD 1.25 - 250 Female Red 0.5-1.0 100 15 / 180 

59007 FDD 2 - 187 Female Blue 1.5-2.5 100 20 / 240 

59004 FDD 2 - 250 Female Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10 / 180 

59005 FDD 5.5 - 250 Female Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 10 / 120 

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - E TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Colour Terminal 

length (mm) 

Conductor 

(mm²) 

Packing (pcs.) Packing/ Box 

(pcs.) 

59023 Е0508 White 8 0.5 100 50/600 

59024 Е7508 Blue 8 0.75 100 50/600 

59025 Е1008 Red 8 1.0 100 50/600 

59026 Е1510 Black 10 1.5 100 30/360 

59027 Е2512 Grey 12 2.5 100 30/300 

59028 Е4012 Orange 12 4.0 100 20/240 

59029 Е6018 Green 18 6.0 100 5/120 

59030 Е10-18 Dark green 18 10 100 8/96 

59031 Е16-18 Milky yellow 18 16 100 6/60 

59032 Е25-16 Black 16 25 100 5/36 

59033 Е35-25 Grey-yellow 25 35 100 2/24 

218 

ELMARK 


TWIN ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS- TE TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Colour Terminal 

length (mm) 

Conductor 

(mm²) 


(pcs.) 

59023TE TE0508 White 8 2x0.5 100 50/600 

59024TE TE7508 Blue 8 2x0.75 100 50/600 

59025TE TE1008 Red 8 2x1.0 100 50/600 

59026TE TE1508 Black 8 2x1.5 100 30/360 

59027TE TE2510 Grey 10 2x2.5 100 30/300 

59028TE TE4010 Orange 10 2x4.0 100 20/240 

59029TE TE6014 Green 14 2x6.0 100 5/120 

59030TE TE10-14 Dark green 14 2x10.0 100 8/96 

59031TE TE16-14 Milky yellow 14 2x16.0 100 6/60 

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - PTV TYPE 

Metal pipes with outside PVC insulation. They are used for joining/extending multicore conductors 

with section up to 6mm². It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the 

possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic 

pressing of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different 

conductor sections. 



• Coating: polyvinyl chloride 

• Application: general for joining of copper conductors 


Catalogue 

number 


(mm²) 

Shoe 

width 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

Packing / 

Box (pcs.) 

59101 PTV 1.25 - 10 Male Red 0.25-1.0 1.9 100 20/240 

59102 PTV 1.25 - 12 Male Red 0.25-1.0 1.9 100 20/240 

59103 PTV 2 - 10 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 1.9 100 20/240 

59104 PTV 2 - 12 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 1.9 100 15/180 

59105 PTV 5.5 - 13 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 2.9 100 8/96 

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - RVL TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size of the 

opening 

(mm) 

Colour 

Conductor 

(mm²) 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

Packing / Box 

(pcs.) 

59021 RVL 1.25-4 4 Red 0.5-1.0 100 20/240 

59022 RVL 1.25-5 5 Red 0.5-1.0 100 15/180 

59018 RVL 2-4 4 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 15/180 

59019 RVL 2-5 5 Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10/120 

59020 RVL 5.5-4 4 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8/96 

59016 RV 5.5-5 5 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8/96 

59017 RV 5.5-6 6 Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 8/96 

ELMARK 


219


ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - PBDD TYPE 

Catalogue Type Shape Colour Conductor Shoe Packing Packing/ 

number 

(mm²) width (pcs.) Box (pcs.) 

59106 PBDD 1.25 - 250 Male Red 0.25-1.0 6.3 100 5/60 

59107 PBDD 2 - 250 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 6.3 100 5/60 

59108 PBDD 5.5 - 250 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 6.3 100 5/60 

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MPD TYPE 

Catalogue Type Shape Colour Conductor Shoe Packing Packing / 

number 


59109 MPD 1.25 - 156 Male Red 0.25-1.0 6.3 100 10/240 

59110 MPD 2 - 195 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 6.3 100 10/120 

59111 MPD 5.5 - 195 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 6.3 100 10/120 

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - FRD 

Catalogue 

number 


(mm²) 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

Packing / 

Box (pcs.) 

59119 FRD 1.25 - 156 Female Red 0.25-1.0 100 10/200 

59120 FRD 2 - 195 Female Blue 1.5-2.5 100 10/200 

59121 FRD 5.5 - 195 Female Yellow 4.0-6.0 100 10/200 

ISOLATED CABLE TERMINALS - MDFN/FDFNY 

Catalogue Type Shape Colour Conductor Shoe Packing Packing / 

number 


59112 MDFN 1.0 - 250 Male Red 0.25-1.0 4 100 5/60 

59113 MDFN 2 - 250 Male Blue 1.5-2.5 4 100 5/60 

59114 MDFN 5 - 250 Male Yellow 4.0-6.0 5 100 4/48 

59242 FDFNY 1.0 - 250 Female Red 0.25-1.0 4 100 10/60 

59243 FDFNY 2 - 250 Female Blue 1.5-2.5 4 100 10/60 

59244 FDFNY 5 - 250 Female Yellow 4.0-6.0 5 100 10/60 

220 

ELMARK 


PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING 

PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 

Cable trunking are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in office and 

residential buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems and allow quick 

adaptation if necessary to rearrange the interior. Fast and simple installation. In combination with a 

wide range of accessories, building irregularities are quickly overcome. Non- flammable material, easy 

to cut and paint. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing 

(pcs) 

5621212 Plastic cable trunking CT2 12x12 2m White 100 

5621510 Plastic cable trunking CT2 15X10 2m White 100 




5623016 Plastic cable trunking CT2 30Х16 2m White 70 











INSTALLATION | CABLE TRUNKING 

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS FRAMES FOR CABLE TRUNKING 

Cable trunking frames are decorative solution for installation of switches and sockets on places where 

their normal mounting is not possible. The assembly set includes subframe and main white frame. 

Universal sizes, suitable for mounting of switches and sockets from different manufacturers. Single, 

double and triple frames are offered. 

Catalogue 

Type 

Used for cable Colour Packing (pcs) 

number 

trunking 

562100441 Single frame 100X40/100X60 White 20 

562100442 Double frame 100X40/100X60 White 14 

562100443 Triple frame 100X40/100X60 White 5 

* These frames are suitable with switches and sockets CITY and RHYME series on page 320 and 

page 369. 

CITY series switch 

RHYME series socket 

ELMARK 


221


OUTSIDE CORNER 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Used for cable trunking Colour Packing 

(pcs) 

56212121 Outside corner 12x12 White 50 

56215101 Outside corner 15X10 White 50 



56230161 Outside corner 30Х16 White 48 











INSIDE CORNER 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

56212122 Inside corner 12x12 White 50 

56215102 Inside corner 15X10 White 50 



56230162 Inside corner 30Х16 White 35 











222 

ELMARK 


T- CORNER 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

56212123 T- corner 12x12 White 50 

56215103 T- corner 15X10 White 50 



56230163 T-corner 30X16 White 40 












L- CORNER 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

56212124 L- corner 12x12 White 50 

56215104 L- corner 15X10 White 50 



56230164 L-corner 30X16 White 50 











ELMARK 


223


CONNECTOR 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

56212125 Connector 12x12 White 50 

56215105 Connector 15X10 White 50 














END CAP 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

56212126 End cap 12x12 White 50 

56215106 End cap 15X10 White 50 

56216166 End cap 16X16 White 50 

56225166 End cap 25X16 White 50 

56230166 End cap 30X16 White 100 

56225256 End cap 25X25 White 50 

56240166 End cap 40X16 White 30 

56240256 End cap 40X25 White 30 

56240406 End cap 40X40 White 30 

56260406 End cap 60X40 White 50 

56260606 End cap 60X60 White 50 

56280406 End cap 80X40 White 60 

56280606 End cap 80X60 White 60 

562100406 End cap 100X40 White 50 

562100606 End cap 100X60 White 50 

SEPARATOR 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Length (m) Used for cable trunking Colour Packing 

(pcs) 

56261111 Separator 40 2 100x40 White 40 

56261112 Separator 60 2 100x60 White 40 

224 

ELMARK 


ECONOMIC SERIES PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

5621212E CT2 Economic 12x12 2m White 100 
















PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING SELF-ADHESIVE 

Catalogue 

number 


m/pcs 

5621212A Plastic trunking self-adhesive 12x12 2m White 250/125 


5621616A Plastic trunking self-adhesive 16х16 2m White 250/125 



5623016A Plastic trunking self-adhesive 30X16 2m White 140/70 






ECONOMIC SERIES PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING SELF-ADHESIVE 

Catalogue 

number 


m/pcs 

5621212AE Self-adhesive CT2 Economic 12x12 2m White 250/125 










ELMARK 


225


PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - DARK WALNUT 

Catalogue 

number 


m/pcs 

5621212DW Plastic trunking dark walnut 12x12 2m Dark walnut 250/125 






PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - LIGHT BEECH 

Catalogue 

number 


m/pcs 

5621212LB Plastic trunking light beech 12x12 2m Light beech 250/125 






PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - PEAR 

Catalogue 

number 


m/pcs 

5621212P Plastic trunking pear 12x12 2m Pear 250/125 






226 

ELMARK 


PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - BLACK 

Catalogue 

number 


m/pcs 

5621212BL Plastic trunking black 12x12 2m Black 250/125 







PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING - GREY 

Catalogue 

number 


m/pcs 

5621212GR Plastic trunking grey 12x12 2m Grey 250/125 






ELMARK 


227


SLOTTED PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

5622525S Slotted plastic trunking CT2 25x25 2m Grey 196 








FLOOR TYPE PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

5627020F Floor type plastic trunking CT2 70x20 2m Grey 25 



FLOOR TYPE PLASTIC CABLE TRUNKING CT2 

Catalogue 

number 


(pcs) 

5625012F/WH Floor type plastic trunking CT2 50x12 2m White 50 





228 

ELMARK 


AIR CONDITIONING TRUNKING 

Catalogue Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing 

number 

m/pcs 

5627560 Plastic trunking 75x60 2 White 15/30 

AIR CONDITIONING TRUNKING ACCESSORIES 

Catalogue 

Type 

Used for cable Colour Packing pcs 

number 

trunking 

56275601 Outside Corner 75x60 White 24 

56275602 Inside Corner 75x60 White 24 

56275604 L- Corner 75x60 White 18 

56275605 Connector 75x60 White 40 

56275606 Internal Cap 75x60 White 30 

56275607 External Cap 75x60 White 18 

56275608 Wall Penetration 75x60 White 

56275609 Cable Holder 75x60 White 


56275601 

56275601 56275602 

56275602 

56275604 

56275605 

56275606 

56275606 

56275607 

56275607 56275608 

56275608 

ELMARK 


229


CORNER TRUNKING 

Catalogue Type Size (mm) Length Colour Packing 

number 

m/pcs 

5622323 Plastic cable trunking 23X23 2 White 60/120 

CORNER TRUNKING ACCESSORIES 

Catalogue Type 

Used for cable Colour 

Packing pcs 

number 

trunking 




56223236 End cap 23X23 White 100 

KITCHEN COUNTER CORNER CABLE TRUNKING 

Catalogue Type Size Length (m) Colour Packing pcs 

number 

56225K Plastic trunking 25 2 White 30 

230 

ELMARK 


UNDERFLOOR TRUNKING SYSTEMS 

Good cable organization ensures optimal performance and simplifies subsequent maintenance of 

the cable system, make easy day-to-day operation, operational efficiency, optimal performance, 

and the facility’s ability to change and grow over its lifetime. 

DESCRIPTION 

• Material: Pre-galvanized steel according to EN 10346:2011 

• Length: 2500 mm 

• Width: from 80 mm to 240 mm 

• Height: 30mm 

• Thickness: 1.2 mm 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Dimensions (mm) Packing pcs 

H W L 

57080302500 Single sector cable tray 30 80 2500 1 

570160302500 Double sector cable tray 30 160 2500 1 

570240302500 Three sector cable tray 30 240 2500 1 


LEVEL ADJUSTMENT HOLDERS FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS 

Catalogue 

number 


H 

W 

570017 Level adj. holder for single sector cable tray 20 80 1 

570018 Level adj. holder for double sector cable tray 20 160 1 

570019 Level adj. holder for three sector cable tray 20 240 1 

VERTICAL BEND FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS 

Catalogue Type Thickness Base size Packing pcs 

number 

(mm) 

570020 Cable tray level adjustment element M8 40x40 1 

ELMARK 


231


STRAIGHT CONNECTOR FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS 

Catalogue 

number 


H W D 

570010 Connector for single sector cable tray 30 80 50 1 

570011 Connector for double sector cable tray 30 160 50 1 

570012 Connector for three sector cable tray 30 240 50 1 

END CAP FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS 

Catalogue 

number 


H W D 

570013 End cap for single sector cable tray 30 80 50 1 

570014 End cap for double sector cable tray 30 160 50 1 

570015 End cap for three sector cable tray 30 240 50 1 

VERTICAL BEND FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS 

Catalogue 

number 


H 

W 

570016 Vertical bend for all sizes cable trays 120 350 1 

232 

ELMARK 


EMPTY JUNCTION BOX FOR CABLE UNDERFLOOR TRAYS 

Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing pcs 

number 

H W L 

570002 Empty box for all type cable tray 65 350 350 1 


COVER PLATE FOR UNDERFLOOR JUNCTION BOX 

Catalogue Type Dimensions (mm) Packing pcs 

number 

Thickness W L 

570003 Cover for underfloor junction box 1.5 268 268 1 

ELMARK 


233


Compatible sockets: 

SOCKET CASE FOR UNDERFLOOR JUNCTION BOX 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

570001 Socket case for underfloor 

junction box 57002 

Number of Dimensions (mm) Packing 

modules 

Thickness W L 

pcs 

18 1.5 268 268 1 

*Socket case can be assembled with 8 modules 45x45mm and 2 modules 22x45mm. 

German type 

Cat. Number: 26008G/UF 

UPS socket 

Cat. Number: 26008F/UF 

Computer socket 

Cat. Number: 26013G/UF 

234 

ELMARK 


INSULATING CONDUITS 

FLEXIBLE DOUBLE COAT CORRUGATED PIPE 


• Material- HDPE; 

• Compression resistance- 450 N/ 5 cm; 

• Colour- red 


M006017 

SPIRAL FOR CABLES 

Catalogue 

number 

Flexible double coat corrugated 

pipe 

Type Colour Internal 

diameter 

(mm) 

• Minimum bending radius: 350 mm; 

• Temperature assembly resistance: -5 - +60 °C; 

• Halogen free 

Inner Diameter 

Outer Diame- 

Packing (m) 

(mm) ter (mm) 

52 63 25 

External 

diameter 

(mm) 

500SP6T Spiral 6x8mm Transparent 6 8 25 

500SP6B Spiral 6x8mm Black 6 8 25 





Coil length 

(m) 

INSTALLATION | CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEMS 

NYLON CABLE DRAW TAPE EC 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Length (m) Colour 

500305 

3 5 Transparent 1/340 

Nylon cable draw tape 

500315 3 15 Transparent 1/120 

Packing (pcs) 

ELMARK 


235



the products: 


EN61386-22; RAL- 7035 

SELF-EXTINGUISHING PLIABLE CONDUITS EC 


• Material: technopolymer on PVC base; 

• Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94; 

• Compression resistance: 320N; 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Inner 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Outer 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Packing 

(m) 

500M16 Self-extinguishing pliable conduits 10.7 16 100 





500N16 Self-extinguishing pliable conduits with draw tape 10.7 16 100 





SPIRAL FLEXIBLE PVC CONDUITS- UV RAYS RESISTANT EC 


• Material (spiral+cover): shock resistance 

technopolymer on PVC base; 

• Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94; 

• Compression resistance: 320N; 

• Installation temperature: -15/+70°C; 

• Operating temperature: -5/+65°C; 

• Type: UV rays resistance. 


Inner Diameter Outer Diameter Packing (m) 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

500UV12 UV flexible PVC conduit 12 16.2 30 






PVC INSULATED STEEL SPIRALS 


• Material - Galvanized steel, helically wound, flexible steel conduit with PVC coating 

• PVC-resistance against corrosion 

• Colour- black 

• Operating temperature: -5/+65 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Inner Diameter 

(mm) 

Outer Diameter 

(mm) 

500P11 PVC insulated steel spirals 11 15.2 50 






Packing (m) 

236 

ELMARK 


HALOGEN FREE RIGID INSULATING CONDUITS & ACCESSORIES 

HALOGEN 

FREE 

HALOGEN FREE NON-FLAMMABLE PLIABLE CONDUITS 


• Material: technopolymer 

• Self extinguishing 

• Compression resistance: 320N 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Inner diameter 

(mm) 

Outer diameter 

(mm) 

Packing 

(m) 

500M16HF Halogen free conduit 11.2 15.7 100 




500M40HF Halogen free conduit 32.3 40 25 



FREE 

HALOGEN FREE RIGID INSULATING CONDUITS, EC- LSZH 

This series rigid insulating conduits are low-smoke, halogen-free (LSZH) electrical conduits that 

virtually eliminate the release of the toxic gases found in PVC products. 

Current trends show increasing use of LSZH conduit, where smoke from fire presents an increased 

hazard to people. They are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in 

office and residential buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems. 

Fast and simple installation. Non-flammable material, easy to cut and paint. 


• Material: Halogen free technopolymer according to EN 50267-2-1, EN 50267-1-2, EN 60754-1; 


• Low smoke according to EN 61034-1, EN 61034-2 

• Resistance to flame propagation: Self extinguishing in less than 30 seconds. 

• Compression resistance: 320N 

• RAL 7035 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

External 

diameter 

(mm) 

Length 

(m) 

Colour IP code Packing 

(pcs) 

50016HF LSZH cable conduit, with sleeve 16 3 Grey IP40 34 





ELMARK 


237



FREE 


FREE 

ACCESSORIES FOR HALOGEN FREE RIGID INSULATING CONDUITS 

IP67 EC- LSZH 


• Material: co-moulding low emission smoke technopolymer. 

• Self-extinguishing V2 degree to UL94 

• Resistance to abnormal heat: up to up to 850°C 

• O-ring to compensate the conduit tolerances 

• RAL- 7035 


HALOGEN FREE LONG BEND 90° IP67 EC- LSZH 


Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/ Box 

number 

conduit Ø (mm) (pcs) 

500BK16HF Halogen free bend 90° 16 67 Grey 10/150 





HALOGEN FREE COUPLING IP67 EC- LSZH 


Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/ Box 

number 


500C16HF Halogen free coupling 16 67 Grey 10/250 






FREE 

HALOGEN FREE CONDUIT CLIPS- LSZH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Used for cable 

conduit Ø (mm) 

Colour Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

500CC16 Halogen free conduit clips 16 Grey 100/1500 





238 

ELMARK 



the products: 



PVC SELF-EXTINGUISHING RIGID INSULATING CONDUITS EC 

Rigid insulating conduit are practical solution of organizing power and communication cables in 

office and residential buildings. They increase the reliability in operation of the electrical systems. 

Fast and simple installation. In combination with a wide range of accessories, building irregularities 

are quickly overcome. Nonflammable material, easy to cut and paint. 


• Material - shock resistance technopolymer on rigid PVC base 

• Self extinguishing V0 degree to UL94 

• Compression resistance- 320N 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

External Length 

diameter (m) 

(mm) 

Colour IP code Packing 

(pcs) 

50016/2 Plastic cable conduit, with sleeve 16 2 Grey 40 34 

50016 Plastic cable conduit, with sleeve 16 3 Grey 40 34 











the products: 



ACCESSORIES FOR PVC SELF-EXTINGUISHING RIGID INSULATING 

CONDUITS AND FLEXIBLE SPIRAL CONDUITS, IP 65 EC 


• Material- shock resistant technopolymer on 

PVC base 


• Glow wire test: up to 960°C 

• O-ring to compensate the conduit tolerances 

• RAL- 7035 

PVC BEND FLEXIBLE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 



IP code Colour Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

500FB16 PVC bend flexible 16 65 Grey 50/200 




ELMARK 


239


PVC BEND 90° 


Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/ 

number 

conduit Ø (mm) Box (pcs) 

500BB16 PVC bend 90° 16 65 Grey 100/1000 



500BB32 PVC bend 90° 32 65 Grey 100 

500BB40 PVC bend 90° 40 65 Grey 100 

CONDUIT-CONDUIT PVC JOINT 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 




Box (pcs) 

500CM16 Conduit-conduit PVC joint 16 65 Grey 10/350 





CONDUIT-BOX PVC JOINT 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 




Box (pcs) 

500CB16 Conduit-box PVC joint 16 65 Grey 10/350 





PVC RIGID CONDUIT - FLEXIBLE SPIRAL CONDUITS JOINT 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Conduit 

Ø(mm) 

Flexible 

spiral Ø 

(mm) 


Box (pcs) 

500DD16 Flexible spiral conduits joint 16 12 65 Grey 10/350 





240 

ELMARK 



the products: 



ACCESSORIES FOR PVC SELF-EXTINGUISHING RIGID INSULATING 

CONDUITS AND FLEXIBLE SPIRAL CONDUITS, IP40 EC 


• Material- shock resistant technopolymer on PVC base 


• Glow wire test: up to 960°C 

• RAL- 7035 

PVC BEND FLEXIBLE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 



IP code Colour Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

500FK16 PVC bend flexible 16 44 Grey 50/200 




PVC BEND 90° 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 



IP code Colour Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

500BK16 PVC bend 90° 16 40 Grey 100/1000 



500BK32 PVC bend 90° 32 40 Grey 100 

500BK40 PVC bend 90° 40 40 Grey 100 


PLASTIC BEND SMALL 90° 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 




Box (pcs) 

500SK16 Plastic bend small 90° 16 40 Grey 100/400 




ELMARK 


241


PVC T-JOINT 


Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box 

number 


500T16 PVC T-joint 16 40 Grey 100/300 




PVC COUPLING 


Used for cable IP code Colour Packing/Box 

number 


500C16 PVC coupling 16 40 Grey 100/1200 






FREE 

HALOGEN FREE CONDUIT CLIPS- LSZH 



number 

conduit Ø (mm) Colour Packing/Box 

(pcs) 






PVC CONDUIT CLIPS 

Catalogue 

number 

500CS16 

500CS20 

500CS25 

500CS32 

Type 

PVC conduit clips with plug 

and steel screw 









(pcs) 

16 Grey 100/1000 

20 Grey 100/1000 

25 Grey 100/800 

32 Grey 50/400 

242 

ELMARK 


PVC CONDUIT CLIPS 



number 


(pcs) 

500CО16 PVC collar conduit clips 16 Grey 100/1000 




PVC MODULAR FIXING GUIDE FOR CLIPS 

Catalogue 

Type 

Length Colour Packing 

number 

(mm) 

500BC PVC modular fixing guide for clips 200 Grey 400 


ELMARK 


243


METAL CABLE TRAYS AND ACCESSORIES 

CABLE TRAY 

The universal cable support systems are used for construction of cable link in closed production 

premises for direct mounting on even vertical surfaces. They are perforated metal grates and 

accessories with standard lengths and sizes. They allow quick construction of cable systems with 

many angles and derivations. 

Catalogue number Type Size (mm) Thickness 

(mm) 

Length 

(mm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

56050825U CT1 UT Cable tray 40x50 0.6 2500 1 





For joining cable tray section together use screw SET M8 with catalogue 

number: 568SET or M6 SET with catalogue number 566SET. Recommended 

quantities of bolt and nut sets for cable trays connection are: 2 sets for 50mm 

cable trays and 3 sets for everyone else. 

CABLE TRAY COVER 


(mm) 

Length 

(mm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

56050825C CT1 Cable tray cover 15x50 0.6 2500 1 





COUPLER FOR TRAYS 

For joining cable covers section together use screw SET M8 with catalogue 

number: 568SET or M6 SET with catalogue number 566SET. Recommended 

quantities of bolt and nut sets for cable trays connection are: 2 sets for 50mm 

cable trays and 3 sets for everyone else. 


(mm) 

Length 

(mm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

56250C 

CT1 Coupler for trays 

with the same size 

40 1.2 175 1 

To install 2 trays use 2pcs 56250C and 8 SETs of bolt and nuts with catalogue 

numbers: 566SET or 568SET 

ADJUSTABLE VERTICAL CONNECTOR 


Length Height Thickness Packing/ 

number 

(mm) (mm) (mm) Box (pcs) 

56300LC CT1 Adjustable vertical connector - set (2 pcs ) 300 40 1.2 1 

To install 2 trays use 1 SET 56300LC and 10 SETs of bolt and nuts with catalogue 

number: 566SET and 568SET 

244 

ELMARK 


ADJUSTABLE HORIZONTAL CONNECTOR 


Length Height Thickness Packing/ 

number 


56301LC CT1 Adjustable horizontal connector 175 40 1.2 1 

HANGING C TYPE RAIL 

To install 2 trays use 2pcs 56301LC and 8 SETs of bolt and nuts with catalogue 

number: 566SET and 568SET 


Length Size Thickness Packing/ 

number 


5690106 CT1 Hanging C type rail 2000 27x18 1.2 1 

Slotted hole size: 8.5x20 mm| Round hole size: D-11 mm| Mounting: with 

threaded rod and nuts 

ADD ON 90° HORIZONTAL CORNER BEND 


Height Tickness Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) (mm) (pcs) 

5690101 CT1 Add on 90° horizontal corner bend 40 1 1 


To install 2 trays use bolt and nuts with catalogue number: 566SET and 568SET 

ANGLE 90° 

Catalogue number Type Thickness (mm) Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) 

5690100 Angle 90° 0.8 100x100 1 

5690150 Angle 90° 0.8 150x150 1 

5690200 Angle 90° 0.8 200x200 1 

5690300 Angle 90° 1 300x300 1 

ANGLE COVER 90° 


Metric bolt diameters 

Length (mm) Packing/Box (pcs) 

5690100C Angle cover 90° 1.5 100x100 1 

5690150C Angle cover 90° 1.5 150x150 1 

5690200C Angle cover 90° 1.5 200x200 1 

5690300C Angle cover 90° 1.5 300x300 1 

ELMARK 


245


ADD ON TEE HORIZONTAL BEND 


Width Height Thickness Packing/ 

number 


5690102 CT1 Add on tee horizontal bend 100 100 40 1 1 



5690105 CT1 Add on tee horizontal bend 300 300 40 1.2 1 

WALL BRACKET 

To install 2 trays use bolt and nuts with catalogue number: 566SET and 568SET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Tray width 

(mm) 

Length 

(mm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

56050S CT1 Wall bracket 50 50 60 1 





CEILING/WALL BRACKET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Length 

(mm) 

Height 

(mm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

56100OB CT1 OMEGA Ceiling/Wall bracket 100 145 200 1 



THREADED HANGING ROD 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Thread Length 

(mm) 

Grade Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

M517079 Threaded hanging rod M6 1000 4.8 100 



Application: Suitable for fixing skirting, stud battens to wall and long runs of 

shelf support 

BOLT AND NUTS, SET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Thread metric 

(mm) 

Length 

(mm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

566SET CT1 Bolt and nuts, SET M6 15 1/500 

568SET CT1 Bolt and nuts, SET M8 15 1/500 

246 

ELMARK 


WIRE MESH CABLE TRAYS AND ACCESSORIES 

WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY 

Wire Mesh tray is generally used for telecommunication and fiber optic applications and are 

installed on short support spans. This type of cable trays cable provide lots of options for cable 

management which is especially important at their frequent entry and exit. The purpose of a cable 

tray system is to support, route, and protect cable and is part of the cable management system. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size 

(mm) 

Thickness 

(mm) 

Length 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

560100604WM CT2 Wire mesh cable tray 60x100 4 2500 1 




HANGING RAIL/ CENTRAL SUPPORT 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Length 

(mm) 

Width of 

tray (mm) 

Packing/Box 

(pcs) 

5690160MW CT2 Hanging rail/ Central support 160 100 1/50 



Material: Pregalvanized steel 

CONNECTOR FOR WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY 

Catalogue 

Type 

Length Packing/ 

number 

(mm) Box (pcs) 

56250CMW Bolt less connector for wire mesh cable tray 220 1/50 

Material: Pregalvanized steel 

ELMARK 


247


WALL MOUNTING SUPPORT 

Catalogue number Type Length 

(mm) 

Material: Pre-galvanized steel 

WALL BRACKET & BOXES FIXING SUPPORT 

Material: Pre-galvanized steel 

Width of 

tray (mm) Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

56130SMW CT2 WALL MOUNTING SUPPORT 130 100 1/50 



Catalogue number Type Size Packing/ 

(mm) Box (pcs) 

56251MW CT2 WALL BRACKET & BOXES FIXING SUPPORT 85x75 1/50 

EARTHING CLAMP 

Catalogue 

Type 

Section Thread Packing/ 

number 

(mm2) (mm) Box (pcs) 

56070G CT2 Earthing clamp 70 M6 1/100 

Material: Brass 

GROUNDING STRAP 

Catalogue 

Type 

Section Length Packing/ 

number 

(mm2) (mm) Box (pcs) 

56100SG CT2 Grounding strap 6 80 1/100 

Material: Tin plated copper 

Mounting: with bolt-less connector with catalogue number 56250CMW 

248 

ELMARK 


LIGHTNING PROTECTION 

AIR-TERMINATION ROD 

Catalogue Model 

Length 

Diameter 


number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

ME014066 101 VL2000 2000 10/16 1/10 

ME014071 101 VL2500 2500 10/16 1/10 

ME014063 101 VL3000 3000 10/16 1/10 

ME014069 101 VL3500 3500 10/16 1/10 

Suitable for wind loads according to Eurocode 1: DIN EN 50164 - 2. Last meter is 

tapered up Ø16 mm to Ø10mm, material: AlMgSi. Matches stand system FangFix. 

Material: Aluminum. 

STAND FOR AIR-TERMINATION ROD, FANGFIX SYSTEM 


Length 

Diameter 


number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

M014102 F-FIX-16 373 84/119 1 

System consists of FangFix stone with base and clamp. FangFix clamp made of 

VA. Lightning current tested with 100 kA (10/350). 16 kg stone with high level of 

stability. Quick and easy mounting of interception rod using anchors. Concrete, 

frost-resistant. The FangFix stone can be stacked. 

INSTALLATION | LIGHTNING PROTECTION 

PROFILE EARTHING ROD WITH CONNECTION LUG 

Catalogue 

Model 

Length 


number 

(mm) 

197002 EL-ER02 1500 1 

Cross-profile 50 x 50 x 3 mm. With connecting strap. Hot-dip galvanized. 

Four through hole with diameter 13 mm. For the construction of earthing systems 

e.g. antenna or earthing of building site distribution boards. 

Material: Steel 

EARTHING ROD WITH STRIP 


Rog Strip Rog thickness 

Strip Rog Strip 

number 

length 

(mm) 

length 

(mm) (mm) 

thickness 

(mm) 

width 

(mm) 

width 

(mm) 

M014048 50/50/5 1500 1500 5 3 50 30 

M014012 60/60/6 1500 1500 6 3 60 40 

Cold galvanized: have been coated in zinc to make them corrosion resistant. 


ELMARK 


249


COPPER-PLATED EARTHING ROD, THREADED 


Length 

Diameter 


number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

197001 EL-ER18 1500 18 1/10 

Material: copper coated steel, according to EN 62561-2 

Thickness of copper coating: 1mm (1000μ) 

Weight: 3.10kg 

* Spike and diving stud are not included 

SPIKE FOR THREADED COPPER-PLATED EARTHING ROD 

Catalogue Model Thread size Spanner 


number 

(mm) 

197022 EL-S01 M12 19 1 


Depending on the hardness of the soil, usually 1pc. enough for an object. 

COUPLERS FOR THREADED RODS 

Catalogue 

Model Threaded size Packing/Box (pcs) 

number 

197021 EL-CD01 M12 1 

To connection two or many threaded copper-bonded ground rods. 

DIVING STUD 

Catalogue number Model Threaded size Packing/Box (pcs) 

197020 EL-DS01 M12 1 

Material: Steel. 

Depending on the hardness of the soil, usually 1pc. enough for an object.` 

CONNECTORS EARTHING ROD TO STRIP / CONDUCTOR 


Length 

Width 


number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

ME014014 EL-1204 65 65 1/45 

Material: stainless steel 304 

Conductor size: 50mm² stranded 

Strip size: max. 40x4mm 

250 

ELMARK 


HOT-DIP GALVANIZED STRIP FOR EARTH 

Catalogue Model Length Thickness Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

ME301090 EL-EP 40x4 40 4 40 1 

Galvanized, according to EN 62561-2 

For lightning protection, earthing systems and ring equipotent bonding. 

Material: Zinc coated Steel. 

COLD GALVANIZED STRIP FOR EARTH 

Catalogue Model Length Thickness Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

M014008 40/4 6 4 40 1 

Coated in zinc to make them corrosion resistant. 



ALUMINUM ROUND CONDUCTOR 

Catalogue 

Model 

Diameter 


number 

(mm) 

ME301092 EL-LP 8 8 1/140 

ME301096 EL-LP 11 11 1/100 

Conductor material: AlMgSi. 

EL-LP 8 - without isolation. 

EL-LP 11- with not flammable halogen free isolation. 

CABLE HOLDER FOR FLAT ROOFS 

Catalogue Model Length Width 

Height Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

ME301082 EL- RCH 144 92 66 1 

Fixing the wire on flat roofs. 

Plastic stabilized PE against UV radiation with inserted concrete block. 

ELMARK 


251


EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING BAR 



number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

ME301084 EL-EBR 182 52 42 1 

Equipotential busbar for equipotential bonding to DIN VDE 0100-410/-540 and 

DIN 62561-15. 

Material of bar: Ms. 

Material of clamps: St galvanized. 

Connection options: 7 single or multi-wire cables 25 mm 2 or fine-wire cables to 

16 mm2 (max. D - 7 mm) 1 D8-12 mm 1 up to 30x5 / D8-12 mm. 

VARIABLE EARTHING CONNECTOR FOR ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS 

Catalogue 

Model 

Length 

Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

ME301088 EL-V 38 40 1 

Material: Aluminum- AlCu4MgSi(A). 

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm. 

Type of fastening screw: Hexagonal bolt. 

SCREW-LESS CABLE BRACKET FOR EARTHING CONDUCTORS 

Catalogue 

Model Length Width Height Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) 

ME301006 EL-VA 24.2 22 33.4 1/50 

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 mm & 11 mm. 

ATTACHING CLAMP 

Catalogue 

Model Length Width Height Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) 

ME014070 EL-AC 78 40 36 1/100 

Attaching the round conductors to metal parts of the premises 

ROOF GUTTER CLAMP 

Catalogue 

Model 

Length 

Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

ME301008 EL-RGC 50 45 1/100 

Suitable for all bulge and bead thicknesses 

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm 


252 

ELMARK 


CROSSBAR FOR EARTHING CONDUCTOR 

Catalogue 

Model 

Length 

Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

M301083 156 K8-10 ST 43 20 1/100 

ROD HOLDER 

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 and 11mm. Hot-dip galvanized. 



Length 

Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

M014014 113 Z-16 56 20 1/10 

For interception and earth entry rods 101 VL. Installed with crossbar and 

hexagonal bolts M6 x 16. With female thread M8 or through hole with D- 7 mm. 

Material: Die-cast zinc, Galvanized. 


BRIDGE CONNECTOR FOR ROD HOLDER 


Length 

Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

M014054 226 8-10 70 30 1/20 

For fitting round conductors with D 8 and 10 mm to earthing rods or flat strip 

30x3.5. Including 2 hexagonal bolts M8 x 20 high-grade stainless steel (V2A). 

Conforms to the requirements according to VDE 0185-305 (IEC 62305). 

Material: Steel, Hot-dip Galvanized. 

EARTH CONNECTION TERMINAL FOR CONDUCTOR TO STRIP 


Length 

Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

M031239 937 50 60 25 1/10 

For round conductor and flat strips. Suitable for cable 50 mm² and strips with 

width 40 mm. With 2 hexagonal bolts M6 x 20 mm. 

Material: Steel, Hot-dip galvanized. 

CROSS-CONNECTORS FOR STRIPS AND CONDUCTORS 


Length 

Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

ME301087 EL-1203 65 65 1/45 

Material: stainless steel 304 

Conductor size: 50mm² stranded 

Strip size: max. 40x4mm 

ELMARK 


253


SPACER CLIP FOR STRIPS 

Catalogue Model Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Packing/Box 

number 

(pcs) 

M301059 831 40 M6 65 14 14 1/10 

Suitable for strips with width 40 mm. 

With thread M6 and 2 hexagonal bolts M6 x 16 (F). 

Hot-dip galvanized. 


BRIDGE CONNECTOR FOR ROD HOLDER 


Length 

Width 

Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

M014017 288 DIN 170 30 1/20 

With 1 attaching hole with D- 11 mm. 

With 2 x 4 mounting hole with D- 5.2 mm. 

With 2 x 2 mounting hole with D- 6.9 mm. 

Material: Aluminum. 

INSPECTION DOOR 



number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(mm) 

(pcs) 

M500684 5800 VZ 180 13.5 230 1 

Lightweight design for flush-mounted separation points. 

Claw length approx. 80 mm. 

Strip galvanized. 


254 

ELMARK 


DISTRIBUTION BOXES 

FLUSH MOUNTING JUNCTION BOX EC350 SERIES 



• Box material: Shock resistant technopolymer 

• Screw material: Anticorrosive galvanized steel 

• For quick and easy cables or conduits inlet- Side are pre-cutting 

• By the separator it is possible to divide the box into separate sections for 

different circuits 


Catalogue 

number 

Type Description Box dimensions (mm) Packing / 

Box 

L H W 

1927410 EC350C4 Junction box 152 100 70 1/80 




1927415 EC3500S Separator 10/100 


ELMARK 


255


CONSOLE FOR BRICK AND CONCRETE FOR ITALIAN STANDARD 

MODULAR SWITCHES AND SOCKETS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Length 

(mm) 

Width 

(mm) 

Depth 

(mm) 

Packing 

(pcs) 

24207 1-3 Module Console Box 95 70 48 10/400 

24208 4 Module Console Box 118 70 48 10/240 


24210 Console Box Spacer 20/200 

UNIVERSAL CONSOLE BOX-FLUSH MOUNTING 


Diameter Packing 

number 

(mm) (pcs) 

1927302 Console box - Ø65 65 300 

CONSOLE BOX MULTI 


Diameter Packing (pcs) 

number 

(mm) 

1927301 Console box multi- Ø65 65 250 

DEEP CONSOLE BOX MULTI 


Depth Diameter Packing (pcs) 

number 

(mm) (mm) 

1927303 Deep console box multi- Ø68x65mm 68 65 90 

256 

ELMARK 


QUADRUPLE CONSOLE BOX MULTI - UK STANDARD 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Size (mm) Packing (pcs) 

Length Width Height 

1927304 Console box multi- UK Standard 83 83 50 90 

CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing 

(pcs) 

19274 Single 240 

19275 Double 120 

19276 Triple 60 

19278 Quadruple 50 

19279 Fivefold 25 


CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD ITALIAN TYPE 

Catalogue 

Type 

Packing (pcs) 

number 

24205 Triple Console box for plasterboard 160 

24206 Quadruple Console box for plasterboard 150 

Suitable for all bulge and bead thicknesses. 

Suitable for conductors with diameter 8 mm and 11mm. 


CONSOLE BOX FOR PLASTERBOARD ITALIAN TYPE 

Catalogue number Type Packing (pcs) 

26636 Sixfold Console box for plasterboard 10/160 

ELMARK 


257


DISTRIBUTION BOXES - SQUARE TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Size Packing 

(pcs) 

L W H 

1927402 Distribution Box 80/80/50 80 80 50 100 

1927400 Distribution Box 100/100/50 

100 100 50 40 

without screws 

DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR PLASTERBOARD - SQUARE TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Size Packing 

(pcs) 

L W H 



DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR PLASTERBOARD - ROUND TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Packing 

(pcs) 

1927403 Distribution box Ø65 65 240 



258 

ELMARK 


DISTRIBUTION BOXES - ROUND TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Packing 

(pcs) 



CAP WITH FASTENING CLIPS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Suitable for holes with 

diameter (mm) 

Packing (pcs) 


19277 Cap with clips 60-90 1/200 

ELMARK 


259

INSTALLATION | W-PROOF JUNCTION BOXES 

WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES 


product: 

Standard: EN 60670-1 

WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP44, IP55 

Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension 

or tapping at cable installations laying. Made of ABS material with openings for input - output 

conductors, with rubber gasket to provide the corresponding IP code. Resistant to chemical, 

thermal and UV rays. Direct wall mounting with screws. 



• Material: ABS 


Catalogue Box type 

Box dimensions Gasket dimensions IP code Packing/ 

number 

(mm) 

(mm) 

Box 

D L W H d c 

8070 WB50/50 50 - - 50 22.5 17 44 500 

8071 WB80/50 80 - - 50 22.5 17 44 200 

8072 WB85/85/50 - 85 85 50 22.5 18.5 44 200 

8073 WB100/100/70 - 100 100 70 30 23 55 100 

8076 WB150/110/70 - 150 110 70 28 23 55 60 

8074 WB150/150/70 - 150 150 70 35 29 55 60 

8075 WB200/100/70 - 200 100 70 35 29 55 50 

8077 WB200/155/80 - 200 155 80 35 29 55 30 

8078 WB255/200/80 - 255 200 80 35 29 55 30 

8079 WB300/250/120 - 300 250 120 35 29 55 20 

8080 WB400/350/120 - 400 350 120 35 29 55 5 

260 

ELMARK 


WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP55 

Catalogue 

number 

Box type Box dimensions (mm) Colour IP code Packing / 

Box 

L H W 

8023 CP 1020 90 43 40 Grey 55 1/456 

8024 CP 1021 75 75 40 Grey 55 1/280 

8025 CP 1022 85 85 40 Grey 55 1/224 


Catalogue 

number 

Box type Box dimensions (mm) Hole/pcs IP code Packing/ 

Box 

L H W d 

8091 WBG 50/50 50 50 50 25 4 55 300 

8092 WBG 80/50 80 80 50 25 4 55 240 

8093 WBG 85/85/50 85 85 50 25 7 55 200 

8001 WBG 100/100/70 100 100 70 27 7 65 100 

8002 WBG 150/110/70 150 110 70 27 10 65 60 

8003 WBG 150/150/70 150 150 70 27 7 65 60 

8004 WBG 200/100/70 200 100 70 27 8 65 50 

8005 WBG 200/155/80 200 155 80 35 10 65 30 

8006 WBG 200/200/80 200 200 80 35 12 65 30 

8007 WBG 255/200/80 255 200 80 35 12 65 30 

8008 WBG 300/250/120 300 250 120 35 12 65 20 

8009 WBG 400/350/120 400 350 120 35 16 65 5 


WATERPROOF JUNCTION BOXES IP54 WITH KNOCK OUTS 

Catalogue 

number 

Box type Box dimensions (mm) Colour IP code Packing / 

Box 

L H W 

8032 CP 1259 80 120 120 Grey 54 1/35 

8033 CP 1261 150 110 140 Grey 54 1/16 

8034 CP 1262 190 145 140 Grey 54 1/10 

8035 CP 1263 250 200 160 Grey 54 1/6 

8036 CP 1264 310 230 180 Grey 54 1/6 

ELMARK 


261




• Type: Waterproof junction box 

• Voltage: 450V AC 


• Entry QTY: 2, 3, 4, 5, 8 

• Terminal Blocks: 3 pole screw fix terminal 

• Cable cross section: 0,5-2,5mm2 

• Material: UL94V-2 Fire and flame retardant 

Catalogue 

number 

Entry QTY Box dimensions (mm) Colour IP code Packing / 

Box 

L H W 

31076 2 161.74 66.98 38 Black IP68 1 

Catalogue 

number 


Box 

L H W 

31077 3 161.74 93.97 38 Black IP68 1 

262 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 


Box 

L H W 

31078 4 161.74 93.97 38 Black IP68 1 

Catalogue 

number 


Box 

L H W 

31079 5 161.74 107.86 38 Black IP68 1 


Catalogue 

number 


Box 

L H W 

31080 8 170.63 49.3 38 Black IP68 1 

ELMARK 


263


MANHOLE BOXES WITH COVER AND 4 WAYS OUT 

TECHNICAL DATA: 

• Material: PP 

• Body colour: RAL 7030 grey 

• Type of cover: Blank, grey 

• Impact resistance: 08 

• Outlet cut sizes: 

‣ CP20: D50; D75; D90; D110 mm 

‣ CP30: D60 ; D75; D110; D125; D135; D160 mm 

‣ CP40: D100; D125; D160; D200; D250 mm 

• Ambient temperature: from -25° to 60°C 

• Breaking load: 

‣ CP20: 7.4kg/cm² 

‣ CP30: 4.8kg/ cm² 

‣ CP40: 2kg/cm² 

Catalogue Box type Box dimensions (mm) Outlet cut sizes (mm) Impact Packing/ 

number 

L W H 

resistance Box 

8040 CP-20 200 200 200 D-50/75/90/110 08 1 

8041 CP-30 300 300 300 D-60/75/110/125/135/160 08 1 

8042 CP-40 400 400 400 D-100/125/160/200/250 08 1 

* It is advisable to firmly anchor the manhole boxes to the ground . Prepare a concrete bed of at least 10cm and avoid 

height differences between the manhole box cover and the ground surface. 

Cat.number: 8040 



264 

ELMARK 


SUPPLY BUSBARS & DIN RAIL 

SUPPLY BUSBAR 

FUNCTIONS 

• Enables the supply of a group of conductors 

• Provides simultaneous supply 

• Conducting section – electro technical copper 

• Insulation of the conducting section 

CONNECTING 

• To the joining terminal of the breaker 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

(copper 

busbar) 

Length 

(m) 

Poles 

(number) 


• Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 



the outer parts: 960°С/3sec. 

• Rated current (phase): 63/100A 

In with one 

point 

of power 

supply 

In with two Packing/ Box 

points of (pcs) 

power supply 

14163 1P 63 1 54 63А 90А 20/100 

14190 1P 100 1 54 100A 120A 20/100 

14263 2P 63 1 28 63A 90A 10/50 

14363 3P 63 1 18 63А 90А 6/30 

14390 3P 100 1 18 100A 120A 5/50 

14463 DP 1N 1 56 63A 90A 10/50 

14190T C100 1P 1 - 125A 150A 20/100 

14290T C100 2P 1 - 125A 150A 10/50 

14390T C100 3P 1 - 125A 159A 5/20 

14163U U 1P 63 1 54 63A 90A 20/100 

14263U U 2P 63 1 28 63A 90A 10/50 

14363U U 3P 63 1 18 63A 90A 6/30 

14463U U 4P 63 1 13 63A 90A 5/20 

INSTALLATION | SUPPLY BUSBARS & RAILS 

ELMARK 


265

INSTALLATION | SUPPLY BUSBARS & RAILS 

14001 

MOUNTING (DIN) RAILS 

FUNCTIONS 

• Serves for mounting breakers, residual current 

devices, contactors and other elements 

• Provides a firm fixation of the elements 

CONNECTING 

• With bolts or other fixing elements to the 

mounting surface 


• Brass alloy with galvanic cover for 14001 

• Cold galvanized brass alloy for 14001G 

• Factory drilled mounting openings 

• Length: 1m 

Catalogue 

Length (m) 

Packing / Box (pcs) 

number 

14001 1m 20 / 100 

14001G 1m 20 / 100 

14001G 

266 

ELMARK 


TERMINALS 

SP 031 

SP 029 

ZERO TERMINALS 

Catalogue 

number 

Rail type 

Dimensions 

(mm) 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

Length Height Width 

14204 SP 029-4 82.9 21.5 12 10/500 

14206 SP 029-6 100.9 21.5 12 10/800 

14208 SP 029-8 118.9 21.5 12 20/300 

14210 SP 029-10 136.9 21.5 12 20/300 

14212 SP 029-12 182.4 21.5 12 20/250 

14304 SP 031-4 59.5 31.5 12.4 5/400 

14306 SP 031-6 76.5 31.5 12.4 5/400 

14308 SP 031-8 93 31.5 12.4 5/400 

14310 SP 031-10 111 31.5 12.4 5/400 

14312 SP 031-12 128 31.5 12.4 5/300 

INSTALLATION | TERMINALS 

ZERO RAILS 

They represent a brass rail with rectangular 

section with factory made openings for the 

conductors and bolts for clamping of the 

conductor. They are offered in types with 

insulated and non-insulated rail. They are used 

in the electrical distribution boxes for zeroing 

and earthing. 


• Material: brass for the current leading elements 

• Insulation material: plastic 

• Colour: gray/blue 



Catalogue Rail type 

Dimensions 

Bolt Number of Packing/ 

number 

(mm) 

terminals Box (pcs) 

Length 

(mm) 

Height 

(mm) 

Width 

(mm) 

Diameter 

(mm) 

14002 Brass 1000 7.8 6 5 M4 54 100 

14012 Zero insulated 250 - - 5 M4 16 200 

TERMINAL BLOCKS TBH TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Pieces In (А) Un (V) Colour Section of the 

in a strip conductor 

(mm²) 

Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

31003 TBH 3A 12 3 660 Semitransparent Up to 1.5 10 / 1000 

31006 TBH 6A 12 6 660 Semitransparent Up to 4 10 / 1000 

31010 TBH 10A 12 10 660 Semitransparent Up to 6 10 / 500 

31015 TBH 15A 12 15 660 White Up to 6 10 / 500 

31020 TBH 20A 12 20 660 White Up to 10 10 / 400 

ELMARK 


267


FIXED TERMINAL BLOCKS - LTU2 UK SERIES 

Fixed terminal blocks with universal application into electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail 

mounting. Variety of sizes for optimum using of available space by selection of appropriate 

terminals for the corresponding conductors. Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material. 


Section of the Size of the terminal In Un Colour Packing/ 

number 

conductor (mm²) (mm) (А) (V) 

Box (pcs) 

Single- Multi- L H W 

core core 

31033 LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 Grey 50/3000 

31032 LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 Red 50/3000 

31031 LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 Black 50/3000 

31035 LTU2UK 3N 0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 Blue 50/3000 


Section of the Size of the terminal In (А) Un (V) Colour Packing/ 

number 

conductor (mm²) (mm) 

Box (pcs) 


core core 

31053 LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 Grey 50/2000 

31052 LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 Red 50/2000 

31051 LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 Black 50/2000 

31055 LTU2UK 5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 Blue 50/2000 



number 


Box (pcs) 


core core 

31063 LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 Grey 50/1000 

31062 LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 Red 50/1000 

31061 LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 Black 50/1000 

31065 LTU2UK 6N 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 Blue 50/1000 



number 


Box (pcs) 


core core 

31103 LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 Grey 50/1000 

31102 LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 Red 50/1000 

31101 LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 Black 50/1000 

31105 LTU2UK 10N 0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 Blue 50/1000 

268 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Size of the terminal 

(mm) 

In 

(А) 

Un 

(V) 

Colour Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


core core 

31163 LTU2UIK 16 2.5-25 4-16 42.5 47 12.2 101 800 Grey 30/1200 

31353 LTU2UIK 35 10-35 10-35 55 62 15.2 125 800 Grey 20/400 

FIXED TERMINAL BLOCKS - JD SERIES 

Two-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect grounded conductors. 

Made of non-flammable insulation polymeric material. 

Catalogue Type Section of the Size of the terminal In Un Colour Packing/ 

number 

conductor (mm²) (mm) (А) (V) 

Box (pcs) 


core core 

31054 5JD 0.2-4 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 34 800 Yellow-green 50/1000 

31064 6JD 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 37 800 Yellow-green 50 /1000 



31354 35JD 2.5-35 2.5-35 42.5 47 15 135 800 Yellow-green 20/400 


MARKING TAGS - ZB TYPE 

Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits, different voltages and fixing 

of elements for DIN-rail mounting. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Pieces in a strip Colour Size 

(mm) 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

31906 ZB6 20 White 6 100/1200 

31908 ZB8 10 White 8 100/1200 

END COVER 

Catalogue Type Colour Thickness (mm) Packing/ Box 

number 

(pcs) 

31901 EC Grey 8 200 / 6000 

ELMARK 


269

UNIVERSAL END FIXED PIECES E/UK TYPE 


Catalogue Type Colour Thickness (mm) Packing/ Box 

number 

(pcs) 

31902 E/UK Grey 5 200/2400 

DOUBLE DECK TERMINAL BLOCKS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Rated 

current 

Rated 

voltage 

Colour Dimensions 

(mm) 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

Single- Multi-core (А) (V) 

L H W 

core 

31056D DDTB4/5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 32 500 Beige 59.9 54 6 50/1000 

31053D DDTB4/5N 0.2-6 0.2-4 32 500 Grey 59.9 54 6 50/1000 

31901D End cover for 

DDTB4/5N 

Grey 54 43.5 1.5 200/6000 

INSULATING MOUNTING TERMINAL - TB25 

FUNCTIONS 

• Provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors up to 35mm² to power supply busbar 

• Provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor to the breaker 

• Provides enough contact surface of the conductor 

• Brass alloy with galvanic cover 

• Fabric isolated with plastic cover 

• Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables 


• Rated current: up to 63A 



• Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm² 


Section of the Rated current Packing / Box 

number 

conductor (mm²) In (A) 

(pcs) 

31025 TB 25 2.5 to 35 63 20 / 2000 

270 

ELMARK 


UNIPOLAR DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BLOCKS FOR COPPER AND 

ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS 


• Housing material: PA Nylon 

• Terminal material: tin plated brass 

• Grade of flame retardant: UL94v-0 

• Mounting: DIN rail or screw fixing 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Current 

(A) 

Quantity cross sections 

mm² 

319080 PPDTB80 80A 1x 6-16 mm² 

4x 2.5-6 mm² 

2x 2.5-16 mm² 

319125 PPDTB125 125A 1x 10-35 mm² 

6x 2.5-16 mm² 

319160 PPDTB160 160A 1x 10-70 mm² 

6x 2.5-16 mm² 

319250 PPDTB250 255A 1x 35-120 mm² 

8x 2.5-16 mm² 

4x 2.5-10 mm² 

319400 PPDTB400 400A 1x 95-185 mm² 

8x 2.5-16 mm² 

4x 2.5-10 mm² 

Dimensions 

(mm) 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

L H W 

30 69 49 200 

29 77 46 150 

29 77 46 150 

47 96 50 150 

47 96 50 60 


TERMINAL BLOCKS TBF TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Pieces in 

a terminal 


conductor 

(mm²) 

Rated 

current 

(A) 

Rated 

voltage 

(V) 

Dimensions 

(mm) 

L H W 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

31021 2 terminal block 2 4 mm² 32 400 12.4 14.5 20.5 5000 



Note: The terminals are compatible with miпi water-proof boxes IP68 with catalogue 

number: 31085, 31086 and 31087 (page 273) 

FAST LIGHTING CABLE CONNECTOR 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

31024 Lighting 

connector 

Pieces in 

a terminal 


conductor 

(mm²) 

3 1.0-2.5mm²/ 

0.5-2.5 mm² 

Rated current 

(A) 

Rated voltage 

(V 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

25 400 1500 

ELMARK 


271

QUICK CONNECTION TERMINAL BLOCK 



Pieces in Section of the Rated Rated Dimensions Packing 

number 

a terminal conductor (mm²) current voltage (mm) (pcs.) 

(A) (V) L W H 

31026 2P- 2 in/2 out 4 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 25.5 14.4 1/100 

31027 3P- 3 in/3 out 6 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 30.5 14.4 1/70 

31028 5P- 5 in/5 out 10 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 40.5 14.4 1/50 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Pieces in 

a terminal 



Rated 

current 

(A) 

Rated 

voltage 

(V 

Dimensions (mm) Packing 

(pcs.) 

L W H 

31029 2P-2 in/ 4 out 6 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 25.9 14.55 1/50 

31030 2P-2 in/ 6 out 8 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 35.9 14.55 1/50 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Pieces in 

a terminal 



Rated 

current 

(A) 

Rated 

voltage 

(V 

Dimensions (mm) Packing 

(pcs.) 

L W H 

31034 3P-3 in/ 6 out 9 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 35.9 14.6 1/50 

31036 3P-3 in/ 9 out 12 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 41.4 48.5 14.6 1/50 

MODULE TERMINAL BLOCK FOR QUICK CABLE CONNECTION 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Pieces in 

a terminal 



Rated 

current 

(A) 

Rated Dimensions 

voltage (mm) 

(V L W H 

Packing 

(pcs.) 

31037 1P-1 in/ 1 out 2 0,75mm²- 4mm² 32 250 39.3 8.5 14.5 1/100 

272 

ELMARK 


1 input / 1 output 

QUICK CONNECTION TERMINAL BLOCK FOR DIN RAIL 



number 

conductor (mm²) Rated Rated Dimensions Packing 

current voltage 

(mm) (pcs.) 

(A) (V) L W H 

31038 1 input / 1 output 0,5mm²- 4mm² 32A 250/600V 8,5 28 14,4 50 





2 input / 2 output 3 input / 3 output 4 input / 4 output 5 input / 5 output 


MINI WATER-PROOF BOXES, IP68 


Rated Rated 

Dimensions Packing 

number 


(mm) 

(pcs.) 

(A) (V) L W H 

31085 Box for 2 entry terminals 32A 400V 42,4 38 26 20 

Note: The terminal is not included. Suitable with terminal 31021 (page 271) 


Rated Rated 


number 


(mm) 

(pcs.) 

(A) (V) L W H 

31086 Box for 3 entry terminals 32A 400V 52 38 26 15 



Rated Rated 


number 


(mm) 

(pcs.) 

(A) (V) L W H 

31087 Box for 3 in/ 3 out terminals 32A 400V 74 46,2 26 10 


ELMARK 


273

INSTALLATION | CONSUMABLES 

CONSUMABLES 

Standard: EN 60 423; 48580-81 

CABLE GLANDS PG TYPE 

Plastic pipes supplied with the corresponding 

gaskets and nuts. Designed to provide necessary 

IP code on the points where conductors 

pass through the walls of the electric distribution 

boxes. All cable gland elements are made 

of high quality plastic (PE) and rubber. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Overlapping 

field 


• Material: polyethylene (PE) 

• Colour: gray 



• IP 68 


T B d D L1 L2 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

500070 PG-7 3.5-6.8 16.3 18 12 6.6 10 22 100/4000 

500090 PG-9 5-8 18.9 21.7 15.5 8.5 10 25 100/4000 

500110 PG-11 6-10 21.7 23.5 18.5 10.4 8.5 29 100/3000 

500135 PG-13.5 7-12 23.6 26.5 20 13 10 29 100/2000 

500160 PG-16 8-14 26.5 29.3 21.5 14 9 29 100/2000 

500190 PG-19 9-17 29 32 23 17 12 29 100/2000 

500210 PG-21 10-18 32.3 35.6 28 19 12 35 100/1000 

500250 PG-25 15-22 32.6 32.6 29.8 24 13 31 100/1000 

500290 PG-29 16-24 41.1 45.4 36 26 12.5 40 50/500 

500360 PG-36 18-28 52 58 46 31.5 12.5 45 50/350 

500420 PG-42 26-36 57.4 61.9 51 37.6 17.5 47 20/200 

500480 PG-48 32-39 65.2 70.7 58 43 21 50 20/200 

CABLE CONNECTOR 

The cable connectors are hopeful way for assembling both cables. The high-temperature and 

water resistant stability assure to the connector assure a high degree of security even in extreme 

conditions. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


conductor 

(mm²) 

Length 

(mm) 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Cable 

glands 

type 

IP code Packing / 

Box (pcs) 

31072 Cable connector 11 2x0.5-2.5 78.3 26.2 PG11 68 50 

59245 Cable connector 16 5x1.5- 2.5 115 26.5 PG16 67 50 

59246 Cable connector 21 5x4-6 124 33.5 PG21 67 50 

274 

ELMARK 


Y-TYPE CABLE CONNECTORS 


• Material: polyethylene (PE) 

• Colour: gray 



• IP 68 

Catalogue 

number 

Terminal 

pieces 

Section of the Rated 

conductor current 

(mm²) (A) 

Length 

(mm) 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Cable 

glands 

type 

IP code 

31074 3 pin 0.5-4 24 139.7 32.56 M25 IP68 1 

31075 5 pin 0.5-4 24 139.7 32.56 M25 IP68 1 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


WATERPROOF TERMINAL BOX 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Rated current 

(A) 

Voltage 

(V) 

Material Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

31071 Terminal box IP44 0.5-4.0 6 450 Polycarbonate 1 

31070 Terminal box IP65 0.5-2.5 10 450 Polycarbonate 1 

Terminal box IP65 

Terminal box IP44 

ELMARK 


275


SUPPORT INSULATOR FOR LOW VOLTAGE 

Support insulators are used in control and 

distribution cabinets mounting when bars 

isolation is required. Provides reliable insulation 

of live parts. 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Impulse 

voltage 

(kV) 

Strength Fasting 

strength 



• Insulating voltage: 5000 V 

• Ambient temperature : -40 to +65°C 

Bolt Dimensions (mm) Packing 

(pcs.) 

H W a ø 

31725 SM 25 6 500 6 6 25 30 13 23 10/600 

31730 SM 30 8 550 8 8 30 32 10 27 10/500 

31735 SM 35 10 600 10 8 35 32 10 28 10/400 

31740 SM 40 12 650 12 8 40 40 10 33 10/240 

31751 SM 51 15 1000 20 8 51 50 12 28 10/240 

31776 SM 76 25 1500 40 10 76 45 16 34 10/120 

CABLE FIXING CLIPS 

Support insulators are used in control and 

distribution cabinets mounting when bars isolation 

is required. Provides reliable insulation 

of live parts. 



• Insulating voltage: 5000 V 

• Ambient temperature : -40 to +65°C 

Catalogue number Type Diameter (mm) Packing (pcs) Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

500004 CHR-4 4 100 100/500 

500005 CHR-5 5 100 100/ 500 

500006 CHR-6 6 100 100/ 300 

500007 CHR-7 7 100 100/ 300 

500008 CHR-8 8 100 100/ 250 

500009 CHR-9 9 100 100/ 200 

500010 CHR-10 10 100 100/ 200 

500012 CHR-12 12 100 100/ 100 

500014 CHR-14 14 100 100/ 50 

500016 CHR-16 16 100 100/ 50 

276 

ELMARK 


INSULATING TAPES 

PVC INSULATING TAPE 

Soft, flexible with good adhesiveness and flame retardant. Working temperature: 0-80°C. 

Electrical strength: 40kV/mm 

Catalogue 

number 

Colour 

Thickness (mm) Width 

(mm) 

Length 

(m) 

Packing/ Box 

(pcs) 

51011 Black 0.15 19 10 1/300 

51012 White 0.15 19 10 1/300 

51013 Blue 0.15 19 10 1/300 

51014 Red 0.15 19 10 1/300 

51015 Yellow / Green 0.15 19 10 1/300 

51021 Black 0.15 19 20 1/200 

51022 White 0.15 19 20 1/200 

51023 Blue 0.15 19 20 1/200 

51024 Red 0.15 19 20 1/200 

51025 Yellow / Green 0.15 19 20 1/200 


PVC INSULATING TAPE 3M TEMFLEX 1500 

Catalogue Colour 

Thickness Width Length (m) Packing/Box 

number 

(mm) (mm) 

(pcs) 

M151016 Black 0.15 19 20 10/100 

BLACK SELF - AMALGAMATING HIGH VOLTAGE TAPE BISHOP 963 

69kV | Waterproof | UV-Resistant | Moisture, corrosion and chemical resistance 

Catalogue Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box 

number 

(pcs) 

M051004 Black 19 9 1 

ELMARK 


277


ALUMINUM TAPE 

Ideal for temporary exhaust pipe repair heating, ventilation - electrics and electronics insulation 

and construction industries 

Catalogue number Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) 

M499469 Aluminium 50 10 1 

DUCT TAPE 

Ideal for temporary exhaust pipe repair heating, ventilation - electrics and electronics insulation 

and construction industries. 

Catalogue number Colour Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) 

51055 Grey 50 25 1 

M499153 Black 50 25 1 

MASKING TAPE 

Support insulators are used in control and distribution cabinets mounting when bars isolation is 

required. Provides reliable insulation of live parts. 

Catalogue number Width (mm) Length (m) Packing/Box (pcs) 

M516400 25 50 1 

M516401 50 50 1 

DOUBLE SIDED MOUNTING TAPE 


M516402 25 5 1 

M516403 50 25 1 

HAZARD TAPE 


M500179 50 100 1 

278 

ELMARK 


HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES 

Standard: EN 60 684 

HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES ZDG TYPE 

Thin-wall heat shrinkage tubes are used for insulation of cable connection, at conductors repair 

to protect the cable head from corrosion, for protection of the cable insulation from water and 

moisture, for restoring the cable insulation integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe which at 

temperature higher than 120°C shrinks its initial diameter to a certain degree. The material has 

high temperature and UV rays wear resistance. The material represents the so called permanently 

netted plastic. This material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed with the help of high energy 

electron rays so that inner molecular bonds between adjacent molecules are formed. After that 

the pipe is heated to the boiling point, the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. Then the 

pipe is sharply refrigerated and the molecules stay in the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite 

long time. Heating the pipe repeatedly (after being mounted to the given cable) the crystals melt 

again but due to the net structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter and take the form of the 

cable, pressing it and not allowing the moisture to get under the pipe. 


• Material: triple cross - linked polyolefin 

• Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, 

green, white 

• Shrinkage ratio: min 2 : 1 

• Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100°C 

• Shrinkage temperature: min 120°C 

• Condition of the material during fire 

exposure: slight burning 

• The material does not emit hazardous 

substances 

• Insulation resistance: 1х 10 12 Ω/cm 


• Insulating voltage 1000 V 

Catalogue 

number * 

Type D1 (mm) D2 (mm) S (mm) Packing / Box 

(m) 

301001x ZDG 1 0.5 0.04 200/4000 

301115x ZDG 1.5 0.75 0.04 200/4000 

301002x ZDG 2 1.0 0.05 200/4000 

301003x ZDG 3 1.5 0.05 200/2000 

301004x ZDG 4 2.0 0.08 100/1700 

301005x ZDG 5 2.5 0.08 100/1200 

301006x ZDG 6 3.0 0.08 100/1000 

301007x ZDG 7 3.5 0.08 100/1000 

301008x ZDG 8 4.0 0.08 100/1500 

301009x ZDG 9 4.5 0.08 100/1500 

301010x ZDG 10 5.0 0.08 100/1500 

301011x ZDG 11 5.5 0.08 100/1500 

301012x ZDG 12 6.0 0.08 100/1200 

301013x ZDG 13 6.5 0.08 100/1200 

301014x ZDG 14 7.0 0.08 100/1200 

301015x ZDG 15 7.5 0.08 100/1200 

301016x ZDG 16 8.0 0.08 100/1200 

301018x ZDG 18 9.0 0.08 50/600 

301020x ZDG 20 10 0.08 50/500 

301022x ZDG 22 11 0.08 50/500 

301025x ZDG 25 12.5 0.08 25/600 

301028x ZDG 28 14 0.08 25/300 

301030x ZDG 30 15 0.08 25/300 

301035x ZDG 35 17.5 0.08 25/300 

301040x ZDG 40 20 0.08 25/250 

301050x ZDG 50 25 0.08 25/200 

301060x ZDG 60 30 0.08 25/300 

301070x ZDG 70 35 0.08 25/250 

301080x ZDG 80 40 0.08 25/100 

301090x ZDG 90 45 0.08 25/150 

301100x ZDG 100 50 0.08 25/100 

301120x ZDG 120 60 0.08 25/200 

301150x ZDG 150 75 0.08 25/100 

Note: At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the 

colour must be added: B – blue; R – red; K - black; G - green; Y – yellow; 


ELMARK 


279


HEAT SHRINKAGE TUBES WITH GLUE GL TYPE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Colour Diameter before 

shrinking 

(mm) 

Wall thickness 

(mm) 

Shrinkage 

ratio 

Packing 

(m) 

3010024GL GL Black D2.4 (≥2.4) 0.7±0.15 3:1 200 

3010032GL GL Black D3.2 (3.5±0.3) 0.9±0.15 3:1 200 

3010048GL GL Black D4.8 (5.2±0.3) 1.0±0.15 3:1 100 

3010064GL GL Black D6.4 (6.8±0.4) 1.2±0.15 3:1 100 

3010079GL GL Black D7.9 (8.4±0.4) 1.3±0.15 3:1 100 

3010095GL GL Black D9.5 (9.9±0.4) 1.4±0.15 3:1 1.22 

3010127GL GL Black D12.7 (13.2±0.5) 1.6±0.20 3:1 1.22 

3010150GL GL Black D15.0 (15.6±0.5) 1.8±0.20 3:1 1.22 

3010191GL GL Black D19.1 (19.6±0.5) 2.0±0.20 3:1 1.22 

3010254GL GL Black D25.4 (25.4±0.8) 2.1±0.20 3:1 1.22 

3010300GL GL Black D30.0 (≥30) 2.2±0.20 3:1 1.22 

3010390GL GL Black D39 (≥40) 2.4±0.20 3:1 1.22 

3010500GL GL Black D50 (≥50) 2.7±0.25 3:1 1.22 

3010640GL GL Black D64 (≥60) 3.0±0.25 3:1 1.22 

280 

ELMARK 


CABLE TAGS – SETS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Section 

(mm) 

Number 

in a roller 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

318000 EC-0-0 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318001 EC-0-1 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318002 EC-0-2 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318003 EC-0-3 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318004 EC-0-4 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318005 EC-0-5 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318006 EC-0-6 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318007 EC-0-7 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318008 EC-0-8 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

318009 EC-0-9 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800a EC-0-a 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800b EC-0-b 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800R EC-0-R 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800S EC-0-S 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800T EC-0-T 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800N EC-0-N 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800P EC-0-P 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800E EC-0-Е 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800A EC-0-А 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800B EC-0-B 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800C EC-0-C 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

31800Q EC-0-Q 1.5 - 3.2 1000 100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Section 

(mm) 

Number 

in a roller 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

318010 EC-1-0 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318011 EC-1-1 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318012 EC-1-2 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318013 EC-1-3 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318014 EC-1-4 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318015 EC-1-5 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318016 EC-1-6 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318017 EC-1-7 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318018 EC-1-8 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

318019 EC-1-9 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801a EC-1-a 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801b EC-1-b 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801R EC-1-R 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801S EC-1-S 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801T EC-1-T 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801N EC-1-N 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801P EC-1-P 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801E EC-1-Е 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801A EC-1-А 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801B EC-1-B 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801C EC-1-C 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 

31801Q EC-1-Q 2.6 - 4.2 1000 150 


Catalogue 

number 

Type Section 

(mm) 

Number 

in a roller 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

318020 EC-2-0 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318021 EC-2-1 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318022 EC-2-2 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318023 EC-2-3 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318024 EC-2-4 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318025 EC-2-5 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318026 EC-2-6 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318027 EC-2-7 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318028 EC-2-8 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

318029 EC-2-9 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802a EC-2-a 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802b EC-2-b 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802R EC-2-R 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802S EC-2-S 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802T EC-2-T 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802N EC-2-N 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802P EC-2-P 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802E EC-2-Е 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802A EC-2-А 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802B EC-2-B 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802C EC-2-C 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

31802Q EC-2-Q 3.6 - 5.2 500 150 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Section 

(mm) 

Number 

in a roller 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

318030 EC-3-0 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318031 EC-3-1 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318032 EC-3-2 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318033 EC-3-3 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318034 EC-3-4 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318035 EC-3-5 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318036 EC-3-6 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318037 EC-3-7 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318038 EC-3-8 5 - 7.2 250 150 

318039 EC-3-9 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803a EC-3-a 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803b EC-3-b 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803R EC-3-R 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803S EC-3-S 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803T EC-3-T 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803N EC-3-N 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803P EC-3-P 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803E EC-3-Е 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803A EC-3-А 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803B EC-3-B 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803C EC-3-C 5 - 7.2 250 150 

31803Q EC-3-Q 5 - 7.2 250 150 

ELMARK 


281

CABLE REELS & 

CABLES 

• Cable reels 

• Multi-plugs and accessories 

• Outside power cables 

• Inside power cables 

• Installation conductors 

• Cables with rubber insulation 

• Communication cables

CABLE REELS 

CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL PROTECTION - MAK - 2A 

Catalogue 

Cable 

Cable 

Cable 

Packing / Box 

number 

type 

specification length (m) (pcs) 

47911 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 10 4 

CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL PROTECTION - MAK - 3 

Catalogue number Cable type Cable 

Cable 

Packing / Box 


47921 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm2 20 4 

INSTALLATION | CABLE REELS 

CABLE REEL WITH THERMAL PROTECTION - MAK - 4 

Catalogue number Cable type Cable 

specification 

Cable 

length (m) 

Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

47927 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 25 2 

47940 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 40 1 

47950 H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 50 2 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

CABLE REEL - HJR TYPE, IP 44 

Catalogue Type Cable type Cable Cable Packing / Box 

number 


47960 HJR - 10AP H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 25 2 

ELMARK 


283

CABLE REEL - HJR TYPE, IP 44 

INSTALLATION | CABLE REELS 


number 


47959 HJR - 10P H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 50 1 

CABLE REEL - GEH TYPE, IP 44 


number 


47961 GEH-39 H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 27+3 1 

CABLE REEL - GEH TYPE, IP 44 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 


number 


47962 GEH-40 H07RN-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 47+3 1 

EMPTY CABLE REEL 029A 

Catalogue 

number 

Suitable for cable type Outlets Packing / Box 

(pcs) 

47910 H05VV-F 3G1.5mm2- max 40m/ 

3G1.0mm2- max 50m 

4 socket 

16A/230V 

1 

284 

ELMARK 


MULTI-PLUGS 

DESKTOP MULTI-PLUGS WITH 3 GERMAN + 2 USB SOCKETS + 

ON/OFF KEY, SET 



• Material: Aluminum alloy + PC 

• Cable type: 3G1.5mm² 

• Cable length: 2 meters 

• USB Output: 2x5V/2.1A 

Catalogue Colour Functional Length Diameter Cut size Packing / Box 

number 

part colour (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) 

47006 Silver Black 367 60 61 1/20 

INSTALLATION | MULTI-PLUGS 

THREE WAY CLIP MULTI-PLUG 

Catalogue Cable type Cable 

Cable 

Colour Material 

number 

specification length (m) 

47003 H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m White & Grey PP+ABS 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

EXTENSION CORDS 

Catalogue Type Cable type Cable 

Cable length Cable colour 

number 

specification (m) 

47333 Extension cord H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 10 Orange 

47334 Extension cord H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 15 Orange 

POWER CABLE 

Catalogue number Cable type Cable specification Cable length (m) Cable colour 

47001 H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 White 

Note: Warranty not available. 

ELMARK 


285

MULTI-PLUG 3 HOLES WITH KEY 



Cable 

Packing / Box 

number 


47332 3 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/40 

MULTI-PLUGS 4 HOLES WITH KEY 


Cable 

Packing / Box 

number 


47432 4 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/40 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 



Cable 

Packing / Box 

number 


47632 6 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/25 



Cable 

Packing / Box 

number 


47732 8 holes H05VV-F 3G1.5mm² 2 1/25 

286 

ELMARK 


MULTIPLUG - HX-3N TYPE 


Cable 

Packing (pcs) 

number 


47031 HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm 2 1.5m 40 

47080 HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 3.0m 5 / 40 

47081 HX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 5.0m 5 / 40 

Max.3500W,16/250~ 



Cable 

Packing (pcs) 

number 


47041 HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm 2 1.5m 50 

47082 HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 3.0m 30 

47083 HX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 5.0m 25 


Max.3500W,16/250~ 



Cable 

Packing (pcs) 

number 


47061 HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm 2 1.5m 50 

47063 HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 3.0m 40 

47065 HX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 5.0m 40 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

Max.3500W,16/250~ 

ELMARK 


287

MULTIPLUG WITH KEY HKX-3N TYPE 


Catalogue 

number 

Type Cable type Cable 

specification 

Cable 

length (m) 

Packing 

(pcs) 

47131 HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm 2 1.5m 5/40 

47133 HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 3.0m 5/30 

47135 HKX-3N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 5.0m 5/25 

Max.3500W,16/250~ 


Catalogue 

number 


specification 

Cable 

length (m) 

Packing 

(pcs) 

47142 HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm 2 1.5m 5/40 

47143 HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 3.0m 5/30 

47145 HKX-4N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 5.0m 5/25 

Max.3500W,16/250~ 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 


specification 

Cable 

length (m) 

Packing 

(pcs) 

47162 HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.0mm 2 1.5m 5 / 40 

47163 HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 3.0m 5 / 30 

47165 HKX-6N H05VV-F 3 x 1.5mm 2 5.0m 5 / 25 

Max.3500W,16/250~ 

288 

ELMARK 


ADAPTERS - DOUBLE | WHITE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Colour Rated 

current 

in (A) 

Rated 

power 

in (W) 

192213 Adapter double White 16 3500 50 

192211 Adapter double with key White 16 3500 50 

ADAPTERS - TRIPLE | WHITE 

Packing 

(pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 


current 

in (A) 

Rated 

power 

in (W) 

192209 Adapter triple White 16 3500 40 

192207 Adapter triple with key White 16 3500 40 

Packing 

(pcs) 

ADAPTERS - DOUBLE | GRAPHITE 

Catalogue 

number 


current 

in (A) 

Rated 

power 

in (W) 

192212 Adapter double Graphite 16 3500 50 

192210 Adapter double with key Graphite 16 3500 50 

Packing 

(pcs) 

ELMARK 


289


ADAPTERS - TRIPLE | GRAPHITE 

Catalogue 

number 


current 

in (A) 

Rated 

power 

in (W) 

192208 Adapter triple Graphite 16 3500 40 

192206 Adapter triple with key Graphite 16 3500 40 

MULTI-SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 


current 

in (A) 

Rated 

power 

in (W) 

192216 Multi-socket double Black 16 3500 60 

192217 Multi-socket double White 16 3500 60 

192218 Multi-socket triple Black 16 3500 60 

192219 Multi-socket triple White 16 3500 60 

Packing 

(pcs) 

Packing 

(pcs) 

RUBBER FEMALE TRIPLE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current 

in (A) 

Colour Poles Packing 

(pcs) 

192140/BL Trippe socket 16A Black 1P+N+E 1/10/60 

RUBBER MULTI-SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 


current in 

(A) 

Rated 

power in 

(W) 

192120/WH Multi-socket triple White 16 3500 20 

192120/BL Multi-socket triple Black 16 3500 20 

Packing 

(pcs) 

290 

ELMARK 


RUBBER SCHUKO SOCKETS 

Catalogue Type Colour Rated current Material Packing (pcs) 

number 

In (A) 

192119/WH Socket White 16 Rubber 25 

192119/BL Socket Black 16 Rubber 25 

RUBBER FEMALE SOCKET PLUG 

Catalogue 

number 

192136/BL 

Type 

Rubber socket 

plug 

Rated current Colour Poles Packing (pcs) 

In (A) 

16A Black 2P+E 1/30/180 


RUBBER SCHUKO PLUG 


Rated current Colour Material Packing (pcs) 

number 

In (A) 

192118/WH Plug 16 White Rubber 25 

192118/BL Plug 16 Black Rubber 25 

192118/R Plug 16 Red Rubber 25 

RUBBER MALE SCHUKO PLUG 



number 

In (A) 

192135/BL Rubber plug 16A Black 2P+E 1/50/300 

ELMARK 


291

FEMALE PLUG 




number 

In (A) 

192128/WH Female plug 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300 

MALE PLUG WITH LIGHTED BUTTON 

Catalogue 

number 

192127/WH 

Type 

Male plug with 

button 


In (A) 

16 White 1P+N+E 1/40/240 

ANGLE SCHUKO PLUG 



number 

In (A) 

192129/WH L- type plug 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300 

192129/BL L- type plug 16 Black 1P+N+E 1/50/300 

MALE SCHUKO PLUG 



number 

In (A) 

192130/WH Male plug 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300 

MALE SCHUKO PLUG WITH HANDLE 



number 

In (A) 

192131/WH Plug with handle 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300 

192132/BL Plug with handle 16 Black 1P+N+E 1/50/300 

292 

ELMARK 


BRITISH ADAPTER 



number 

In (A) 

192125/WH British Adapter 16 White 1P+N+E 1/50/300 

UNIVERSAL PLUG ADAPTER 



number 

In (A) 

192126/WH Universal Adapter 16 White 1P+N+E 1/40/240 


PLUG BAKELITE 



number 

In (A) 

19211102 Plug 16 White Bakelite 80 

19211101 Plug 16 Black Bakelite 80 

TWO PIN PLUG 



number 

In (A) 

192116/WH Plug 6 White PP 100 

192116/BL Plug 6 Black PP 100 

TWO PIN PLUG WITH EXTRACTION RING 



number 

In (A) 

192115/WH Plug 10 White PC 1/500 

192115/BL Plug 10 Black PC 1/500 

ELMARK 


293

TWO POLE SOCKET WITH HOOK 




number 

In (A) 

192123/BL Socket 10 Black PC 1/500 

192123/WH Socket 10 White PC 1/500 

BRITISH PLUG 



number 

In (A) 

192114 British plug 13 White PMMA 1/20 

FOOT SWITCH 



number 

In (A) 

192124/WH Switch 10 White PC 1/100 

INTERMEDIATE SWITCH 


Voltage Rated current Colour Packing (pcs) 

number 

(V) 

In (A) 

192001/WH IS-W 250 6 White 1 

192001/BL IS-B 250 6 Black 1 

INTERMEDIATE SWITCH WITH CABLE 

Catalogue Cable type 

Cable length Colour Packing (pcs) 

number 

(m) 

47007/WH H03VV-F 2G0,50mm² 2 White 1/180 

47007/BL H03VV-F 2G0,50mm² 2 Black 1/180 

294 

ELMARK 


OUTSIDE POWER CABLES 

Standards: 

DIN VDE 0293-308 - Colour coded acc 

DIN VDE 0276 part 603 or HD 186 

DIN VDE 0295 - Wire class acc 

NYY 

Power cable, Cu-conductor, PVC-insulation, PVC-sheathing 

NYY; PP00; PP00; PP00; NYY; NYY; CYY; NYY; NYY 

Power cable for construction of underground distribution grids and installations of industrial and 

public projects, where mechanical damages are not to be expected. Suitable for transmission and 

distribution of electric power at nominal voltage u0/u 0,6/1 kV. 


• Power cable acc. to DIN VDE 0276 part 603 

• Ambient temperature 

• Fixed installation: -30°C to +50°C 

• TemperatuTre of laying: min. -5°C 

• Max. operating temperature: +70°C 

• Short circuit temperature: +160°C 

• Short circuit duration up to 5 sec. 

• Nominal voltage Uo/U- 0.6/1 kV 

• Test voltage: AC-4 kV/50 Hz 

Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Wires 

shape 

Wires 

shape 

Wires 

shape 

Wires 

shape 

Colour 

Colour 

Colour 

Colour 

CONSTRUCTION 

• Solid or stranded Cu wires cl. 1 or cl. 2 acc. to 

DIN VDE 0295 

• Insulation: PVC compound 

• Inner sheath: filling compound 

• Outer sheath: PVC compound 

• Outer sheath colour: black 

• re - round solid 

• rm - round multi-core 

• sm - sector multi-core 

• se - sector solid conductor 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

833019 2x1.5 re Black 12.2 28 192 100 

833020 2x2.5 re Black 12.9 46 229 100 

833021 2x4 re Black 14.9 75 315 100 

833022 2x6 re Black 15.9 112 382 100 

833023 2x10 rm Black 17.5 188 509 1 

833024 2х16 rm Black 19.4 298 676 1 

Packing 

(m) 

833030 3x1.5 re Black 12.1 43 201 100 

833031 3x2.5 re Black 12.9 70 247 100 

833032 3x4 re Black 15 112 350 100 

833034 3x6 re Black 16.1 168 435 100 

833036 3x10 rm Black 18 282 606 1 

833038 3х16 rm Black 20.1 447 828 1 

Packing 

(m) 

833060 4x1.5 re Black 12.9 57 232 100 

833061 4x2.5 re Black 13.8 93 289 100 

833062 4x4 re Black 16.2 149 419 100 

833063 4x6 re Black 17.4 223 525 100 

833064 4x10 rm Black 19.5 376 741 1 

833065 4х16 rm Black 21.8 595 1024 1 

Packing 

(m) 

833077 5x1.5 re Black 13.7 71 272 100 

833078 5x2.5 re Black 14.8 116 341 100 

833079 5x4 re Black 17.4 187 494 100 

833080 5x6 re Black 19 279 635 100 

833081 5х10 rm Black 21.6 470 911 1 

833082 5х16 rm Black 24.1 744 1262 1 

INSTALLATION | CABLES 

YEARS TOTAL 

7 WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 

ELMARK 


295


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 

Standards: 

BDS 904-84 - according to construction 

IEC60332-1- according to flame retardant 

CBT-C 

Power cable with solid or stranded Cu wires, PVC insulation and sheathing 

СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с; СВТ-с 

A cable with solid or stranded CU wires, resistant to the sun radiance and atmospheric influences. 

It is suitable for spread and transfer of electrical energy if it is installed steady outside or in indoor 

spaces cable trunking, electrical cable conduit, cable trays, directly into tunnels, earthworks, pits 

and etc. 


• Nominal voltage Uo- 0.6kV 

• Nominal voltage U- 1kV 

• Ambient temperature- from -30°C to +50°C 

• Max. operating temperature- +70C° 

• Temperature of laying- ≥-5°C 

• Conductor material- Copper (Cu) 

• Conductors insulation - PVC compound 

• Outer stealth material-filling sheath and PVC 

compound 

Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Wires 

shape 

Wires 

shape 

Colour 

Colour 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

817020 2X1 re Black 9.5 20 100 100 

817021 2X1.5 re Black 10.0 28 120 100 

817022 2X2.5 re Black 10.6 46 150 100 

817023 2X4 re Black 12.5 73 210 100 

817024 2X6 re Black 13.3 110 260 100 

817025 2X10 re Black 15.2 182 370 1 

817026 2Х16 rm Black 18 305 560 1 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Wires 

shape 

Colour 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

817036 3X1 re Black 9.7 28 120 100 

817037 3X1.5 re Black 10.2 42 140 100 

817039 3X2.5 re Black 11.0 69 180 100 

817041 3X4 re Black 13.0 110 260 100 

817043 3X6 re Black 14.0 165 340 100 

817045 3X10 re Black 16.0 275 480 1 

817047 3Х16 rm Black 19.5 450 695 1 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Wires 

shape 

Colour 

CONSTRUCTION 

• Solid or stranded CU wires, class 1 or class 2 

• re - round solid 

• rm - round multi-core 

• sm - sector multi-core 

• se - sector solid conductor 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

817067 4X1 re Black 10.4 37 140 100 

817068 4X1.5 re Black 11.0 55 165 100 

817069 4X2.5 re Black 11.9 91 215 100 

817070 4X4 re Black 14.1 146 315 100 

817071 4X6 re Black 15.4 220 410 100 

817072 4X10 re Black 17.4 365 595 1 

817073 4X16 rm Black 20.6 585 950 1 

Packing 

(m) 

817083 5X1 re Black 11.2 45 160 100 

817084 5X1.5 re Black 11.8 69 195 100 

817085 5X2.5 re Black 12.8 114 260 100 

817086 5X4 re Black 15.5 182 380 100 

817087 5X6 re Black 16.8 275 500 100 

817088 5х10 re Black 19,2 455 735 1 

817089 5х16 re Black 23,2 745 1150 1 

296 

ELMARK 


INSIDE POWER CABLES 

Standards: 

Flat conductor acc. to BDS IEC 60227-5 

Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 6 acc. to IEC 60228 

H03VH-H 

Flat conductor, flexible Cu-wires, PVC-insullation 

ШВПЛ-А; PL; H03VH-H; P/L; H03VH-H; H03VH-H; H03VH-H; RVV; H03VH-H 

Designed for connection of electrical appliances to the electrical grid, for connection of mobile users, 

devices and appliances. 


• Ambient temperature: -40°C to+50°C 


• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300/300 V 

• Test voltage: 2000 V 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Colour 

CONSTRUCTION 

• Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 6 acc. to IEC 60228 

• Flat conductor acc. to BDS IEC 60227-5 


• Insulation colour: white or black-red 

Thickness 

(mm) 

Width 

(mm) 

Cu 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

820001 2x0.50 White or Black-Red 6.0 3.0 9 25 100 

820002 2x0.75 White or Black-Red 6.4 3.2 14 30 100 

820017 2x1 White or Black-Red 6.8 3.4 19.2 31 100 

820018 2x1.50 White or Black-Red 7.6 4.0 28.8 38 100 


Standards: 

Conductor acc. to HD 21,5 S3 

Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to IEC 60228 

H03VV-F 

Conductor with flexible Cu-wires, PVC insulation and sheath 

ШВПЛ-Б; PP/L; PP/L; PP/L; H03VV-F; H03VV-F; MYYUP; H03VV-F; H03VV-F 

Conductor with parallel or stranded in a bundle insulated cores, designed for connection of 

electrical appliances to the electrical grid, for connection of mobile users, devices and appliances. 

YEARS TOTAL 

7 WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 


• Variant of the conductor: H03VVH2-F - flat type 

• Ambient temperature: -30°C to +50°C 




CONSTRUCTION 

• Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to IEC 60228 


• Sheafing: PVC compound 

• Outer sheath colour: white 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

(flat) 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Colour Thickness 

(mm) 

Width 

(mm) 

Cu 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

820004 H03VVH2-F 2x0,5 White 6.0 3,6 10,0 30 100 

820006 H03VVH2-F 2x0,75 White 6.4 3,9 14,5 39 100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

(round) 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Colour 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

820003 H03VV-F 2X0,5 White 9.5 100 25 100 

820007 H03VV-F 3X0.5 White 10.0 120 30 100 

ELMARK 


297


Standards: 

Flexible cable acc. to HD 21.5 S3, 

DIN VDE 0281 part 5 

Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to 

DIN VDE 0295, IEC 60228 

Colour coding: acc. to DIN VDE 0293-308 

H05VV-F 

Conductor with flexible Cu-wires, PVC insulation and sheath 

ШВПС; PP/J; PP/J; PP/J; H05VV-F; H05VV-F; MYYM; H05VV-F; H05VV-F 

Conductor with parallel or stranded in a bundle insulated cores, designed for connection of electrical 

appliances to the electric grid, for connection of mobile users, devices and appliances. 


• Variant of the conductor: H05VVH2-F - flat type 





CONSTRUCTION 

• Flexible Cu-wires, cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE 0295, 

IEC 60228 

• Insulation/outer sheath: PVC compound; 


Catalogue Cross section Colour Outer diameter Cu weight Total weight Packing 

number (n x mm²) 

(mm) 

(kg/km) (kg/km) (m) 

821001 2 x 0.75 White 7.6 14.0 62 100 

821002 2 x 1 White 8.0 19.5 71 100 

821003 2 x 1.5 White 9.0 28.0 94 100 

821004 2 x 2.5 White 11.0 47.0 114 100 

821005 2 X 4 White 12.0 75.0 197 100 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



(mm) 


821008 3 x 0.75 White 8.0 21.5 74 100 

821009 3 x 1 White 8.4 29.0 85 100 

821010 3 x 1.5 White 9.8 42.0 120 100 

821011 3 x 2.5 White 12.0 70.0 182 100 

821012 3 x 4 White 13.0 114.0 252 100 



(mm) 


821016 4 x 0.75 White 8.6 29.0 92 100 

821017 4 x 1 White 9.4 38.5 109 100 

821018 4 x 1.5 White 11.0 56.0 151 100 

821019 4 x 2.5 White 13.0 93.5 225 100 

821020 4 x 4 White 14.0 151.0 315 100 



(mm) 


821024 5 x 0.75 White 9.6 36.0 115 100 

821025 5 x 1 White 10.0 48.0 132 100 

821026 5 x 1.5 White 12.0 70.0 188 100 

821027 5 x 2.5 White 14.0 117.0 280 100 

821028 5 X 4 White 15.5 189.0 395 100 

298 

ELMARK 


INSTALLATION CONDUCTORS 

Standards: 

Conductor acc. to HD 21.3 S3, DIN VDE 

0281 part 3 

Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to DIN VDE 

0295, IEC 60228 

H05V-U, H07V-U 

Conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-insulation 

ПВ-А1; P; P; P; H05V-U, H07V-U; H05V-U, H07V-U (CY); H05V-U, H07V-U (FY); 

H05V-U, H07V-U; 

For fixed installation in lighting networks, electric power installations, wiring of electrical 

switchboards, machines and equipment. 


H05V-U, H07V-U 


• Temperature of laying: min. -5°C 


• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 

- H05V-U 300/500 V 

- H07V-U 450/750 V 

• Test voltage: 

- H05V-U 2000 V 

- H07V-U 2500 V 

CONSTRUCTION 

• Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to DIN VDE 0295, 

IEC 60228 


• Insulation colour: 

- Blue: available cross sections up 0.5 to 10 mm² 

- Red: available cross sections up 0.5 to 10 mm² 

- Black: available cross sections up 0.5 to 10 mm² 

- White: available cross sections up 0.5 to 4 mm² 

- Yellow-Green: available cross sections up 0.5 to 

10 mm² 

- Brown: available cross sections up 0.5 to 10 mm² 


Catalogue Type Cross section Outer 

Cu weight Total weight Packing 

number 

(n x mm²) diameter (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km) (m) 

822001 H05V-U 0.5 2.4 4.5 9 100 

822002 H05V-U 0.75 2.6 7.0 12 100 

822003 H05V-U 1 2.8 9.0 15 100 

Note: At orders of the desires colour, must be added after the catalogue number: 

BL – blue; R – red; B - black; W- white; YG- yellow green; BR- brown 

YEARS TOTAL 

7 WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



number 


822004 H07V-U 1.5 3.3 13.5 21 100 

822005 H07V-U 2.5 3.9 22.0 33 100 

822006 H07V-U 4 4.4 35.0 48 100 

822007 H07V-U 6 4.6 52.5 68 100 

822008 H07V-U 10 6.4 87.5 113 100 



ELMARK 


299


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 

Standards: 

PVC conductor acc. to HD 21.3 S3, 

DIN VDE 0281 part 3 

Flexible Cu wires cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE 

0295, IEC 60228 

H05V-K, H07V-K 

Conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-insulation 

ПВ-А2; PF; P/F; P/F; H05V-K, H07V-K; H05V-K, H07V-K (CYA); MYF; 

H05V-K, H07V-K; 

For fixed installation wiring of electrical switchboards, machines and equipment, where small 

bending radius is required. 


H05V-K, H07V-K 




• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 

- H05V-K 300/500 V 

- H07V-K 450/750 V 

• Test voltage: 

- H05V-K 2000 V 

- H07V-K 2500 V 

CONSTRUCTION 

• Flexible Cu wires cl. 5 acc. to DIN VDE 0295, IEC 

60228 


• Insulation colour: 

- Blue: available cross sections up 0.5 to 25 mm² 

- Red: available cross sections up 0.5 to 25 mm² 

- Black: available cross sections up 0.5 to 25 mm² 

- White: available cross sections up 0.5 to 4 mm² 

- Yellow-Green: available cross sections up 0.5 

to 25 mm² 

- Brown: available cross sections up 0.5 

to 10 mm² 



number 


823002 H05V-K 0.5 2.6 5.0 10 100 

823003 H05V-K 0.75 2.8 7.0 13 100 

823004 H05V-K 1 3.0 9.5 16 100 





number 


823005 H07V-K 1.5 3.5 14.0 23 100 

823006 H07V-K 2.5 4.2 23.0 36 100 

823007 H07V-K 4 4.8 36.5 52 100 

823008 H07V-K 6 6.3 57.0 74 100 

823009 H07V-K 10 7.6 96.0 131 100 

823010 H07V-K 16 8.8 151.0 195 100 

823011 H07V-K 25 11.0 235.0 300 100 



300 

ELMARK 


Standards: 

Flat conductor acc. to BDS 4305-90 

Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to BDS 904-84 

NYIFY-O/J 

Flat installation conductor, Cu-wires, PVC-insulation, PVC-sheath 

ПВВ-МБ1; PG; PP/R; PP/R; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYIFY-O/J; NYFAZ 

Installation conductor with parallel Cu-wires for fixed installation in lighting networks and electric 

power installations. 







CONSTRUCTION 

• Solid Cu wires cl. 1 acc. to BDS 904-84 


• Sheath: PVC compound 



Catalogue 

number 

Cross section Colour 

(n x mm²) 

Conductor 

Thickness 

(mm) 

Conductor 

Width 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

834001 2x1 White 3.70 10.30 17.9 55 100 

834002 2x1.5 White 4.10 11.20 26.6 65 100 

834003 2x2.5 White 5.00 12.90 44.3 97 100 

834004 2x4 White 5.60 14.20 70.6 135 100 

834005 2x6 White 6.50 16.00 104.4 190 100 

YEARS TOTAL 

7 WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross section Colour 

(n x mm²) 

Conductor 

Thickness 

(mm) 

Conductor 

Width 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

834007 3x1 White 3.70 14.00 26.8 73 100 

834008 3x1.5 White 4.10 15.30 39.8 95 100 

834009 3x2.5 White 5.00 16.90 66.4 142 100 

834010 3x4 White 5.60 19.80 104.2 200 100 

834011 3x6 White 6.50 22.50 156.5 280 100 

ELMARK 


301


Standards: 

DIN VDE 0295; IEC 60228- according 

to construction DIN VDE 0250-204- 

according to multi-core conductors 

IEC60332-1- according to flame retardant 

NYM 

Multi-core conductor with Cu wires and PVC insulation 

NYM; PGP; PGP; PP-Y; PGP; NYM; NYM; NYM; NYM; NYM 

For fixed instalations in , or on under plasterboard, in lighting networks in dry places. Can be used 

and in damp or wet rooms, in wall and concrete, in switchboards and machines. Is suitable for outdoor 

use if cable is protected against direct sunshine. 


• Nominal voltage: Uo- 300V; U- 500V 

• Ambient temperature- from -20°C to +50°C 

• Max. operating temperature- +70C° 

• Installation temperature- ≥-5°C 

• Conductor material- Copper (Cu) 

• Conductors insulation - PVC compound 

• Outer sheath material - filling sheath and PVC 

compound 

CONSTRUCTION 

• Solid CU wires, class 1 and class 2 for cross 

section above 10mm² 

Catalogue Cross section Colour Outer diameter Total weight Packing 


(mm) 

(kg/km) (m) 

832008 2x1.5 Grey 8.8 120 100 

832009 2x2.5 Grey 10.0 160 100 

832010 2x4 Grey 11.0 220 100 

832011 2Х6 Grey 12.0 250 100 

832012 2x10 Grey 15.0 420 1 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 



(mm) 

(kg/km) (m) 

832016 3x1.5 Grey 9.2 136 100 

832017 3x2.5 Grey 10.5 190 100 

832018 3x4 Grey 11.5 260 100 

832019 3Х6 Grey 13.0 330 100 

832020 3x10 Grey 16.5 520 1 



(mm) 

(kg/km) (m) 

832023 4x1.5 Grey 10.0 160 100 

832024 4x2.5 Grey 11.3 230 100 



(mm) 

(kg/km) (m) 

832031 5x1.5 Grey 11.0 190 100 

832032 5x2.5 Grey 12.0 270 100 

302 

ELMARK 


CABLES WITH RUBBER INSULATION 

Standards: 

DIN VDE 0295; IEC 60228- according to 

construction DIN VDE 0293-308 and HD 

186- according to colour coating DIN 

VDE 0482-332-1-2; 

IEC60332-1-according to flame retardant 

H05RR-F 

Rubber flexible cable 

ШКПЛ; GG/J; GG/J; GG/J; H05RR-F; H05RR-F; MCCM; H05RR-F; H05RR-F 

For connection of electrical appliances and consumers with low and middle mechanical stress 

to Alternating Current (AC). It has wide use in household, office, for cable reels, for connecting of 

mobile consumers and etc. 


• Nominal voltage Uo/U: 300V/500V 

• Ambient temperature: from -30°C to +60°C 

• Conductor material: Copper (Cu) wires, class 5 

• Conductors insulation: Rubber EPR 

• Outer sheath material: Rubber EPR 


Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 

Type Colour Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

814002 2X1 H05RR-F Black 6.1 - 8.0 19.0 71.0 100 

814003 2X1.5 H05RR-F Black 7.6 - 9.8 29.0 99.0 100 

814004 2X2.5 H05RR-F Black 9.0 - 11.6 48.0 148.0 100 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 


diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

814007 3X1 H05RR-F Black 6.5 - 8.5 29.0 88.0 100 

814008 3X1.5 H05RR-F Black 8.0 - 10.4 43.0 125.0 100 

814009 3X2.5 H05RR-F Black 9.6 - 12.4 72.0 175.0 100 

814010 3X4 H05RR-F Black 11.3 - 14.5 115.0 246.0 100 

YEARS TOTAL 

7 WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 


diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

814012 4X1 H05RR-F Black 9.0 - 11.6 58.0 165.0 100 

814013 4X1.5 H05RR-F Black 9.0 - 11.6 58.0 165.0 100 

814014 4X2.5 H05RR-F Black 10.7 - 13.8 96.0 225.0 100 

814015 4X4 H05RR-F Black 12.7 - 16.2 154.0 315.0 100 

814017 4X6 H05RR-F Black 14.2 - 18.1 231.0 440.0 100 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross 

section 

(n x mm²) 


diameter 

(mm) 

Cu weight 

(kg/km) 

Total 

weight 

(kg/km) 

Packing 

(m) 

814020 5X1.5 H05RR-F Black 9.8 - 12.7 72.0 185.0 100 

814021 5X2.5 H05RR-F Black 11.9 - 15.3 120.0 275.0 100 

814022 5x4 H05RR-F Black 15,6-19,9 187 475 100 

814023 5x6 H05RR-F Black 17.5-22.2 288 635 100 

ELMARK 


303

COMMUNICATION CABLES 


YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 

Construction: 

CCA-wires - 4x2x0.24 

CU-wires - 4x2x0.24 

Construction: 


UTP 

LAN cable, stranded in pairs, cat. 5e 

UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP; UTP CAT5E 

Cable, stranded by pairs, used for transmission of digital signals with high speed of transmission. 

Suitable for setting computer systems for data transmission, measuring and control systems with 

proper resistance to electromagnetic influences. 



• Temperature of laying: min. 0°C 

• Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ω ± 15 Ω 

• Loop resistance: ≤ 192 0/ km 

• Unbalance of loop resistance: ≤ 3% 

• Insulation resistance: ≥ 150 MΩ x km 

• Operating capacity: ≤ 55,8 nF/km 

• Cable diameter: 5 mm 

• Cable weight: 27 kg/km 

CONSTRUCTION 

• 879002 - CCA-wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm, 

acc. to IEC 60228 

• 879017 - CU wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm, 


• Insulation: PE compound 

• Cable bundle: 4 stranded pairs 

• Outer sheath: PVC compound or LSOH 

compound 

• Outer sheath colour: for PVC- grey 

Insulation colour of stranded pairs- core a/ core b: • white with blue ring/blue; • white with orange 

ring/orange; • white with green ring/green; • white with brown ring/brown. 

Catalogue Material Category Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Packing 

number 

4 10 16 62.5 100 125 

(m) 

Attenuation- db/100 m 4.1 6.5 8.2 17 22 24.9 

879002 CCA Cat. 5e 

305 

Attenuation (Next)- db 56.3 50.3 47.3 38.4 35.3 33.9 

879017 CU Cat. 5e Attenuation (Next)- db 56.3 50.3 47.3 38.4 35.3 33.9 305 

FTP 

LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with screen, cat. 5e 

FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP; FTP CAT5E 

Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil, used for transmission of digital signals with 

high speed of transmission. FTP cable is suitable for setting computer systems for data 

transmission, measuring and control systems and for transmission of high-frequency analogue 

signals in automatic and industrial TV networks . High resistance to electromagnetic influences. 










• Cable weight: 31 kg/km 

CONSTRUCTION 

• 879001- CCA-wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm, 




• PETP foil 

• Screen: laminated AI foil 


compound 

• Outer sheath colour tor PVC- grey 

Insulation colour of stranded pairs- core a/ core b: • white with blue ring/blue; • white with orange 


Catalogue Material Category Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Packing 

number 

4 10 16 62,5 100 125 

(m) 

879001 CCA Cat. 5e Attenuation - db/100 m 4.1 6.5 8.2 17 22 24.9 305 

304 

ELMARK 


Construction: 

CCA- wires - 4x2x0.24 

STP 

LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with screen on each pair, cat. 6 

Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil on each pair, used for transmission of digital 

signals with high speed of transmission, with spectrum of the frequency being used up to 

300 MHz for cat. 6. The cable is suitable for setting computer systems for data transmission, 

measuring and control systems and for transmission of high-frequency analogue signals in 

automatic and industrial TV networks and is with high resistance to electromagnetic influences. 




• Characteristic Impedance: 

- 100 Ω ± 15 Ω up to 100 MHz 

- 100 Ω ± (15 +0,05(f-100)) above 100 МНz 

• Loop resistance: ≤ 170 Ω / km 



• Operating capacity: ≤ 50 nF/km 


• Cable weight 42 kg/km 

Catalogue 

number 

879012 Cat. 6 

CONSTRUCTION 

• CCA- wires - 24 AWG; 0,57 mm acc. to IEC 

60228 


• Screen: laminated AI foil on each pair 

• Cable bundle: 4 stranded screened pairs 


compound 

• Outer sheath colour: for PVC- grey, for LSOHorange 

Insulation colour of stranded pairs - core a / core b: • white with blue ring/blue; • white with orange 


Category Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Packing 

4 10 16 62.5 100 200 300 

(m) 

Attenuation - db/100 m 3.8 6 7.6 15.5 19.9 29.5 35 

305 

Attenuation (Next) - db 65.3 59.3 56.2 47.4 44.3 39.8 38 


Construction: 


S-FTP 

LAN cable, stranded in pairs, with double-screen, cat. 5 

Cable, stranded in pairs, with screen of laminated foil, with braid of tinned copper wires used for 

transmission of digital signals with high speed of transmission, with spectrum of the frequency 

being used up to 100 MHz for cat. 5. The cable is suitable for setting computer systems for data 

transmission, measuring and control systems and for transmission of high frequency analogue 

signals in automatic and industrial TV networks. High resistance to electromagnetic influences. 









• Cable diameter: 6,9 mm 

Catalogue 

number 

879011 Cat. 5 

CONSTRUCTION 

• CCA- wires - 24 AWG; 0,51 mm acc. to IEC 

60228 



• PETP foil 

• Screen: laminated AI foil 


compound 

• Outer sheath colour: for PVC - grey 

Insulation colour of stranded pairs - core a/core b: • white with blue ring/blue; • white with orange 


Category Frequency - MHz Characteristic of attenuation Packing 

4 10 16 62.5 100 125 

(m) 

Attenuation - db/100 m 4.3 6.6 8.2 17.1 22 

305 

Attenuation (Next) - db 53 47 44 35 32 

YEARS TOTAL 

7 WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 

ELMARK 


305

COAXIAL CABLE RG6 / 96 

Coaxial cable, suitable for connection of TV aerials to TV receivers 


RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6; RG6; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6/96; RG6 

Suitable for high frequency equipment, measuring and control equipment and appliances, for 

setting up local computer networks, and data systems, for connection of TV aerials to TV receivers. 


• Model - RG6 / 96; 

• Material and structure of the core cable: CCS 

1.02 mm; 

• Type of insulation: PE 4.60 mm; 

• External conductor (screen): 96 Al foil; 

Catalogue 

number 

Description Insulation 

diameter 

(mm) 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

• Diameter and cable material: 6.9 mm PVC; 

• Wave impedance: 75 ± 5 Ohm; 

• Operating temperature: from -30 ° C to +70° C; 

• Damping ratio: at 100 MHz 0.0637 dB/m. 

• Outer sheath colour: White 

Wave 

resistance 

(Ω) 

Max. 

capacity 

(pF/m) 

Attenuation at 

200 MHz max. 

dB/100m 

856001 RG6/96 PE 4.70 8.40 PVC 75 ±3 68 12 100 

COAXIAL CABLE RG59 / + 2X0.5MM2 

Coaxial cable, suitable for video surveillance systems 

Packing 

(m) 

RG59+2x0.5; RG59+2x0.5; RG59; R59; RG59+2x0.5; RG59(CCTV)+2X0.5; RG59; 

RG59; 

RG59+2x0.5 

YEARS TOTAL 

7WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 


Coaxial cable: RG-59 

• Inner conductor: Ø 0.59 mm - CCS wire 

• Dielectric: Ø 3.7 mm PE full 

• Braid: Stranded wire Cu, Indoor coverage 

area: 90 % 

• Impedance: 75 Ω 

• Outer coating: Al foil + Al braiding 

Electrical cable: 

• Inner conductor: 2 x 0.5 m CU wires 

• Power wires resistance: 4 Ω / 100 m 

• Outer coating: Ø 5 mm 


Catalogue 

number 

856004 RG59/ 

U+2x0.5 

Description Insulation 

diameter 

(mm) 

Outer 

diameter 

(mm) 

• Cable attenuation at 100m section: 

- 10.9 dB @ 100 MHz 

- 15.2 dB @ 200 MHz 

- 23.2 dB @ 450 MHz 

- 32.6 dB @ 800 MHz 

- 36.6 dB @ 1000 MHz 


Wave 

resistance 

(Ω) 

Max. 

capacity 

(pF/m) 

Attenuation at 

200 MHz max. 

dB/100m 

Packing 

(m) 

PE 3.66 8/5mm 75 ±3 53.4 12.4 100 

ALARM CABLE 

Unshelled alarm cable 

Алармен кабел; Alarmni kabel; Alarmni kabel; Alarmni kabl; Alarmni kabel; 

Poplašný kábel; Cablu de alarmă; Riasztó kábel; Kαλώδιο συναγερμού 

Suitable for the connection of detectors, sensors, infra-red as well as micro wave or mixed 

technology systems to the switch board. 


CONSTRUCTION 


• Operating voltage: 300V RMS max 

• Capacitance between conductors: 

1KHz- 33pF/ft Nom. 

• Capacitance between conductors to shield: 

1KHz-60pF/ft Nom. 

• Damping ratio: at 100 MHz 0.0637 dB / m. 

Catalogue 

number 

Cross section 

(n x mm²) 

• Conductor: CCA 

• Insulation: PVC 

• Insulation colours: red, blue, yellow, black, 

green, white 

• Shield: without 

• Rip cord: synthetic fibers 

• Drain wire: no 

Cable type Colour Outer diameter 

(mm) 

Packing 

(m) 

879016 6x0.22 CCA White 4.2 100 

306 

ELMARK 


CABLES FOR SOLAR POWER SYSTEMS 

SOLAR CABLES H1Z2Z2-K 

APPLICATION 

They are specifically designed for the construction of photovoltage systems. H1Z2Z2-K solar cables 

have good wear resistance, extreme flexibility, UV protection and do not support combustion. 

They are also halogen-free, water and oil resistant. Cable weight: 4 mm 2 - 57kg; 6 mm 2 - 77kg 


• Reaction to fire: Dca S1a, d2, a1 

• Cable cross-section: 4 mm 2 ; 6 mm 2 

• Rated voltage (Uo/U): АС 1,0/1,0 kV; DC 1,5/1,5 

• Conductor material: Tinned copper Class 5 

• Number of conductors X diameter (N°x mm): 4 mm 2 - 50x0,30; 6 m 2 - 75x0,30 

• Insulation and sheath material: Halogen-free compound 

• Insulation thickness: 0,70 mm 

• Insulation diameter: 4 mm 2 - 3,90 mm; 6mm 2 - 4,50mm 

• Outer cable diameter: 4 mm 2 - 5,50 mm; 6 mm 2 - 6,05 mm 

• Cable colour: black; red 

• Maximum conductor resistance at 20°C: 4 mm 2 - 5,09 ohm/km; 6 mm 2 - 3,39 ohm/km 

• Maximum insulation resistance at 20°C: 4 mm 2 - 580 MΩ.km; 6 mm 2 - 500 MΩ.km 

• Minimum bending radius during laying: 5xØ of cable 

• Flame spread test on single cable: EN 60332-1-2 

• Operating temperature: -40+90°C 

• Maximum short-circuit temperature: 250°C/5sec. (max.) 

• Cable weight: 4 mm 2 - 57kg; 6 mm 2 - 77kg 

CERTIFICATION 

• Declaration of performance (DoP) 

• TUV Certificate 

• CE and EN Certificates 



(mm) 

(kg/km) (m) 

M411079/BL 4 Black 5,6 58 100 

M411079/R 4 Red 5,6 58 100 

M411080/BL 6 Black 6,2 78 100 

M411080/R 6 Red 6,2 78 100 


YEARS TOTAL 

7 WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

2 extended 

ELMARK 


307

EXPLOSION PROOF 

INSTALLATION 

SYSTEMS

EX ZONES- EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE 

ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU is a directive that applies to protective systems against explosions as well as all equipment used in or related to explosive 

atmospheres, such as electrical and non-electrical equipment, components and safety devices, control and adjustments necessary for the safe operation 

of this equipment and protective systems. 

Devices falling within the scope of the European Directive and responding to the essential requirements for the safety and health are identified by a 

marking plate on which the logo appears. 

LABELING OF ЕXPLOSION PROOF EQUIPMENT ACCORDING TO ATEX 2014/34/EU 

INSTALLATION | EX-PROOF SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION | EX-PROOF SYSTEMS 

EX-PROOF STARTERS AND INDICATORS 

STARTERS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE WITH 1 BUTTON 

FOR SURFACE MOUNTING, IP65 


• Application: Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 



• Terminals: for power conductors up to 2.5mm² 

• Mounting: Surface 

• IP Code: 65 

• Marking 

II 2 D Ex t IIIC T80°С IP65 Db 

II 2 G Ex e II T6Gb 

Catalogue 

number 

Entry QTY Button type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H H1 D 

720001 1 1 start 100 128 106 82 1 

720002 2 1 start 100 150 106 97 1 

720003 1 1 stop 100 128 106 82 1 

720004 2 1 stop 100 150 106 97 1 

720005 1 1 key I-0 100 128 106 82 1 

720006 2 1 key I-0 100 150 106 97 1 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

STARTERS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE WITH 2 BUTTONS 









• Marking 



Catalogue 

number 

Entry QTY Button type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H H1 D 

720009 1 2 start 100 128 106 82 1 

720010 2 2 start 100 150 106 97 1 

720011 1 2 stop 100 128 106 82 1 

720012 2 2 stop 100 150 106 97 1 

720013 1 1 start + 1 stop 100 128 106 82 1 

720014 2 1 start + 1 stop 100 150 106 97 1 

310 

ELMARK 


INDICATORS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE FOR 

SURFACE MOUNTING, IP65 



• Rated voltage: 20 ÷ 30V AC/DC 170 ÷ 250 V AC 50 Hz 




• Marking 

• II 2 D Ex t IIIC T80°С IP65 Db 

• II 2 G Ex e II T6Gb 

Catalogue 

number 

Entry QTY Light type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H H1 D 

720007R 1 1 red 100 128 106 82 1 

720008R 2 1 red 100 150 106 97 1 

720007G 1 1 green 100 128 106 82 1 

720008G 2 1 green 100 150 106 97 1 

720015RG 1 1 red+ 1 green 100 128 106 82 1 

720016RG 2 1 red+ 1 green 100 150 106 97 1 


STARTERS WITH INDICATORS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE 




• Buttons rated voltage: 400V AC 

• Indicators rated voltage: 20 ÷ 30V AC/DC 170 ÷ 250 V AC 50 Hz 

• Button rated current: 6A 




• Marking 

• II 2 D Ex t IIIC T80°С IP65 Db 

• II 2 G Ex e II T6Gb 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Entry QTY Button type Light type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H H1 D 

720017 1 1 start 1 green 100 128 106 82 1 

720018 2 1 start 1 green 100 150 106 97 1 

720019 1 1 stop 1 red 100 128 106 82 1 

720020 2 1 stop 1 red 100 150 106 97 1 

ELMARK 


311


STARTERS AND INDICATORS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE 

FOR FLUSH MOUNTING, IP65 



• Buttons rated voltage: 400V AC 

• Indicators rated voltage: 20 ÷ 30V AC/DC 

170 ÷ 250 V AC 50 Hz 

• Button rated current: 6A 

• Terminals: for power conductors up to 

2.5mm² 

Catalogue 

number 



• Marking 



Button type Light type Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H D 

720030 1 start Without 100 106 77 1 

720031 1 stop Without 100 106 77 1 

720032 1 key I-0 Without 100 106 77 1 

720033G Without 1 green 100 106 77 1 

720033R Without 1 red 100 106 77 1 

720034 2 start Without 100 106 77 1 

720035 2 stop Without 100 106 77 1 

720036 1 start + 1 stop Without 100 106 77 1 

720037RG Without 1 red+ 1 green 100 106 77 1 

720037G Without 2 green 100 106 77 1 

720037R Without 2 red 100 106 77 1 

720038 1 start 1 green 100 106 77 1 

720039 1 stop 1 red 100 106 77 1 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

DISTRIBUTION BOXES FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE FOR 

SURFACE AND HANGING MOUNTING, IP67 





• Terminals: for power conductors up to 

2.5mm² 

• Mounting: Surface/ Hanging 


• Material: Aluminum 

• Colour: Grey 

• Marking 

II 2D Ex t IIIC T80°C IP67 Db 

II 2G Ex e II T6 Gb 

Catalogue 

number 

Entry QTY Entry size Dimensions (mm) Packing/ 

Box 

L H D 

720050 3 3 x М20х1.5 185 195 70 1 

720051 3 3 x М25х1.5 185 195 70 1 

720052 4 4 x М20х1.5 185 195 70 1 

720053 4 4 x М25х1.5 185 195 70 1 

720054 3 3 x М20х1.5 + 1 hook 185 195 70 1 

720055 3 3 x М25х1.5 + 1 hook 185 195 70 1 

720056 3 3 x 3/4 185 195 70 1 

720057 4 4 x 3/4 185 195 70 1 

720058 3 2 x М20х1.5 + 1 x 3/4 185 195 70 1 

720059 3 2 x М25х1.5 + 1 x 3/4 185 195 70 1 

720060 4 3 x М20х1.5 + 1 x 3/4 185 195 70 1 

720061 4 3 x М25х1.5 + 1 x 3/4 185 195 70 1 

312 

ELMARK 


CABLE GLANDS FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE, IP67 


• Application: Zone 1, 2, 20, 21, 22 



• Material: Brass and rubber 

• Marking 



Catalogue 

number 

Model 

Cable outer 

diameter 

Connecting 

thread 


L T B 

720070 CENT S4 7.00- 8.50mm М20х1.5 42 M20 15 1 



720073 CENT S3 12.00- 15.00mm М25х1.5 43.5 M25 15 1 

720074 CENT S7 15.00- 17.00mm М25х1.5 43.5 M25 15 1 

Packing/ 

Box 


EX-PROOF STOPPER FOR WORK IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE, IP67 


• Application: Zone 1, 2, 20, 21, 22 



• Material: Brass and rubber 

• Marking 



Catalogue 

number 

Connecting 

thread 

L 


B 

720075 М20х1.5 20 15 1 

720076 М25х1.5 20 15 1 

Packing/ 

Box 

ELMARK 


313


EX-PROOF LIGHTING 

LED 

170 mm 

cold 

WHITE 

6500K 

165 mm 

ex-proof 

EX-PROOF CEILING & WALL LAMPS, IP67 

720100 


• Type: Explosion Proof LED Ceiling Lamp 


• Power: 20W 

• Lumens: 2400lm 

• Efficiency: 120lm/W 

• LED Chip: SAMSUNG 

• CRI≥80 

• Lamp Class: I 

• Temperature operating range: from -40°C to + 45°C 

• Material: Aluminum & PC 


II 2G Ex Db mb IIB +H2 T6 Gb 

II 2D Ex tb mb IIIC T85°C IP67 Db 

YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

LED 

235 mm 

cold 

WHITE 

6500K 

ex-proof 

720105 


• Type: Explosion Proof LED Ceiling / Wall Lamp 






• CRI≥80 





• Width: 55 mm 



136 mm 

314 

ELMARK 


200 mm 

LED 

cold 

WHITE 

6500K 

320 mm 

ex-proof 

720102 


• Type: Explosion Proof LED Ceiling Lamp 






• CRI≥80 





• Width: 470mm 




LED 

200 mm 

cold 

WHITE 

6500K 

410 mm 

ex-proof 

720103 


• Type: Explosion Proof LED Wall Lamp for 

Pipe 3/4 






• CRI≥80 





• Width: 470mm 



YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

ELMARK 


315


LED 

420 mm 

cold 

WHITE 

6500K 

420 mm 

ex-proof 

EX-PROOF HIGH BAY & CEILING/WALL LAMP, IP67 

720104 


• Type: Explosion Proof LED High Bay 






• CRI≥80 


• Temperature operating range: 

from -40°C to + 40°C 


• Width: max.280 mm 




YEARS TOTAL 

3WARRANTY 

+ 

3 standard 

0 extended 

LED 

200 mm 

cold 

WHITE 

6500K 

470 mm 

ex-proof 

720101 


• Type: Explosion Proof LED Wall Lamp 






• CRI≥85 



from -40°C to + 45°C 





280 mm 

LED 

cold 

WHITE 

6500K 

ex-proof 

EMERGENCY EX-PROOF LAMP, IP67 

720106 


• Type: Explosion Proof LED EXIT Light 


• Battery: 3,6V, 60mAh, Ni-Cd 

• Emergency Work Time: 3h 

• CRI≥80≥6.5cd/m² 



from -40°C to + 50°C 





420 mm 

316 

ELMARK 


SWITCHES & SOCKETS 

GERMAN AND FRENCH TYPE 

CITY SERIES

CITY SERIES GERMAN AND FRENCH TYPE 

White/White 

Anthracite/White 

Champagne metallic/ 

White 

Yellow/White 

Red/White Green/White Blue/White 

Orange/White 

Orange metallic/White 

Bordo metallic/ 

White 

Grey/White 

Champagne metallic 

White/ 


Anthracite/ 


Yellow/ 


Red/ 


Green/ 


Blue/ 


Orange/ 


Orange metallic/ 




Grey/ 

Champagne metallic

Anthracite 

White/Anthracite 

Champagne metallic/ 

Anthracite 

Blue/Anthracite 

Red/ 

Anthracite 

Green/ 

Anthracite 

Yellow/ 

Anthracite 

Orange/ 

Anthracite 

Orange metallic/ 

Anthracite 


Anthracite 

Grey/ 

Anthracite 

2 gangs Champagne metallic/White 3 gangs Red/White 

4 gangs Anthracite/White 

5 gangs Grey/White

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | CITY 

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | WHITE 

ONE BUTTON SWITCHES 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190011 1 button 1 way switch 10 10/100 


190031 1 button cross switch 10 10/100 

190791 1 button double pole switch 20 10/100 

ONE BUTTON SWITCHES WITH LIGHT 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190011L 1 button 1 way switch with light 10 10/100 


TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190041 2 buttons 1 way switch 10 10/100 


320 

ELMARK 


THREE BUTTONS SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

DOORBELL SWITCH 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190181 Doorbell switch 10/100 


DOORBELL SWITCH WITH NAME CARD 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190171 Doorbell switch with light name card 10 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

PUSH LIGHT BUTTON 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190183 Type: Push light button 10/100 

KEY CARD POWER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190043 Key card power switch 

10 10/60 

**Not compatible with another decorative frame. 

ELMARK 


321


CURTAIN CONTROL & INTERLOCK SHUTTER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

DIMMER SWITCH 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190045 1-2 mode curtain control switch 10 10/60 

190066 Interlock shutter switch 10 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190191 Dimmer switch LED 3-300W 10/60 

190193 Dimmer switch 0-10V 10/60 

MOTION SENSOR 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190771 Motion sensor 200W 10 10/60 

322 

ELMARK 


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | WHITE 


FRENCH TYPE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190211F French screw type socket 16 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190211S German screw type socket 16 10/100 

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET IP44 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190211D German screw type socket IP44 16 10/100 

Screw type sockets 

ELMARK 


323


GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH USB PORTS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET - DOUBLE 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190062 German screw type socket with 2 USB ports 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190371S German screw type socket (double) 16 10/100 

AUDIO & NETWORKING SOCKETS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190721 Audio socket- double 10 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190751 USB socket - double 2A 2 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190747 HDMI socket 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190281 Computer socket RJ45 CAT5E 10/100 

190034 Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 10/100 

324 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190711 Computer socket RJ45 - double 10/100 

TELEPHONE & TV SOCKETS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190261 Phone socket RJ11 10/100 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190731 Phone socket RJ11 + Computer socket RJ45 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190251 TV socket 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190033 TV+FM+SAT socket 10/100 

ACCESSORIES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190060 1 Gang cable outlet without cable terminal 10/100 

ELMARK 


325


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190741 One gang blank plate 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

190091 One gang surface mounting box 126 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

190092 Two gangs surface mounting box 66 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

190090 Silicone cover IP44 100 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

326 

ELMARK 


SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | ANTHRACITE 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 





YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



ELMARK 


327


THREE BUTTONS SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 


*Not compatible with another decorative frame. 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10 10/60 

328 

ELMARK 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

DIMMER SWITCH 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


193193 Dimmer switch 0-10V 10/60 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ELMARK 


329


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | ANTHRACITE 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



330 

ELMARK 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

193062 German screw type socket with 2xUSB ports 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

193371S German screw type socket (double) 16 10/100 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

193751 USB socket - double 2A 2 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

193747 HDMI socket 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



ELMARK 


331


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

193251 TV socket 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

193033 TV+FM+SAT socket 10/100 

ACCESSORIES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

193060 1 Gang cable outlet without cable terminal 10/100 

332 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

193741 One gang blank plate 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

193091 One gang surface mounting box 126 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

193092 Two gangs surface mounting box 66 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

ELMARK 


333


SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | CHAMPAGNE METALLIC 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 







Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



334 

ELMARK 


THREE BUTTONS SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10 10/60 

ELMARK 


335



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

DIMMER SWITCH 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


190194 Dimmer switch 0-10V 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


336 

ELMARK 


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | CHAMPAGNE METALLIC 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



ELMARK 


337


GERMAN TYPE SOCKET - DOUBLE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190372S German screw type socket - double 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190752 USB socket - double 2 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190772 HDMI socket 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


338 

ELMARK 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190252 TV socket 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190034F TV+FM+SAT socket 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ACCESSORIES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190172 1 gang blank plate 10/100 

ELMARK 


339


DECORATIVE PANELS CITY SERIES 

WHITE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190441 One gang panel 85x85 1/200 

190551 Two gangs panel 85x155 1/100 

190661 Three gangs panel 85x225 1/150 

190361 Four gangs panel 85x298 1/100 

190601 Five gangs panel 85x367 1/100 

One gang panel 

Two gangs panel 

Four gangs panel 

Three gangs panel 

Five gangs panel 

340 

ELMARK 



ANTHRACITE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 


Type 


Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 









CHAMPAGNE METALLIC PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 











ELMARK 


341



ORANGE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 


Type 


Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 








YELLOW PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 











342 

ELMARK 



GREEN PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 


Type 


Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 









RED PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 











ELMARK 


343



BLUE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 








GREY PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 











344 

ELMARK 



ORANGE METALLIC PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 


Type 


Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 









BORDO METALLIC PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 











ELMARK 


345


ITALY TYPE 

LECCE SERIES

White/White 

Black/White 

Silver grey/White Green/White Golden/White 

Graphite mat/White 

Graphite/White 

Blue/White 

Champagne/White Onix/White Cherry-tree/White 

White/Black 

Black/Black 

Silver grey/Black Green/Black Golden/Black 

Graphite mat/Black 

Graphite/Black 

Blue/Black 

Champagne/Black Onix/Black Cherry-tree/Black

LECCE SERIES ITALY TYPE 

1 gang Black/White 

2 gangs Green/White 2 gangs Blue/White 

6 gangs White/White 

3 gangs Onix/White 6 gangs Black/White 

3x2 gangs Champagne/White

MODULE SWITCHES | WHITE 


Catalogue 

number 

Type Size Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26001 1 button 1 way switch 1 mod 16 10/100 


26004 1 button cross switch 1 mod 10 10/100 

26027 Push light button 1 mod 10 10/100 

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | LECCE 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26026 1 button 2 pole switch 1 mod 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26002 1 button 1 way switch with light 1 mod 16 10/100 

CURTAIN CONTROL SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26006 Curtain switch 1 mod 6 10/60 

ELMARK 


349


DOORBELL SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 

DIMMER SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26005 Door bell switch 1 mod 10 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Size Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26015 Door bell 2mod 10/100 


Box (pcs) 

26055 Dimmer 250W 1 mod 10/60 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26053 LED dimmer 200VA 3 mod 10/60 

BOILER SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

26024 Boiler switch with neon 

* Not included decorative triple 

panel. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

3 mod 45A 10/60 

KEY POWER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26025 Key power switch 3 mod 30 10/100 

350 

ELMARK 


MODULE SOCKETS | WHITE 


Catalogue 

number 

Type Size Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26008 German type socket 2 mod 16 10/100 


ITALIAN TYPE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26020 Italian type socket 2 mod 16 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26007 Italian standard multi socket 1 mod 16 10/100 

UNIVERSAL TYPE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26009 Universal socket 2 mod 13 10/100 

ELMARK 


351


DOUBLE PIN SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26007SA Double pin socket 1 mod 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26021 Audio socket 1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26016 Sound dimmer 2 mod 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26014 2 port USB socket 

90-240V / Output: 5V 2A 

1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26022 HDMI socket 1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26013 Computer socket RJ45 CAT5E 1 mod 10/100 

26013C Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 1 mod 

352 

ELMARK 



Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26012 Phone socket 1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26010 TV socket 1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26011 Satellite socket 1 mod 10/100 


ACCESSORIES 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26017 Blank cover 1 mod 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26023 Button without functional part 3 mod 10/100 

ELMARK 


353


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

MODULE SWITCHES | ANTHRACITE 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



27004 1 button cross switch 1 mod 10 10/100 

27027 Push light button 1 mod 10 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27026 1 button 2 pole switch 1 mod 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27002 1 button 1 way switch with light 1 mod 16 10/100 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27006 Curtain switch 1 mod 6 10/60 

354 

ELMARK 


DOORBELL SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 

DIMMER SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27005 Door bell switch 1 mod 10 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27015 Door bell 2mod 10/100 


Box (pcs) 

27055 Dimmer 250W 1 mod 10/60 


Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27053 LED dimmer 200VA 1 mod 10/60 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 



panel. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

3 mod 45A 10/60 

KEY POWER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27025 Key power switch 3 mod 30 10/100 

ELMARK 


355


MODULE SOCKETS | ANTHRACITE 


Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27008 German type socket 2 mod 16 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ITALIAN TYPE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27020 Italian type socket 2 mod 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27007 Italian standard multi socket 1 mod 16 10/100 

UNIVERSAL TYPE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27009 Universal socket 2 mod 13 10/100 

356 

ELMARK 


DOUBLE PIN SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 


current (A) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

27007SA Double pin socket 1 mod 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27021 Audio socket 1 mod 10/100 


Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27016 Sound dimmer 2 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27014 2 port USB socket 

90-240V / Output: 5V 2A 

1 mod 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27022 HDMI socket 1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27013 Computer socket RJ45 CAT5E 1 mod 10/100 

27013C Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 1 mod 

ELMARK 


357



Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27012 Phone socket 1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27010 TV socket 1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27011 Satellite socket 1 mod 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ACCESSORIES 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27017 Blank cover 1 mod 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

27023 Button without functional part 3 mod 10/100 

358 

ELMARK 


INSTALLATION FRAMES & CONSOLES 

INSTALLATION FRAMES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Size Mounting Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26019 Mounting frame 1 mod/ 3 mod Recessed 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26018 Mounting frame 2 mod Recessed 10/100 


Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26056 Mounting frame 2x3 mod Recessed 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

2604 Mounting frame with cover IP65 4 mod Surface 10/100 

ELMARK 


359


Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

2603 Mounting box with cover IP65 3 mod Surface 10/100 

CONSOLE BOXES FOR PLASTERBOARD 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

24205 Console for plasterboard Triple Recessed 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

24206 Console for plasterboard Quadruple Recessed 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


Box (pcs) 

26636 Console for plasterboard Sixfold Recessed 10/100 

CONSOLE FOR BRICK AND CONCRETE 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Length 

(mm) 

Width 

(mm) 

Depth 

(mm) 

Packing 

(pcs) 

24207 1-3 Module Console Box 95 70 48 10/400 



24210 Console Box Spacer 20/200 

360 

ELMARK 


DECORATIVE PANELS LECCE SERIES 

WHITE PANELS 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26100 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26200 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26300 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26400 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

266001 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 

26600 3x2 gangs panel 122x122 

1 gang panel 2 gangs panel 3 gang panel 

4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

3x2 gangs panel 

ELMARK 


361


ANTHRACITE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26111 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26211 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26311 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26411 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

26611 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 

4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

BLUE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26101 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26201 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26301 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26401 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

26601 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 


4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

362 

ELMARK 


GOLDEN PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26103 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26203 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26303 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26403 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

26603 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 


4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

SILVER GREY PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26102 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26202 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26302 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26402 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

266021 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 




4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

ELMARK 


363


GRAPHITE MAT PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26104 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26204 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26304 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26404 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

26604 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 

4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

GRAPHITE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26105 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26205 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26305 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26405 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

266051 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 




4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

364 

ELMARK 


GREEN PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26107 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26207 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26307 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26407 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

26607 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 


4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

CHAMPAGNE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26106 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26206 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26306 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26406 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

266061 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 




4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

ELMARK 


365


ONIX PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26108 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26208 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26308 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26408 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

26608 6 gangs panel 82x194 1/100 

4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

CHERRY-TREE PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

26109 1 gang panel 82x122 1/200 

26209 2 gangs panel 82x122 1/100 

26309 3 gangs panel 82x122 1/150 

26409 4 gangs panel 82x147 1/100 

26609 6 gangs panel 122x122 


4 gangs panel 

6 gangs panel 

366 

ELMARK 



GERMAN AND FRENCH TYPE 

RHYME SERIES

RHYME SERIES GERMAN AND FRENCH TYPE 

White metallic Champagne metallic Grey metallic 

Graphite metallic 

Coffee metallic 

2 gangs/ White metallic 3 gangs/ Champagne metallic 

5 gangs/ Grey metallic 

4 gangs/ Coffee metallic 

6 gangs/ Graphite metallic

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | WHITE METALLIC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




SWITCHES & SOCKETS | RHYME 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


ELMARK 


369



Catalogue 

number 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11181B Doorbell switch with light name card 10 10/100 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11181C Type: Push light button 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11171A Curtain control switch 10 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

DIMMER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11191 Dimmer switch 10/100 

SENSOR SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11411 Sensor switch 10 10/60 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10 10/100 

370 

ELMARK 


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | WHITE METALLIC 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11211F French type socket 16 10/100 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11211 German screw type socket 16 10/100 

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH COVER 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11211C German screw type socket with cover 16 10/100 

ELMARK 


371


GERMAN TYPE SOCKET DOUBLE 

Catalogue 

number 

NETWORKING SOCKETS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11371 German screw type socket - double 16 10/100 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


112816E Computer socket RJ45 CAT6 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11741 Phone socket RJ11 - double 10/100 

372 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11251 TV socket 10/100 


number 

11681 TV socket+FM socket + SAT socket 

*Not compatible with another decorative 

frame. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10/100 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ELMARK 


373


SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | CHAMPAGNE METALLIC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


374 

ELMARK 



Catalogue 

number 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


DIMMER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10 10/100 

ELMARK 


375


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | CHAMPAGNE METALLIC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


376 

ELMARK 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


ELMARK 


377


Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11252 TV socket 10/100 


number 



frame. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

378 

ELMARK 


SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | GREY METALLIC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 






Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


ELMARK 


379



Catalogue 

number 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

DIMMER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10 10/100 

380 

ELMARK 


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | GREY METALLIC 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


ELMARK 


381



Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


382 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11254 TV socket 10/100 



number 



frame. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ELMARK 


383


SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | GRAPHITE METALLIC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


384 

ELMARK 



Catalogue 

number 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


DIMMER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10 10/100 

ELMARK 


385


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | GRAPHITE METALLIC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


386 

ELMARK 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


ELMARK 


387


Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11255 TV socket 10/100 


number 



frame. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

388 

ELMARK 


SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | COFFEE METALLIC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 






Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


ELMARK 


389



Catalogue 

number 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

DIMMER SWITCH 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 



Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10 10/100 

390 

ELMARK 


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | COFFEE METALLIC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11216C German screw type socket IP44 16 10/100 

ELMARK 


391



Catalogue 

number 

Type 


Rated 

current (A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


392 

ELMARK 


Catalogue 

number 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

11256 TV socket 10/100 



number 



frame. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ELMARK 


393


DECORATIVE PANELS RHYME SERIES 

WHITE METALLIC PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 


Type 


Size: HxL 

(mm) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




11601 Five gangs panel 85x298 

11621 Six gangs panel 85x367 


Six gangs panel 

CHAMPAGNE METALLIC PANELS 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 











394 

ELMARK 


GREY METALLIC 

Catalogue 

number 



Type 



Size: HxL 

(mm) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 







GRAPHITE METALLIC 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Size: HxL 

(mm) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 











ELMARK 


395


COFFEE METALLIC 

Catalogue 

number 



Type 



Size: HxL 

(mm) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 






ACCESSORIES 


Colour 

number 

192215 Outlet safety cap White 

192214 Outlet safety cap Brown 


Colour 

number 

192121/WH Wall protector White 

192121/TR Wall protector Transparent 

396 

ELMARK 



UK TYPE 

LONDON SERIES

LONDON SERIES UK TYPE 

1 button switch 

White 

2 buttons switch 

White 


White 


White 

Single pole switched 

socket/ White 

Single pole switched double 

socket/ White 

1 gang socket 

White 

2 gang socket 

White 

1 button switch 

Anthracite 


Anthracite 


Anthracite 


Anthracite 

Single pole switched 

socket with USB/ Anthracite 

Single pole switched double socket 

with 2xUSB/ Anthracite 

1 gang socket 

Anthracite 

2 gang socket 

Anthracite

SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | WHITE 

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | LONDON 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190863/WH 1 button 1 way switch 10 Plastic PC 

190864/WH 1 button 2 way switch 10 Plastic PC 

190867/WH 1 button cross switch 10 Plastic PC 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190872/WH 1 button double pole switch + neon 45 Plastic PC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190865/WH 2 buttons 1 way switch 10 Plastic PC 


ELMARK 


399



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

FOUR BUTTONS SWITCH 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190875/WH Curtain control switch 10 Plastic PC 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190874/WH Push light button 10 Plastic PC 

LIGHT DIMMER 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(W) 

Material 

190876/WH Light dimmer 600 Plastic PC 

400 

ELMARK 


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | WHITE 

SWITCHED BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET WITH NEON 

Catalogue 

number 

190879/WH 

190886/WH 

Type 

Single pole switched British standard socket 

with neon 

Double pole switched British standard socket 

with neon 

Rated current Material 

(AX) 

13 Plastic PC 

13 Plastic PC 


SWITCHED BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET WITH NEON AND USB 

Catalogue 

number 

190880/WH 

190887/WH 

Type 

Single pole switched British standard socket 

with neon and USB 

Double pole switched British standard socket 



(AX) 

13 Plastic PC 

13 Plastic PC 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

SWITCHED BRITISH STANDARD DOUBLE SOCKET WITH NEON 

Catalogue 

number 

190881/WH 

190888/WH 

Type 

Single pole switched British standard double 

socket with neon 

Double pole switched British standard double 



(AX) 

13 Plastic PC 

13 Plastic PC 

ELMARK 


401


SWITCHED BRITISH STANDARD DOUBLE SOCKET 

WITH NEON AND USB 

Catalogue 

number 

190882/WH 

190889/WH 

Type 

Single pole switched British standard double 

socket with neon and USB 

Double pole switched British standard double 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 


(AX) 

13 Plastic PC 

13 Plastic PC 

Outlet 

Material 

190884/WH Outlet with fuse and LED indicator 13 13 Plastic PC 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Material 

number 

190883/WH 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Plastic PC 


Material 

number 

190885/WH 2 gangs RJ45 LAN socket Plastic PC 

402 

ELMARK 


SWITCHES PLUS PANEL | ANTHRACITE 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190863/A 1 button 1 way switch 10 Plastic PC 

190864/A 1 button 2 way switch 10 Plastic PC 

190867/A 1 button cross switch 10 Plastic PC 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190872/A 1 button double pole switch + neon 45 Plastic PC 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190865/A 2 buttons 1 way switch 10 Plastic PC 


ELMARK 


403



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

FOUR BUTTONS SWITCH 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190875/A Curtain control switch 10 Plastic PC 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 

Material 

190874/A Push light button 10 Plastic PC 

LIGHT DIMMER 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(W) 

Material 

190876/A Light dimmer 600 Plastic PC 

404 

ELMARK 


SOCKETS PLUS PANEL | ANTHRACITE 

SWITCHED BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET WITH NEON 


number 

190879/A Single pole switched British standard socket 

with neon 

190886/A Double pole switched British standard socket 

with neon 


(AX) 

13 Plastic PC 

13 Plastic PC 


SWITCHED BRITISH STANDARD SOCKET WITH NEON AND USB 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


number 

190880/A Single pole switched British standard socket 


190887/A Double pole switched British standard socket 



(AX) 

13 Plastic PC 

13 Plastic PC 



number 

190881/A Single pole switched British standard double 


190888/A Double pole switched British standard double 



(AX) 

13 Plastic PC 

13 Plastic PC 

ELMARK 


405



AND USB 


number 

190882/A Single pole switched British standard double 


190889/A Double pole switched British standard double 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(AX) 


(AX) 

13 Plastic PC 

13 Plastic PC 

Outlet 

Material 

190884/A Outlet with fuse and LED indicator 13 13 Plastic PC 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Material 

number 

190883/A 1 gang RJ45 LAN socket Plastic PC 


Material 

number 

190885/A 2 gang RJ45 LAN socket Plastic PC 

406 

ELMARK 



GERMAN TYPE 

ANTIQUE SERIES

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | ANTIQUE 

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | WHITE 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



190204 Push light button 10 10/100 

TWO BUTTON SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH COVER, IP44 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190206 Socket with cover, IP44 16 10/100 

408 

ELMARK 


GERMAN TYPE DOUBLE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

DISTRIBUTION BOX, IP44 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190202 German type socket - double 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190208 Distribution box 400V, IP44 10/100 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ELMARK 


409


SWITCHES & SOCKETS | BLACK 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



190205 Push light button 10 10/100 

TWO BUTTON SWITCHES 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 



Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190207 Socket with cover, IP44 16 10/100 

410 

ELMARK 


GERMAN TYPE DOUBLE SOCKET 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

DISTRIBUTION BOX, IP44 

Rated current 

(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190203 German type socket - double 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 

Type 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190209 Distribution box 400V, IP44 10/100 


YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ELMARK 


411

WATERPROOF 


GERMAN TYPE

WATERPROOF SWITCHES IP44/ IP65 

ONE BUTTON SWITCHES, IP44 

Catalogue 

number 

Type Colour Rated current 

(A) 

TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES, IP44 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

191011 1 button 1 way switch, IP44 White 10 10/100 

191021 1 button 2 way switch, IP44 White 10 10/100 

191031 1 gang intermediate switch, iP44 White 10 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

191041 2 buttons 1 way switch, IP44 White 10 10/100 

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | WATERPROOF 

ONE BUTTON SWITCHES, IP65 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

191111 1 button 1 way switch, IP65 Grey 10 10/100 


191181 1 gang push button switch, IP65 Grey 10 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

TWO BUTTONS SWITCHES, IP65 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


ELMARK 


413


WATERPROOF SOCKETS IP44/ IP65 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

GERMAN TYPE SOCKET WITH COVER - DOUBLE, IP44 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

191012 German type socket, IP44 White 16 10/100 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

191071 German type socket - double, IP44 White 16 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

191112 German type socket, IP65 Grey 16 10/100 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

191171 German type socket - double, IP65 Grey 16 10/100 

414 

ELMARK 


WATERPROOF SWITCHES & SOCKETS IP44 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 




Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

190214 German type socket - double, IP44 White 16 10/100 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

ONE BUTTON SWITCH WITH GERMAN TYPE SOCKET, IP44 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

190216 1 button 1 way switch with 

German type socket, IP44 

190218 1 button 2 way switch with 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

White 16 10/100 

White 16 10/100 

TWO BUTTONS SWITCH WITH GERMAN TYPE SOCKET, IP44 

Catalogue 

number 


(A) 

190217 2 buttons 1 way switch with 


Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

White 16 10/100 

ELMARK 


415

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | WATER HEATER SWITCHES 

WATER HEATER SWITCHES 

YEARS TOTAL 

5WARRANTY 

+ 

5 standard 

0 extended 

Catalogue 

number 

BOILER SWITCH WITH NEON 

Type 


* Not included decorative 

triple panel. 

Voltage 

(V AC) 

Rated Colour Size Packing/ 

current (A) 

Box (pcs) 

220 45 White 3 mod 1/60 


Catalogue 

number 


(A) 



panel. 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

3 mod 45A 10/60 

416 

ELMARK 


WATER HEATER SWITCHES 

BOILER SWITCH FOR FLUSH MOUNTING 

Catalogue 

number 

M030137 

BOILER SWITCH FOR SURFACE MOUNTING 

Catalogue 

number 

M030164 

Type 

Boiler switch for flush 

mounting 

Type 

Boiler switch for 

surface mounting 

Voltage 

(V AC) 

Rated Colour 

current (A) 

Size LxHxW 

(mm) 

220 25 White 100x100x50 1 

Voltage 

(V AC) 

Rated Colour 

current (A) 

Size LxHxW 

(mm) 

220 25 White 100x100x50 1 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

Packing/ 

Box (pcs) 

SWITCHES & SOCKETS | WATER HEATER SWITCHES 

YEARS TOTAL 

2WARRANTY 

+ 

2 standard 

0 extended 

ELMARK 


417

Elmark Electrical Equipment 2024-EN

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?